3D Home Architect - Design Suite Deluxe v6.0 - User Guide

USER’S GUIDE

www.broderbund.com

383204-MAN

© 2002-2004 Riverdeep Interactive Learning Limited, and its licensors. © Copyright 1998-2004, Cadsoft Corporation. Helios32 Radiosity Renderer © 1994-2002 Heart Consultants Ltd. Portions of this product were created using LEADTOOLS © 1991-1997 LEAD Technologies, Inc. 3D Studio File Format Library © 1996-2001 by J.E. Hoffmann [email protected]. This software contains ImageCELs® texture files from Imagetects. © Copyright 1989-98. ImageCELs® is a registered trademark of IMAGETECTS ™. Portions of content © 2001 Corbis Images. This software contains some symbols from Cad Easy Corporation © Copyright 1991-2004. All rights reserved by their respective parties. Broderbund, 3D Home Architect and 3DTrueView are trademarks or registered trademarks of Riverdeep Interactive Learning Limited. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The online services advertised as part of this product may be changed or discontinued at any time for any reason. NOTE: DESIGN PLANS CREATED IN 3D HOME ARCHITECT® OR 3D HOME LANDSCAPE VERSIONS 4 OR EARLIER CANNOT BE IMPORTED INTO THIS PRODUCT.

License Agreement

IMPORTANT: READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT LICENSE AGREEMENT AND LIMITED WARRANTY SINGLE-USER PRODUCTS THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR AN ENTITY) AND RIVERDEEP, INC., AND ITS SUBSIDIARIES AND AFFILIATES ("RIVERDEEP"). THIS AGREEMENT IS GOVERNED BY THE INTERNAL SUBSTANTIVE LAWS OF THE STATE OF MASSACHUSETTS (AND NOT BY THE 1980 UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS, AS AMENDED). BY INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, REMOVE THE PRODUCT FROM YOUR HARD DRIVE AND PERMANENTLY ERASE ALL COPIES OF THE PRODUCT. IF YOU ARE THE ORIGINAL INSTALLER OF THE SOFTWARE YOU MAY PROMPTLY AFTER PURCHASE RETURN THE SOFTWARE (INCLUDING PRINTED MATERIALS) WITH PROOF OF PURCHASE TO THE PLACE WHERE IT WAS PURCHASED FOR A FULL REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID.

RIVERDEEP SOFTWARE LICENSE GRANT OF LICENSE. This License Agreement permits you to use one copy of RIVERDEEP software (the "Software"), which may include electronic documentation, on a single computer/workstation. The Software is "in use" on a computer when it is loaded into the temporary memory (i.e., RAM or Cache) or installed into permanent memory (e.g., hard disk, CD-ROM drive, or other storage device) of that computer. This License does not constitute a sale and does not authorize a sale of the Software or anything created thereby. All intellectual property (including copyright, trademark and patent) in the Software, including all animations, audio, images, maps, music, photographs, video, and text incorporated into the Software, are owned by RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors, and are protected by United States laws and international treaty provisions. RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors retain all rights not expressly granted herein. You must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material, except that you may make one copy of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes. You may transfer your rights under this Agreement on a permanent basis provided you transfer the license granted by this Agreement, and the Software and all associated printed materials, and you retain no copies, and the recipient agrees to all of the terms of this Agreement. •

You may not use the software on or over a network or any other transfer device (including the Internet) except in a manner using the network and online functions included in the Software, if any. Use of the Software on more than one computer constitutes copyright infringement and may be punishable by civil fines, criminal penalties, or both.

•

You may not rent or lease the Software, but schools and libraries may lend the Software to third parties provided the Software is in CD format and each end user is given a copy of this License Agreement which will govern the use of such Software.

•

You may not modify, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software, except to the extent that this restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law.

•

You may not remove any proprietary notices or labels in the Software.

•

You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software or distribute printed copies of any user documentation provided in electronic format.

•

You may not publicly perform or publicly display the Software.

Broderbund® The restrictions contained herein apply equally to hybrid CD-ROMs which may contain multiple versions of the Software for use on different operating systems. Regardless of the type of media you receive, you may use only the portion appropriate for your single-user computer/workstation. In the event you fail to comply with any of the terms or conditions of this license, your rights to use the Software will end, you shall stop using the Software, remove the Software from your computer, and permanently erase all copies of the Software. You may not export or re-export the Software or any underlying information or technology except in full compliance with all United States and other applicable laws and regulations.

LIMITED WARRANTY LIMITED WARRANTY. RIVERDEEP and its affiliates, suppliers and licensors warrant to the original installer of the Software, for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of purchase, that the media on which the Software is distributed is substantially free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. ANY AND ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING WRITTEN MATERIALS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. REMEDIES. Your exclusive remedy shall be, at RIVERDEEP's sole option, (a) the refund of the amount you paid for the Software or (b) repair or replacement of the Software, provided that the defective Software is returned to RIVERDEEP (at Riverdeep, Dock Door #9, 120 Hidden Lake Circle, Duncan, SC 29334. Telephone: (319) 378-7319) along with proof of the date of purchase within ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident, abuse, neglect or misapplication. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Except as set forth above, the Software is sold "as-is", without any express or implied warranties of any kind. LIMITATION OF LIABILITIES. IN NO EVENT WILL RIVERDEEP OR ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, ECONOMIC, COVER, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, USER DOCUMENTATION, OR RELATED TECHNICAL SUPPORT, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES OR COSTS RELATING TO THE LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS, GOODWILL, DATA, TIME OR COMPUTER PROGRAMS, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL RIVERDEEP'S AND ITS AFFILIATES', SUPPLIERS' AND LICENSORS' LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY CONTRACT, PRODUCT LIABILITY, OR TORT CLAIM). BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

License Agreement

MISCELLANEOUS RIVERDEEP may cancel, change, modify, discontinue, terminate or charge a fee at any time for any reason for the online services advertised as part of this product. The links in the Software will allow third-party sites to be accessed. These linked sites are not under the control of RIVERDEEP, and RIVERDEEP is not responsible for the contents of any linked site, and any such inclusion of any link does not imply endorsement by RIVERDEEP of the site. No change or modification of the License will be valid unless it is in writing and is signed by RIVERDEEP. The provisions of this Agreement are severable; if any provision is held to be invalid or unenforceable, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision. If the Software was acquired outside the United States, then local law may apply. U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software and user documentation is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS AND LIMITED RIGHTS. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software--Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable. Riverdeep, Inc., 125 Cambridge Park Drive, Cambridge, MA 02140 U.S.A.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

The Basics

1

Chapter 1: Welcome......................................................................................1 Package Contents ............................................................................................................................................ 2 System Requirements ..................................................................................................................................... 2 Important Notes for Previous 3D Home Design Users............................................................................. 2 Backing Up Textures from Version 5 ........................................................................................................... 2 Uninstalling a Previous Version ................................................................................................................... 3 How the Uninstallation Works ..................................................................................................................... 3 Installing 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6 ............................................................................ 3 Starting the Program ...................................................................................................................................... 4 Registering the Program ................................................................................................................................ 4 Starting a New Project.................................................................................................................................... 4 Using the House Builder Wizard.................................................................................................................. 4 Starting a Drawing from Scratch .................................................................................................................. 4 Disabling the Startup Dialog ......................................................................................................................... 4 Adjusting Your Display Settings .................................................................................................................. 4 Learning the Program .................................................................................................................................... 5 Program Basics ........................................................................................................................................ 5 How to Complete a Project.................................................................................................................... 5 How to Use the Tools ............................................................................................................................. 5 Advanced Features ................................................................................................................................. 5 Online Help...................................................................................................................................................... 6 Troubleshooting Guide .................................................................................................................................. 6 Glossary of Terms ........................................................................................................................................... 6 Technical Support ........................................................................................................................................... 6 Online Self-Support ................................................................................................................................ 6 E-mail Support ........................................................................................................................................ 6 Telephone Support ................................................................................................................................. 7 3D Home Architect Online ............................................................................................................................ 7 Broderbund.com ............................................................................................................................................. 7

i

Table of Contents

Satisfaction Guaranteed ................................................................................................................................. 7

Chapter 2: Screen Layout ............................................................................ 9 Title Bar .......................................................................................................................................................... 10 Menu Bar ........................................................................................................................................................ 10 Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs .......................................................................................................................... 10 Building Toolbar ................................................................................................................................... 10 Interiors Toolbar.................................................................................................................................... 10 Landscape Toolbar................................................................................................................................ 10 Terrain Toolbar...................................................................................................................................... 11 Basic View Control Toolbar................................................................................................................. 11 Zoom and Navigate Toolbar ............................................................................................................... 11 Catalog Panel ................................................................................................................................................. 11 Status Bar........................................................................................................................................................ 12

Chapter 3: House Builder Wizard.............................................................. 13 Using the House Builder Wizard................................................................................................................ 14 Running the House Builder Wizard When a Drawing is Open............................................................. 16 Preventing the House Builder Wizard from Launching ......................................................................... 16

Chapter 4: Building Locations................................................................... 17 Defining Building Locations ....................................................................................................................... 18 Current Building Location........................................................................................................................... 19 Location Dimming ........................................................................................................................................ 19

Chapter 5: Drawing & Editing Basics ....................................................... 21 Inserting Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 22 Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements....................................................................... 22 Inserting Ceilings Automatically................................................................................................................ 22 Going into Selection Mode for Editing ...................................................................................................... 23 Disabling Pre-Selection ................................................................................................................................ 23 Selecting Elements for Editing .................................................................................................................... 23 Deselecting Elements.................................................................................................................................... 24 Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View ............................................................ 24 Accessing Edit Tools..................................................................................................................................... 24

ii

Table of Contents

Controlling the View

25

Chapter 6: 2D and 3D Viewing ...................................................................27 Viewing the 2D Plan..................................................................................................................................... 28 Viewing a 2D Designer’s View ................................................................................................................... 28 Viewing in 3D................................................................................................................................................ 29 Zooming In and Out..................................................................................................................................... 30 Zooming a Selected Area ............................................................................................................................. 30 Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area .............................................................................................................. 30 Panning Across a Drawing.......................................................................................................................... 30 Changing the Display Mode ....................................................................................................................... 30 Displaying Framing ...................................................................................................................................... 32

Chapter 7: View Filter..................................................................................33 Filtering the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 34 Displaying/Hiding Building Elements ..................................................................................................... 34 Displaying/Hiding Building Locations .................................................................................................... 35 Displaying/Hiding Landscape Elements.................................................................................................. 35 Displaying/Hiding Text .............................................................................................................................. 36 Displaying/Hiding Dimensions................................................................................................................. 36 Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring ........................................................................................................ 36 Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images ................................................................................................. 37 Selection Filtering.......................................................................................................................................... 37 Making Building Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable ....................................................................... 38 Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable ...................................................................... 38 Making Landscape Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable.................................................................... 39 Making Text Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................................................ 39 Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable................................................................................... 40 Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable .......................................................................... 40 Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable ................................................................... 40

Building Your Home

41

Chapter 8: Foundation ................................................................................43 Creating a Basement or Crawlspace Foundation ..................................................................................... 44 Editing a Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation ............................................................................................ 45 Lengthening and Shortening Walls............................................................................................................ 45 Rotating a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 45

iii

Table of Contents

Curving a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 46 Breaking a Wall ............................................................................................................................................. 46 Deleting a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 46 Applying a Different Material to the Foundation Floor.......................................................................... 46 Inserting Strip Footings Beneath the Foundation Walls ......................................................................... 47 Editing the Strip Footing Type.................................................................................................................... 47 Editing the Size of Strip Footings ............................................................................................................... 47 Moving/Stretching Strip Footings ............................................................................................................. 47 Lengthening and Shortening Strip Footings............................................................................................. 48 Breaking Strip Footings................................................................................................................................ 48 Deleting Strip Footings ................................................................................................................................ 48 Inserting Columns ........................................................................................................................................ 48 Editing the Column Type ............................................................................................................................ 49 Editing the Size and Elevation of a Column ............................................................................................. 49 Moving Columns .......................................................................................................................................... 49 Deleting a Column........................................................................................................................................ 49 Inserting Mono Footings Under Columns ................................................................................................ 49 Editing the Mono Footing Type.................................................................................................................. 50 Editing the Size of Mono Footings ............................................................................................................. 50 Moving Mono Footings................................................................................................................................ 50 Rotating a Mono Footing ............................................................................................................................. 50 Deleting Mono Footings............................................................................................................................... 50 Creating a Slab Foundation ......................................................................................................................... 51 Moving a Slab ................................................................................................................................................ 51 Resizing a Slab............................................................................................................................................... 51 Reshaping a Slab ........................................................................................................................................... 51 Rotating a Slab............................................................................................................................................... 52 Editing the Thickness of a Slab ................................................................................................................... 52 Deleting a Slab............................................................................................................................................... 52

Chapter 9: Walls.......................................................................................... 53 Drawing the Ground Floor Exterior Walls................................................................................................ 54 Adding a Story .............................................................................................................................................. 55 Applying Different Finishes to Exterior Walls ......................................................................................... 56 Drawing Interior Walls ................................................................................................................................ 57 Editing a Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation ............................................................................................ 57 Lengthening and Shortening Walls............................................................................................................ 57 Rotating a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 57 Curving a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 58 Breaking a Wall ............................................................................................................................................. 58 Deleting a Wall .............................................................................................................................................. 58 Adding Paint and Wallpaper ...................................................................................................................... 58

iv

Table of Contents

Adding Trim to Walls .................................................................................................................................. 59

Chapter 10: Doors, Windows & Openings ................................................61 Inserting Doors.............................................................................................................................................. 62 Editing Door Types....................................................................................................................................... 62 Editing the Size and Shape of a Door......................................................................................................... 62 Editing a Door’s Sidelites and Highlites.................................................................................................... 63 Editing a Door Leaf....................................................................................................................................... 64 Editing Door Details ..................................................................................................................................... 64 Flipping a Door ............................................................................................................................................. 65 Flipping a Door Swing ................................................................................................................................. 65 Moving a Door .............................................................................................................................................. 65 Raising or Lowering a Door ........................................................................................................................ 66 Deleting a Door ............................................................................................................................................. 66 Inserting Windows ....................................................................................................................................... 66 Editing Window Types ................................................................................................................................ 67 Editing a Window’s Size Properties........................................................................................................... 67 Editing a Window’s Sidelites, Highlites and Lowlites ............................................................................ 68 Editing Window Details............................................................................................................................... 69 Flipping a Window ....................................................................................................................................... 70 Moving a Window ........................................................................................................................................ 70 Raising or Lowering a Window.................................................................................................................. 70 Deleting a Window....................................................................................................................................... 70 Inserting Wall Openings .............................................................................................................................. 70 Editing the Shape of a Wall Opening......................................................................................................... 71 Editing the Size of a Wall Opening ............................................................................................................ 71 Moving a Wall Opening............................................................................................................................... 71 Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening ........................................................................................................ 72 Deleting a Wall Opening.............................................................................................................................. 72

Chapter 11: Floors & Ceilings ....................................................................73 How Floors are Created ............................................................................................................................... 74 Defining Individual Floor Areas................................................................................................................. 74 Raising or Lowering a Floor ........................................................................................................................ 74 Editing the Thickness of a Floor ................................................................................................................. 75 Applying Different Materials to Floors ..................................................................................................... 75 Inserting Openings in Floors....................................................................................................................... 75 Deleting a Floor ............................................................................................................................................. 75 How Ceilings Are Created........................................................................................................................... 75 Inserting Ceilings by Perimeter .................................................................................................................. 76 Inserting Ceilings by Room ......................................................................................................................... 76

v

Table of Contents

Inserting a Ceiling by Picking Points ......................................................................................................... 77 Raising or Lowering a Ceiling .................................................................................................................... 77 Curving a Ceiling Edge................................................................................................................................ 77 Inserting Openings in Automatic Ceilings................................................................................................ 78 Inserting Openings in Manually Inserted Ceilings.................................................................................. 78 Resizing a Ceiling Opening ......................................................................................................................... 78 Curving a Ceiling Opening Edge ............................................................................................................... 79 Removing Ceiling Openings ....................................................................................................................... 79 Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings ............................................................................. 79 Deleting a Ceiling.......................................................................................................................................... 80

Chapter 12: Stairs, Ramps & Railings ...................................................... 81 Inserting Stairs and Ramps.......................................................................................................................... 82 Parts of a Staircase ........................................................................................................................................ 82 Editing Stair Size Properties ........................................................................................................................ 82 Editing a Staircase Layout ........................................................................................................................... 83 Editing Stair Details ...................................................................................................................................... 84 Editing the Appearance of the Cut Line .................................................................................................... 85 Editing General Ramp Properties............................................................................................................... 85 Editing the Layout of a Ramp ..................................................................................................................... 86 Moving a Staircase or Ramp........................................................................................................................ 87 Rotating a Staircase or Ramp ...................................................................................................................... 87 Deleting a Staircase or Ramp ...................................................................................................................... 87 Inserting Railings on Staircases and Ramps ............................................................................................. 87 Inserting a Horizontal Railing..................................................................................................................... 89 Parts of a Railing ........................................................................................................................................... 89 Editing Railing Properties............................................................................................................................ 89 Stretching a Railing....................................................................................................................................... 91 Rotating a Railing.......................................................................................................................................... 91 Deleting Railings ........................................................................................................................................... 91

Chapter 13: Roofs....................................................................................... 93 Inserting an Automatic Roof Over Perimeter Walls................................................................................ 94 Inserting a Roof by Picking Points ............................................................................................................. 94 Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created .................................................................................. 95 Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof..................................................................................................... 96 Changing the Appearance of Raked Surfaces Under Gable Ends......................................................... 96 Extending Walls Beneath Gable Ends........................................................................................................ 97 Creating a Porch Roof .................................................................................................................................. 97 Selecting a Roof for Editing ......................................................................................................................... 99 Stretching a Roof ........................................................................................................................................... 99

vi

Table of Contents

Moving a Roof ............................................................................................................................................... 99 Rotating a Roof ............................................................................................................................................ 100 Editing a Roof’s Shape and Size................................................................................................................ 100 Editing the Height of a Roof...................................................................................................................... 101 Editing a Roof’s Frame Details.................................................................................................................. 101 Applying a Different Roofing Material ................................................................................................... 101 Cutting an Opening in a Roof ................................................................................................................... 102 Removing Roof Openings.......................................................................................................................... 102 Deleting a Roof ............................................................................................................................................ 102 Inserting Dormers ....................................................................................................................................... 102 Moving a Dormer Roof .............................................................................................................................. 103 Stretching a Dormer Roof .......................................................................................................................... 104 Deleting a Dormer ...................................................................................................................................... 104 Inserting Skylights ...................................................................................................................................... 104 Moving a Skylight....................................................................................................................................... 104 Rotating a Skylight...................................................................................................................................... 104 Editing the Properties of a Skylight ......................................................................................................... 105 Deleting a Skylight...................................................................................................................................... 105

Designing the Interior

107

Chapter 14: Kitchen Builder Wizard ........................................................109 Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard............................................................................ 110

Chapter 15: Cabinets ................................................................................113 Inserting Cabinets ....................................................................................................................................... 114 Moving Cabinets ......................................................................................................................................... 114 Rotating Cabinets........................................................................................................................................ 114 Raising or Lowering a Cabinet.................................................................................................................. 114 Editing Cabinet Properties ........................................................................................................................ 114 Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets ................................................................................................. 116 Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet .................................................................................................................. 116 Deleting a Cabinet....................................................................................................................................... 116

Chapter 16: Appliances ............................................................................117 Inserting Appliances................................................................................................................................... 118 Moving Appliances..................................................................................................................................... 118 Rotating Appliances ................................................................................................................................... 118 Raising or Lowering an Appliance........................................................................................................... 118

vii

Table of Contents

Editing Appliance Size Properties............................................................................................................ 118 Applying a Different Color or Finish to Appliances ............................................................................. 119 Deleting an Appliance................................................................................................................................ 119

Chapter 17: Furniture, Electronics & Accessories ................................ 121 Inserting Furniture...................................................................................................................................... 122 Inserting Electronics ................................................................................................................................... 122 Inserting Accessories .................................................................................................................................. 122 Moving Furnishing Elements.................................................................................................................... 122 Rotating Furnishing Elements................................................................................................................... 122 Raising or Lowering a Furnishing Element ............................................................................................ 123 Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements ................................................................................................. 123 Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements......................................... 123 Deleting Furnishing Elements................................................................................................................... 124

Utilities

125

Chapter 18: Interior Lighting ................................................................... 127 Inserting Interior Light Fixtures ............................................................................................................... 128 Changing the Way a Light Snaps on Insertion ....................................................................................... 128 Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture ........................................................................................................ 128 Moving Light Fixtures................................................................................................................................ 128 Rotating Light Fixtures .............................................................................................................................. 129 Editing the Size of Light Fixtures ............................................................................................................. 129 Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source ..................................................................................................... 129 Turning a Light On or Off ......................................................................................................................... 130 Changing the Look of a Light Fixture...................................................................................................... 130 Deleting Light Fixtures............................................................................................................................... 131

Chapter 19: Electrical ............................................................................... 133 Inserting Outlets and Switches ................................................................................................................. 134 Inserting Thermostats and Smoke Detectors .......................................................................................... 134 Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element ............................................................................................. 134 Moving an Electrical Element ................................................................................................................... 135 Editing the Size of an Electrical Element ................................................................................................. 135 Applying a Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element ........................................................ 135 Deleting Electrical Elements...................................................................................................................... 135 Inserting Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 136 Stretching and Reshaping Wiring Segments .......................................................................................... 136

viii

Table of Contents

Changing the Line Style of Wiring ........................................................................................................... 136 Deleting Wiring........................................................................................................................................... 137

Chapter 20: Plumbing ...............................................................................139 Inserting Plumbing Fixtures...................................................................................................................... 140 Raising or Lowering a Plumbing Fixture ................................................................................................ 140 Moving Plumbing Fixtures........................................................................................................................ 140 Rotating Plumbing Fixtures ...................................................................................................................... 140 Editing the Size of a Plumbing Fixture .................................................................................................... 140 Applying a Different Color or Finish to Plumbing Fixtures................................................................. 141 Deleting Plumbing Fixtures....................................................................................................................... 141

Chapter 21: Heating & Ventilation ...........................................................143 Inserting Heating Elements ....................................................................................................................... 144 Inserting Floor Registers and Cold Air Returns..................................................................................... 144 Inserting a Chimney ................................................................................................................................... 144 Moving HVAC Elements ........................................................................................................................... 145 Rotating HVAC Elements.......................................................................................................................... 145 Raising or Lowering an HVAC Element ................................................................................................. 145 Editing the Size of an HVAC Element ..................................................................................................... 145 Deleting HVAC Elements.......................................................................................................................... 145

Terrain Modeling

147

Chapter 22: Terrain Modeling...................................................................149 Defining the Basic Terrain ......................................................................................................................... 150 Creating Hills and Valleys......................................................................................................................... 150 Creating Berms and Trenches ................................................................................................................... 151 Creating Plateaus ........................................................................................................................................ 152 Creating Slopes............................................................................................................................................ 153 Turning the Terrain On and Off ............................................................................................................... 155

Chapter 23: Property Lines ......................................................................157 Defining Your Building Lot....................................................................................................................... 158 Defining a Custom Building Lot............................................................................................................... 159

ix

Table of Contents

Working on the Exterior of Your Home

161

Chapter 24: Fences & Gates .................................................................... 163 Inserting a Fence ......................................................................................................................................... 164 Stretching a Fence Layout.......................................................................................................................... 165 Changing the Length of a Fence ............................................................................................................... 165 Creating a Break in a Fence ....................................................................................................................... 165 Parts of a Fence............................................................................................................................................ 165 Editing the Properties of a Fence .............................................................................................................. 165 Changing the Fencing Material................................................................................................................. 167 Deleting a Fence .......................................................................................................................................... 167 Inserting a Gate ........................................................................................................................................... 167 Moving a Gate ............................................................................................................................................. 168 Flipping a Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 168 Flipping a Gate’s Swing ............................................................................................................................. 168 Editing the Properties of a Gate ................................................................................................................ 168 Deleting a Gate ............................................................................................................................................ 169

Chapter 25: Decks & Patios ..................................................................... 171 Using the Deck Builder Wizard ................................................................................................................ 172 Building a Deck with the Deck Tool ........................................................................................................ 173 Moving a Deck............................................................................................................................................. 174 Rotating a Deck ........................................................................................................................................... 174 Changing the Direction of Deck Boards .................................................................................................. 174 Stretching a Deck ........................................................................................................................................ 174 Reshaping a Deck........................................................................................................................................ 174 Curving a Deck Edge.................................................................................................................................. 174 Changing the Height of a Deck................................................................................................................. 175 Editing Deck Post Properties..................................................................................................................... 175 Displaying Footings Under Deck Posts ................................................................................................... 175 Editing the Deck Frame.............................................................................................................................. 175 Changing the Railing Style ........................................................................................................................ 176 Controlling the Display of Deck Railings................................................................................................ 177 Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting ................................................................................................ 177 Inserting Openings in a Deck.................................................................................................................... 177 Resizing a Deck Opening........................................................................................................................... 178 Reshaping a Deck Opening ....................................................................................................................... 178 Curving a Deck Opening Edge ................................................................................................................. 178 Removing Deck Openings ......................................................................................................................... 178 Deleting a Deck ........................................................................................................................................... 178

x

Table of Contents

Adding Stairs to a Deck ............................................................................................................................. 178 Moving Deck Stairs..................................................................................................................................... 179 Parts of a Staircase ...................................................................................................................................... 179 Editing the Size of Deck Stairs .................................................................................................................. 179 Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs ............................................................................... 180 Editing Stringers, Risers and Treads ........................................................................................................ 180 Deleting Deck Stairs ................................................................................................................................... 181 Creating a Patio ........................................................................................................................................... 181 Moving a Patio Slab .................................................................................................................................... 182 Resizing a Patio Slab................................................................................................................................... 182 Reshaping a Patio Slab ............................................................................................................................... 182 Rotating a Patio Slab................................................................................................................................... 182 Editing the Thickness of a Patio Slab ....................................................................................................... 183 Apply a Different Material to a Patio....................................................................................................... 183 Deleting a Patio Slab................................................................................................................................... 183

Chapter 26: Retaining Walls.....................................................................185 Drawing Retaining Walls........................................................................................................................... 186 Editing a Retaining Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation ........................................................................ 186 Lengthening and Shortening Retaining Walls........................................................................................ 186 Rotating a Retaining Wall.......................................................................................................................... 186 Curving a Retaining Wall .......................................................................................................................... 186 Breaking a Retaining Wall ......................................................................................................................... 187 Applying Different Finishes to Retaining Walls .................................................................................... 187 Deleting a Retaining Wall .......................................................................................................................... 187

Chapter 27: Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways ...............................................................................................189 Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways ..................................................................................... 190 Stretching a Path Element.......................................................................................................................... 190 Moving a Path Element.............................................................................................................................. 191 Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element ................................................................................ 191 Applying Different Materials to Path Elements ..................................................................................... 191 Deleting a Path Element............................................................................................................................. 191

Landscaping

193

Chapter 28: Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas.........................195 Creating Filled Areas.................................................................................................................................. 196

xi

Table of Contents

Resizing a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 196 Reshaping a Filled Area ............................................................................................................................. 196 Rotating a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 197 Moving a Filled Area.................................................................................................................................. 197 Changing the Fill Material......................................................................................................................... 197 Deleting a Filled Area................................................................................................................................. 197

Chapter 29: Edging................................................................................... 199 Inserting Edging.......................................................................................................................................... 200 Cleaning Up Corners.................................................................................................................................. 200 Changing the Length of Edging................................................................................................................ 201 Breaking Edging.......................................................................................................................................... 201 Moving Edging............................................................................................................................................ 201 Rotating Edging .......................................................................................................................................... 201 Editing the Height or Width of Edging ................................................................................................... 202 Changing the Edging Material.................................................................................................................. 202 Deleting Edging........................................................................................................................................... 202

Chapter 30: Trees, Shrubs & Plants........................................................ 203 Inserting Plants............................................................................................................................................ 204 Moving a Plant ............................................................................................................................................ 204 Changing the Elevation of a Plant ............................................................................................................ 204 Editing the 2D Appearance of a Plant...................................................................................................... 204 Changing the Age of a Plant...................................................................................................................... 205 Forcing a Custom Plant Size...................................................................................................................... 205 Deleting a Plant ........................................................................................................................................... 206 Seeing Plant Growth Over Time............................................................................................................... 206 Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants ..................................................................................................... 206 Using the Plant Encyclopedia ................................................................................................................... 207 The Encyclopedia Main Page .................................................................................................................... 208 Selecting a Plant to View.................................................................................................................... 208 Viewing Plant Information ................................................................................................................ 208 Plant Views .......................................................................................................................................... 209 Plant Care Calendar.................................................................................................................................... 210 World Map Page ......................................................................................................................................... 212 Notebook Page ............................................................................................................................................ 213 Picture Page ................................................................................................................................................. 214 Diseases Page............................................................................................................................................... 215 Filtering the Plant List ................................................................................................................................ 216 Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog.......................................................................... 217

xii

Table of Contents

Chapter 31: Exterior Furniture .................................................................219 Inserting Exterior Furniture ...................................................................................................................... 220 Moving Exterior Furniture ........................................................................................................................ 220 Rotating Exterior Furniture ....................................................................................................................... 220 Editing the Size of Exterior Furniture ...................................................................................................... 220 Applying Different Colors or Finishes to Exterior Furniture............................................................... 220 Deleting Exterior Furniture ....................................................................................................................... 221

Chapter 32: Exterior Structures ...............................................................223 Inserting Exterior Structures ..................................................................................................................... 224 A Note About House Templates .............................................................................................................. 224 Moving Exterior Structures ....................................................................................................................... 224 Rotating Exterior Structures ...................................................................................................................... 224 Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure ................................................................................................. 225 Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures............................................................ 225 Deleting an Exterior Structure .................................................................................................................. 225

Chapter 33: Landscape Lighting..............................................................227 Inserting Landscape Lighting ................................................................................................................... 228 Moving a Landscape Light Fixture .......................................................................................................... 228 Editing the Size of a Landscape Light Fixture ........................................................................................ 228 Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source ..................................................................................................... 228 Turning a Light On or Off ......................................................................................................................... 229 Changing the Look of a Landscape Light Fixture.................................................................................. 230 Deleting a Landscape Light Fixture ......................................................................................................... 230

Chapter 34: Exterior Accessories............................................................231 Inserting Exterior Accessories................................................................................................................... 232 Moving Exterior Accessories..................................................................................................................... 232 Rotating Exterior Accessories.................................................................................................................... 232 Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory............................................................................................ 232 Editing the Size of an Exterior Accessory................................................................................................ 232 Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory ......................................................................................... 233 Deleting an Exterior Accessory................................................................................................................. 233

Chapter 35: Irrigation ................................................................................235 Inserting Irrigation...................................................................................................................................... 236 Moving Sprinklers ...................................................................................................................................... 236 Rotating Sprinklers ..................................................................................................................................... 236 Editing the Height of a Sprinkler.............................................................................................................. 236

xiii

Table of Contents

Editing a Sprinkler’s Spray Coverage ...................................................................................................... 236 Deleting a Sprinkler.................................................................................................................................... 236

Drawing & Editing Tools

237

Chapter 36: Drawing Aids ........................................................................ 239 Setting Up a Drawing Grid........................................................................................................................ 240 Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off ................................................................................................... 240 Using the Grid Snap ................................................................................................................................... 240 Turning the Grid Snap On and Off .......................................................................................................... 240 Using the Object Snap ................................................................................................................................ 240 Using Ortho ................................................................................................................................................. 241 Using Angle Snap ....................................................................................................................................... 241 Disabling/Enabling Collision Control..................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 37: Measurement........................................................................ 243 Changing the Unit of Measure.................................................................................................................. 244 Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs ....................................................................................................... 244 Measuring Distances .................................................................................................................................. 244 Measuring Area and Perimeter................................................................................................................. 245

Chapter 38: Commander .......................................................................... 247 Displaying the Commander ...................................................................................................................... 248 Using the Commander ............................................................................................................................... 248 Displaying the Coordinate Icon................................................................................................................ 248 Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before You Insert It ................................................... 248 Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements .................................................... 249 Entering Values in the Commander......................................................................................................... 249 Direction and Angle of Rotation............................................................................................................... 250 Defining Points in the Cartesian Coordinate System ............................................................................ 250 Specifying Distance and Direction in the Polar Coordinate System ................................................... 250 Using the Commander When Rotating Elements .................................................................................. 250 Using the Commander When Curving Elements .................................................................................. 251

Chapter 39: Editing Your Design............................................................. 253 Undoing the Previous Action.................................................................................................................... 254 Redoing an Undo ........................................................................................................................................ 254 Accessing Edit Commands........................................................................................................................ 254 Moving Elements ........................................................................................................................................ 254

xiv

Table of Contents

Doing a Straight Drag-and-Drop...................................................................................................... 254 Using the Move Tool .......................................................................................................................... 254 Raising or Lowering an Element .............................................................................................................. 255 Rotating Elements in 2D Plan View ......................................................................................................... 255 Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation ............................................................................................ 255 Using the Rotate Tool ......................................................................................................................... 256 Changing an Element’s Orientation......................................................................................................... 256 Copying Elements on the Same Location................................................................................................ 257 Copying Elements to Other Locations ..................................................................................................... 257 Arraying Elements ...................................................................................................................................... 257 Deleting Elements ....................................................................................................................................... 258 Editing the Size and Composition of an Element .................................................................................. 258 Changing an Element’s Material or Color............................................................................................... 259

Power Tools

261

Chapter 40: Project Trace Image .............................................................263 Importing an Image to Trace..................................................................................................................... 264 Matching the Floor Plan’s Drawing Scale ............................................................................................... 264 Tracing the Imported Floor Plan .............................................................................................................. 264 Deleting a Project Trace Image ................................................................................................................. 265

Chapter 41: Photo Boards ........................................................................267 Importing a Photo Board ........................................................................................................................... 268 Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog............................................................................... 269 Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog............................................................................................... 269 Moving a Photo Board ............................................................................................................................... 269 Rotating a Photo Board in 2D Plan View ................................................................................................ 269 Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board ............................................................................................... 270 Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa............................................... 270 Editing the Size of a Photo Board ............................................................................................................. 270 Deleting a Photo Board .............................................................................................................................. 270 Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images...................................................................................... 270

Chapter 42: Text & Dimensions ...............................................................273 Adding Text to Your Drawing .................................................................................................................. 274 Moving Text................................................................................................................................................. 274 Rotating Text................................................................................................................................................ 274 Editing Text Content .................................................................................................................................. 274

xv

Table of Contents

Changing the Style of Text......................................................................................................................... 275 Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text ......................................................................................... 275 Deleting Text................................................................................................................................................ 275 Adding Text with a Leader........................................................................................................................ 275 Moving and Stretching a Leader .............................................................................................................. 276 Changing the Leader Arrow Style............................................................................................................ 276 Moving Leader Text ................................................................................................................................... 277 Editing Leader Text .................................................................................................................................... 277 Deleting Text with a Leader ...................................................................................................................... 277 Dimensioning .............................................................................................................................................. 277 Setting the Current Dimension Style........................................................................................................ 277 Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions ............................................................................................... 278 Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings .................................................................................................. 278 Creating Auto Interior Dimensions.......................................................................................................... 279 Specifying Interior Dimension Settings ................................................................................................... 280 Creating Linear Dimensions...................................................................................................................... 280 Creating Aligned Dimensions................................................................................................................... 281 Moving a Dimension Line ......................................................................................................................... 281 Stretching Dimensions ............................................................................................................................... 281 Changing the Style of a Dimension.......................................................................................................... 282 Deleting a Dimension ................................................................................................................................. 282 Dimension Style Properties ....................................................................................................................... 282 Anatomy of a Dimension................................................................................................................... 282 Lines and Arrows................................................................................................................................ 282 Dimension Text ................................................................................................................................... 283 Line Styles ............................................................................................................................................ 283

Chapter 43: Project Estimate................................................................... 285 Generating a Project Estimate ................................................................................................................... 286 Opening a Saved Estimate......................................................................................................................... 287 Editing Material Pricing............................................................................................................................. 287

Chapter 44: 3DTrueView™....................................................................... 289 How 3DTrueView™ Rendering Works................................................................................................... 290 Setting the Viewpoint for the Scene ......................................................................................................... 290 Setting the Scene.......................................................................................................................................... 290 Defining Your Location and Time of Day ............................................................................................... 291 Creating a 3DTrueView™ Rendering...................................................................................................... 292 Adjusting the Rendering Quality ............................................................................................................. 293 Changing the Refresh Rate During Lighting Calculations ................................................................... 293 Adjusting the Brightness of the Rendered Image .................................................................................. 293

xvi

Table of Contents

Turning Daylight Off.................................................................................................................................. 294 Using Antialiasing to Reduce Jagged Edges........................................................................................... 294 Creating a Fog Effect .................................................................................................................................. 294 Creating a Smoke Effect ............................................................................................................................. 294 Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures .................................................................................. 295 Editing the Surface Properties of Materials ............................................................................................ 295 Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File .......................................................................................... 295 Specifying the Output Size of Rendered Images.................................................................................... 296 Creating Multiple 3DTrueView™ Renderings in the Same Project .................................................... 296

Managing Files

297

Chapter 45: Opening, Saving & Printing .................................................299 Opening a Saved Project ............................................................................................................................ 300 Viewing Sample Plans................................................................................................................................ 300 Changing the Number of Files in the Recently Used File List ............................................................. 300 Repairing Damaged Projects ..................................................................................................................... 300 Saving Projects............................................................................................................................................. 301 Setting the Automatic Save........................................................................................................................ 301 Specifying a Default Save Directory ........................................................................................................ 301 Saving a Project as a Template.................................................................................................................. 301 Selecting a Default Project Template........................................................................................................ 302 Disabling the Use of Templates ................................................................................................................ 302 Setting the Path to the Templates Directory ........................................................................................... 302 Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files............................................................................................... 303 Closing Projects ........................................................................................................................................... 303 Printing Drawings....................................................................................................................................... 303 Using Print Setup ........................................................................................................................................ 304

Chapter 46: Exporting Files......................................................................305 Exporting Your Model ............................................................................................................................... 306 Exporting the Current View ...................................................................................................................... 306

Customization

307

Chapter 47: Screen Settings ....................................................................309 Displaying/Hiding Toolbars .................................................................................................................... 310 Displaying Toolbars in Tabbed Format ................................................................................................... 310

xvii

Table of Contents

Displaying Toolbars in a Non-tabbed Format ........................................................................................ 310 Changing the Background Color of Toolbars ......................................................................................... 310 Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas ...................................................................................................... 310 Moving Toolbars ......................................................................................................................................... 310 Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel..................................................................................................... 311 Resizing the Catalog Panel ........................................................................................................................ 311 Moving the Catalog Panel ......................................................................................................................... 311 Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar............................................................................................................ 312 Changing the Background Color of the Drawing Window.................................................................. 312 Hardware Acceleration .............................................................................................................................. 312 Improving Graphics Display..................................................................................................................... 313

Chapter 48: Managing View Windows .................................................... 315 Using the View Manager ........................................................................................................................... 316 Creating New View Windows .................................................................................................................. 316 Turning View Tabs On............................................................................................................................... 317 Switching Between View Windows ......................................................................................................... 317 Tiling View Windows................................................................................................................................. 317 Cascading View Windows......................................................................................................................... 317 Returning to a Maximized View............................................................................................................... 318 Restoring the Previous Arrangement of View Windows ..................................................................... 318 Closing View Windows ............................................................................................................................. 318 Opening View Windows that You Have Closed.................................................................................... 318 Renaming a View Window........................................................................................................................ 318 Editing the Print Scale of a View .............................................................................................................. 319 Deleting View Windows............................................................................................................................ 319

Chapter 49: Custom Viewing ................................................................... 321 Creating New 3D Views ............................................................................................................................ 322 Changing a 3D View................................................................................................................................... 322 Turning Cameras On and Off ................................................................................................................... 322 Changing Your Viewpoint......................................................................................................................... 322 Changing the Camera Height ................................................................................................................... 323 Changing the Target of Your View .......................................................................................................... 323 Changing the Target Height...................................................................................................................... 323 Viewing in Perspective Mode ................................................................................................................... 323 Viewing in Parallel Mode .......................................................................................................................... 324 Selecting a Preset Camera Angle .............................................................................................................. 324 Changing the Viewing Field Angle.......................................................................................................... 325 Walking Around in 3D View .................................................................................................................... 326 Flying Around Your 3D Model................................................................................................................. 326

xviii

Table of Contents

Sliding in a 3D View ................................................................................................................................... 326 Spinning the View Using the Look Around Tool .................................................................................. 326 Resetting the Camera in a 3D View.......................................................................................................... 327 Selecting a Background for 3D Views...................................................................................................... 327 Viewing Elevations ..................................................................................................................................... 328 Turning Elevation Marks On and Off...................................................................................................... 328 Moving Elevation Marks ........................................................................................................................... 328 Changing the Target of an Elevation ....................................................................................................... 329 Editing Elevation Properties ..................................................................................................................... 329 Deleting an Elevation ................................................................................................................................. 329 Creating a Custom Elevation .................................................................................................................... 329 Creating a Section View ............................................................................................................................. 330 Viewing Section Views............................................................................................................................... 330 Turning Section Marks On and Off.......................................................................................................... 331 Editing a Section View ............................................................................................................................... 331 Editing Section Properties ......................................................................................................................... 331 Deleting a Section View ............................................................................................................................. 331

Chapter 50: Catalogs & Elements............................................................333 Using the Catalog Manager....................................................................................................................... 334 Adding a Group to a Catalog .................................................................................................................... 334 Renaming a Group in a Catalog ............................................................................................................... 335 Deleting a Group in a Catalog................................................................................................................... 335 Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog ............................................................................................ 335 Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog ........................................................................ 336 Importing 3D Studio Files.......................................................................................................................... 336 Simplifying an Element.............................................................................................................................. 338 Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed ........................................................................... 338 Working with Property Pages................................................................................................................... 339 Using Automatic Name Generation......................................................................................................... 339 Editing the Name Generation Formula ................................................................................................... 339 Basic Page..................................................................................................................................................... 340 Changing an Element’s Orientation................................................................................................. 340 Appearance Page ........................................................................................................................................ 341 Quantity Page .............................................................................................................................................. 342 Behavior Page .............................................................................................................................................. 342 Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties ................................................................................................................................................ 343 Adding Hyperlinks to an Element’s Properties ..................................................................................... 343 Creating a New Catalog............................................................................................................................. 344 Creating a Copy of a Catalog .................................................................................................................... 345 Importing Elements into Catalogs............................................................................................................ 345

xix

Table of Contents

Deleting Elements from a Catalog............................................................................................................ 346 Opening a Catalog ...................................................................................................................................... 346 Closing a Catalog ........................................................................................................................................ 346 Viewing Catalog Properties....................................................................................................................... 346

Chapter 51: Materials, Colors & Patterns ............................................... 347 Things You Should Know About Editing Materials.............................................................................. 348 Customizing the Materials Library .......................................................................................................... 348 Editing Material Properties ....................................................................................................................... 349 Using Textures from Outside Sources ..................................................................................................... 351 Saving Customized Materials to a Materials Library File..................................................................... 351 Importing Materials from a Materials Library File................................................................................ 352 Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory................................................................................. 352 Customizing the Patterns Library ............................................................................................................ 353

Chapter 52: Line Styles ............................................................................ 355 Things You Should Know About Editing Line Styles ........................................................................... 356 Customizing the Line Styles Library........................................................................................................ 356 Saving Line Styles to a Line Styles Library File...................................................................................... 358 Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File........................................................................... 358 Customizing the Linetypes Library ......................................................................................................... 359

Chapter 53: Text & Dimension Styles ..................................................... 361 Customizing the Text Styles Library........................................................................................................ 362 Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File ............................................................ 363 Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File........................................................................... 364 Customizing the Dimension Styles Library ............................................................................................ 364 Dimension Style Properties ....................................................................................................................... 365 Anatomy of a Dimension................................................................................................................... 365 Lines and Arrows................................................................................................................................ 365 Dimension Text ................................................................................................................................... 366 Line Styles ............................................................................................................................................ 367 Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File..................................... 367 Importing Dimension Styles from Dimension Styles Library File ...................................................... 367

Chapter 54: Light Sources ....................................................................... 369 Things You Should Know About Editing Light Sources ...................................................................... 370 Customizing the Light Source Library .................................................................................................... 370 Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File.................................................... 371 Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File................................................................... 372 Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory.......................................................................... 372

xx

Table of Contents

Chapter 55: Wizard Configurations .........................................................375 Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration ................................................................... 376 Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder Wizard Configuration ................................................................. 376

Glossary .....................................................................................................379 Catalog Index.............................................................................................387 Index ...........................................................................................................399

xxi

Part 1

The Basics Welcome

page 1

Screen Layout

page 9

House Builder Wizard

page 13

Building Locations

page 17

Drawing & Editing Basics

page 21

Chapter

Welcome Congratulations on purchasing 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6! We guarantee you are going to enjoy creating your dream design projects. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite is for anyone who wants to design, renovate, decorate or landscape a home. This high-quality, multi-functional tool is easy to use and delivers the results you want — completely and accurately. It eliminates the monotonous labor involved in creating building plans, and frees you to devote your energy to the creative — and enjoyable — aspects of building and landscape design. Whether you are just playing around with different design ideas, or preparing drawings for a building professional, 3D Home Architect® Design Suite makes it fun and easy. Possible uses include: • Home design

• 3D visualization

• Floor plans

• Photorealistic rendering

• Interior design

• Landscaping

• Exterior design

• Budget and materials list

• Remodeling

• Export to other file formats

Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents of this guide so you can quickly find the answers you need while working on your project.

1

Chapter 1 Welcome

Package Contents ®

Your 3D Home Architect Design Suite software comes with everything you need to install and use the software, as well as some extras. The package includes the following: • • •

3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe 6 installation CD 3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe 6 User’s Guide Bonus Home Plans CD

System Requirements In order to run 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6, your system should include the following: • • • •

• • • • •

Microsoft® Windows® 98SE/2000 SP4/XP SP1/ME 500Mhz or higher processor 128 MB RAM (256 MB recommended) 300MB free hard-disk space (750MB recommended if you are installing the Plant Encyclopedia on your hard drive) 4X CD-ROM drive or faster Video Card with OpenGL driver and at least 32MB RAM Color monitor with 1024x768 resolution or higher Mouse Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher to view tutorials and access online features (optional).

Important Notes for Previous 3D Home Design Users If you are using 3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe 6, you can open drawings from 3D Home Design Suite Professional 5, 3D Home Architect® 5 and 3D Home Landscape Designer 5. Drawings from older versions of 3D Home Architect or 3D Home Landscape Designer (4.0 or earlier) are not accepted. If you have projects from version 5 of a 3D Home Design program and would like to be able to open them in version 6, it is recommended that you

2

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

make the textures in the older version available in version 6 so that textures will appear properly in version 6. This is because textures in the older version are bitmap (BMP) files, and the textures in version 6 are JPG files. The JPG format was chosen for version 6 to reduce file size and improve program speed. If you choose not to back up your old textures, you can still open a version 5 drawing in version 6. However, the model will have no textures applied to it when you open it in version 6, and you will have to apply new textures to your elements if you want textures in your drawing. There are two ways to make textures from version 5 available in version 6: •

•

Back up your old Textures directory temporarily, then once version 6 is installed, copy the old textures into the new Textures directory of version 6. This method allows you to uninstall version 5 if you want. See Backing Up Textures from Version 5 on page 2. Or, once version 6 is installed, set your Textures path in your program settings to the Textures folder in the older version. With this method you cannot uninstall the old version. Also, when working with new drawings in version 6, materials will not show up in your catalog or when using the Materials Paintbrush unless you switch the path back to the Textures directory of version 6. For more information, see Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory on page 352.

Backing Up Textures from Version 5 If you want to uninstall version 5 before installing version 6, and you want to be able to open version 5 drawings in version 6 with all your textures properly applied, you should back up your old textures. If you are not planning to uninstall version 5, backing up your Textures directory is not necessary because they will still be available on your system and can be copied to your new Textures directory.

Uninstalling a Previous Version To back up textures from version 5: Windows®

1.

Open

2.

Locate the Textures directory. (e.g. C:\Program Files\Broderbund\Broderbund Home Design 5.1\Textures.)

3.

Copy the folder to another location on your system, such as the root (e.g. C: drive).

4.

You can now safely uninstall version 5 if you want.

Explorer.

Once you’ve installed version 6, you can copy the textures in the backed up Textures directory to your new Textures directory. The new directory will then contain textures from both version 5 and version 6. By default, textures are located in the following directory in version 6: C:\\Program Files\3D Home Architect\Design Suite Deluxe 6\Textures

Uninstalling a Previous Version Note: If you have projects from version 5 that you would like to open in version 6, see

Important Notes for Previous 3D Home Design Users on page 2 before uninstalling. If you currently have any older 3D Home Design products installed on your system, you may want to uninstall your current version before installing 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6. To uninstall a previous version: 1.

At your Windows® desktop, select Start > Settings > Control Panel.

2.

In the Control Panel window, double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.

3.

In the Add/Remove Programs window, select the program to be deleted.

4.

Click the Change/Remove button.

5.

In the InstallShield Wizard window, enable the Remove radio button.

6.

Click Next.

7.

In the Confirm Uninstall window, click Yes. The uninstallation begins.

8.

Follow any remaining instructions.

How the Uninstallation Works When you uninstall an older version of the software, all program files, folders and icons are removed unless you modified your catalog and/ or have projects residing in the program’s Projects directory. In this case, the old program folder remains on your system with the old Catalogs and Projects directories in tact. If you want you can replace the Catalogs and Projects directories in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite 6 with the old directories after you’ve installed it.

Installing 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6 To install 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6, you need to run Setup. Make sure you exit all other programs, applications and screensavers before installing. To install the program: 1.

Begin at the Windows® desktop.

2.

Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears and loads the setup.

3.

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

Note: If the install screen does not appear automatically, you must install the program manually. To install the program if installation does not begin automatically: 1.

Make sure the installation CD is in your CDROM drive.

2.

At the Windows® desktop, click the Start button, then select Run.

3.

Type D:\setup.exe in the Open edit box. The letter D represents your CD-ROM drive. If you are installing from a different drive, substitute the correct letter for the letter D.

4.

Click OK, then follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

User’s Guide

3

1

Chapter 1 Welcome

Starting the Program

Using the House Builder Wizard ®

You can start your program from your Windows Start menu, or by double-clicking the 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6 icon on your desktop.

Registering the Program Take a moment to register online when you see the registration window. Once registered you are eligible for technical support, special offers, advance notice of upgrades, and more. You can also register your software later in one of two ways: •

•

Select Start > Programs > 3D Home Architect > Design Suite Deluxe 6 > Register Online. Click the Register Online button in the startup dialog that appears when you start the program.

Starting a New Project Every time you start the program, a startup dialog appears. This dialog lets you start new drawings, or open saved drawings.

By default, the House Builder screen appears when you start a new project. The House Builder Wizard builds a basic structure for you based on factors that you specify, such as the building shape and size. For more information about the House Builder Wizard, see page 13.

Starting a Drawing from Scratch If you prefer to start drawing from scratch, or you do not want to run the House Builder Wizard right away, just click Cancel or the Close button in the House Builder dialog. This leaves a new, blank drawing on the screen. Note that you can stop the House Builder Wizard from appearing when starting new projects. This will let you start from scratch every time you open a new project. See Preventing the House Builder Wizard from Launching on page 16.

Disabling the Startup Dialog You can disable the startup dialog that appears when you start the program. If you disable it, the House Builder Wizard will launch when you start the program. If you have disabled the House Builder Wizard, a blank project will open. To disable the startup dialog: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

Uncheck the Enable Startup Dialog check box.

4.

Click OK.

Adjusting Your Display Settings To start a new project, click the Start a New Project button in the startup dialog. If the program is already running, you can start a new project by selecting File > New or clicking the New button on the Standard toolbar.

4

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

You can control program performance by ensuring your Windows® display settings are set correctly. To adjust your display settings: 1.

From the Windows® Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.

Learning the Program 2.

In the Control Panel window, double-click Display.

3.

In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings tab.

4.

From the Color drop box, select True Color (32 bit). Note: If 32-bit is unavailable, select 24-bit.

5.

In the Screen area section, move the slider to display at least 1024 x 768 pixels.

6.

Click OK.

Learning the Program 3D Home Architect® Design Suite includes a Learning Center that contains a variety of videos and tutorials to help you get started and learn the program. It’s a quick, fun and easy, and will get you up and running with your project in no time.

you can read and print out. Choose from the following: • • • • • •

Completing a Home Design or Remodel Designing or Remodeling a Kitchen Designing or Remodeling a Bathroom Customizing Your Interiors Completing a Landscape Design Adding a Deck

How to Use the Tools The How to Use the Tools page lets you select a specific tool — anything from walls and floors to furniture and slopes, and view narrated videos on how to insert, edit and troubleshoot the element, and more.

Advanced Features To access the Learning Center: • •

When you start the program, click the Learn to Use button in the startup dialog, or If the program is running, make a selection from the Learn menu

Program Basics The Program Basics page contains short videos, tools and guides to help get you up and running with the program.

How to Complete a Project

The Advanced Features page offers insider's tips and instructions on performing more difficult tasks in the program. Choose from the following step-by-step guides: • • • • • • •

Visualizing Your Design in 3D Working with Catalogs and Elements Working on Multiple Floors & Split Levels Roofs, Ceilings, and Attics Everything You Ever Wanted to Know About Plants Getting the Most Out of the Plant Encyclopedia Terrain Modeling

The How to Complete a Project page contains an excellent selection of project-specific tutorials that User’s Guide

5

1

Chapter 1 Welcome

Online Help

Troubleshooting Guide ®

3D Home Architect Design Suite includes a comprehensive online help system that includes all of the information found in this User’s Guide. You can browse through all help topics, or get help for a specific element, tool or dialog while you are designing. To access the online help file: Select Help > Program Help, or Press F1, or Click the Program Help button on the Standard toolbar

• • •

3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s help tools include a Troubleshooting Guide that describes common problems in the program and how to solve them. To access the Troubleshooting Guide: 1.

Select Help > Troubleshooting Guide.

Glossary of Terms You can instantly access a glossary of construction terms from the Help menu. To view the Glossary of Terms:

To get help for a specific part of your drawing:

1.

1.

Select the element you want help with.

2.

Right-click and select the Tool Help option for that element (e.g. Walls Help). Help for the element is displayed. You can also access the Tool Help from the Edit > Modify Elements menu.

Technical Support

Select Help > Glossary of Terms.

Our online technical support system offers 24hour service and product information. The online Support Center provides access to Online Self-Support, and lists contact information for E-mail Support and Telephone Support.

Online Self-Support You can access troubleshooting guides, FAQs and downloads for 3D Home Architect® Design Suite 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. Tool Help

To get help in a dialog: 1.

Click the Dialog Help button in the dialog. A window is displayed that describes the content of the dialog.

To access free online software help: 1.

Select Help > Online Software Help.

2.

On the contact page, click the Online Self-Support link.

E-mail Support You can contact technical support by e-mail provided you have registered your software and received a User Name and Password. To contact technical support by e-mail:

Dialog Help

6

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select Help > Online Software Help.

2.

On the contact page, click the E-mail Support link.

3.

On the Customer Support Login page, enter your User Name and Password. If you have

3D Home Architect Online not yet registered your software, you can do so from the Customer Support Login page.

Telephone Support If you contact technical support by telephone, be prepared to provide information about your computer name and model, and the brand name of the video card and sound card you are using, and a detailed description of your issue. We provide a form on our web site for your convenience. If possible, sit at your computer with the program running when you call. To prepare for your call: 1.

Select Help > Online Software Help.

2.

On the contact page, click the Telephone Support link.

3.

Fill out the Technical Support Contact Form.

4.

Click Print to print the form.

5.

Have the form with you when you call.

Note: If you want to submit your technical support contact form to technical support by email, click the Send E-mail button at the bottom of the form. To contact technical support by telephone: 1.

Call (319) 247-3333 during the following hours: Monday, Tuesday, Thursday, Friday 8:00 AM - 5:00 PM CST & Wednesday 9:00 AM - 5:00 PM CST

Note: Though technical support does not charge for support calls, this is a toll call that will be billed to your long distance carrier. Average hold times during peak periods can exceed 20 minutes.

Broderbund.com Visit the Broderbund® web site to view a complete listing of Broderbund products and services. To instantly access the Broderbund web site: 1.

Select Help > Broderbund.com, or go to http://www.broderbund.com in your Internet browser.

Satisfaction Guaranteed If you are not completely satisfied with this product, Broderbund® will gladly exchange it for another title of equivalent value or refund your purchase price. Return the complete package to us at: Broderbund Dock Door # 9 120 Hidden Lake Circle Duncan, SC 29334 U.S.A. Make sure you include your store receipt showing the store name and location within 30 days of purchase. Please enclose an explanation for the return and specify the replacement title. Allow 4– 6 weeks for refund or replacement title. Limit 1 per household. Dealers, wholesalers and their immediate families are not eligible. Written inquires should be addressed to our corporate address at: Broderbund 500 Redwood Boulevard Novato, CA 94947 U.S.A.

3D Home Architect Online The 3D Home Architect product page on our web site offers additional help, content and services related to the program. To access the 3D Home Architect page: 1.

Select Help > 3D Home Architect Online.

User’s Guide

7

1

Chapter

Screen Layout The 3D Home Architect® Design Suite screen contains a variety of user-friendly features that make it easy to create precise home plans. This chapter describes everything you see on the screen so you can become familiar and comfortable with your work environment. Title Bar Menu Bar Tabbed Toolbars Catalog Panel

Building Toolbar

Basic View Control Toolbar

Help String

Zoom and Navigate Toolbar

Status Bar

Drawing Aids

9

Chapter 2 Screen Layout

Title Bar The title bar runs across the top of the screen. It displays the name of your program, the name of the current project, and the name of the current view. You can minimize, maximize, restore or close the application window using the buttons at the right end of the title bar, or by clicking the Control menu button at the left end of the title bar. You can also maximize or restore the window by double-clicking the title bar. If the application window is not maximized, you can move the entire window around on your desktop by dragging the title bar.

Menu Bar The menu bar is located directly below the title bar. You can select menu items using either the mouse or keyboard. To use the mouse, simply click a menu name, then select an item from the menu that pops down. Menu items that have an arrow to the right display cascading menus when you place your pointer over them. When you highlight a menu item, a brief description is displayed on the status bar. To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the menu item name. If the menu item has a cascading menu, you need to type an additional letter. You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. You can use the ESC key to back out of the menu items one level at a time.

Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs By default, four tabs are located just beneath the menu bar: Building, Interiors, Landscape and Terrain. These are actually toolbars displayed in tabbed format. The view in the drawing window does not change when you switch to a different tab. The tabs simply provide you with instant access to the specific toolbars you need, when you need them.

10

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

In addition to the four toolbar tabs, there are two free-standing toolbars displayed just below the drawing area: Basic View Control and Zoom and Navigate. Free-standing toolbars can be moved around on the screen. There are more toolbars available for display in your workspace options. Each one can be displayed in tabbed or nontabbed format — the choice is yours. Note that you still have access to a complete set of Insert features on the Insert menu regardless of what tab you are on.

Building Toolbar The Building toolbar contains the tools you need to build a home or any architectural structure. It includes tools such as Walls, Doors, Windows, and Roofs.

Interiors Toolbar The Interiors toolbar contains the tools you need to furnish, decorate and equip the interior of your home. It contains tools such as Cabinets, Appliances, Furniture, Lighting and Plumbing Fixtures.

Landscape Toolbar The Landscape toolbar contains all the tools you need to create a complete landscape plan for the exterior of your home. Tools include Plants, Fences/Gates, Decks, and Irrigation.

Catalog Panel

Terrain Toolbar

Catalog Panel

The Terrain toolbar contains tools that you can use to design a realistic terrain for your model, which is especially important in 3D views. Tools include Hills/Valleys, Slopes, Paths, Retaining Walls, and Site Boundary.

The catalog panel, located on the right side of the screen, displays the elements contained in the program’s Master Catalog, or whatever catalog is currently open. This is where you select elements to insert into your drawing.

Basic View Control Toolbar The Basic View Control toolbar contains several essential view-related tools. The toolbar’s building location drop box displays the current building location, which is important when inserting elements in your drawing. The toolbar also lets you quickly switch between 2D view and 3D view. A display mode button lets you choose the current display type for the view (wireframe, hidden line, etc.).

Zoom and Navigate Toolbar Zoom tools on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar include Zoom Realtime, Zoom Window, and Pan. Note that if you are in a 3D Perspective view, only the Zoom Realtime zoom tool is available. The navigation features on the toolbar (Walk Around, Fly Around, Look Around, Slide) are only active when you are in a 3D view. These tools let you change the view in real time using your mouse.

User’s Guide

11

2

Chapter 2 Screen Layout The content of the catalog panel changes depending on which Insert tool is currently selected, or was last selected. For example, if you select the Doors tool, you will see doors displayed in the catalog panel. The top window of the catalog panel displays a list of groups specific to the current element type. For example, if Doors is the current tool, you will see groups such as Hinged, Entry and Bi-Fold. The middle window of the catalog panel displays all the element types available in the currently selected group. For example, if the Hinged door group is currently selected, you will see a list of hinged door sizes in the element window. The lower window of the catalog panel displays a 3D rendered preview of the currently selected element. You can rotate the image around by clicking and dragging with your mouse. Note, however, that the preview is for viewing purposes only within the catalog panel. The orientation of the element in the preview window has no effect on the orientation of the element when you insert it in your plan. You can change an element’s orientation after you have inserted it in the plan. You can also right-click in the preview window and select a different display mode for the image, or switch the preview to a 2D plan view.

Status Bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. It displays helpful prompts while you are working on your design project. For example, if you are inserting a wall, it may display “Pick first insertion point”. The Status bar also includes a selection of drawing aid buttons such as ORTHO and OBJSNAP.

12

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

House Builder Wizard The first question many people ask when they sit down with a new piece of software is, “Where do I start”? 3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s House Builder Wizard is the perfect way to start a project, because it builds a house for you instantly! All you need to do is specify how many stories you want to create, select a general house shape, define the building dimensions, then select the general style for the walls, roof, floors and foundation. In a few mouse clicks, you’ll have a basic structure that you can edit and add to. Once your basic model is built you can add things like interior walls, doors, windows, stairs and furnishings.

13

Chapter 3 House Builder Wizard

Using the House Builder Wizard

2.

On the House Builder screen, click Next.

The resulting house includes exterior walls, footings and foundation walls (or concrete slab), a roof, and a floor.

3.

From the Number of Floors drop box, select the number of floors you would like the house to have (not including the basement level).

Once the house has been created in your drawing area, you can edit all aspects of it and add to it to suit your needs.

4.

In the Floor to Ceiling Height edit box, type the desired wall height for each floor level.

5.

In the Foundation Type area, select the type of foundation you want to create. Choose from Concrete Slab, Full Basement, or Foundation Walls w/ Crawl Space.

6.

If you selected the Full Basement or Foundation Walls w/Crawl Space, specify the elevation of the ground floor relative to the ground in the Ground Floor Height above Terrain edit box.

By default, the House Builder Wizard launches every time you start a new project. The House Builder Wizard is a handy, easy-to-use tool that instantly builds a basic house for you based on factors that you specify while stepping through the Wizard. These factors include: • • • • • • •

number of floors wall height foundation type building shape building dimensions garage type and size materials used for walls, roof, floors, etc.

To use the House Builder Wizard: 1.

14

If you haven’t already done so, click the Start a New Project button in the startup dialog, or select File > New if the program is already running.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Using the House Builder Wizard 7.

Click Next.

Then, using the dimensioned graphic as an aid, specify the desired offset of the garage from the exterior wall corner. 13. Click Next.

8.

Select the general house shape by clicking one of the graphics in the General House pane.

9.

Once you’ve selected a house shape, make a selection in the Garage Position pane to specify where you want to put the garage. If you don’t want a garage, select the first option.

10. Click Next.

14. From the Building Configuration drop box, select the general style for your home (contemporary, country or traditional). The pre-set material selections for the elements in your house are displayed in the lower pane. You can select different materials if you want — just click the button of the element you want to change and make a selection from the catalog. 15. Click Next.

11. In the Building Size area, specify the desired dimensions for the house by entering values in the edit boxes. The edit box labels correspond to the labels on the image in the left pane. 12. In the Garage area, select either Single, Double or Triple from the Type drop box.

16. Click Finish to build the house.

User’s Guide

15

3

Chapter 3 House Builder Wizard Tip: You can create your own custom configuration of element styles that can be saved for use in any project. See Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration on page 376.

Running the House Builder Wizard When a Drawing is Open If you have disabled the House Builder Wizard in your program settings, or have cancelled out of the House Builder Wizard when starting a new drawing, you can launch it manually from the Tools menu. Note: Running the House Builder Wizard will delete all existing building elements in the current project. It will not, however, remove the terrain or any landscaping elements you have inserted. To run the House Builder Wizard when a drawing is open: 1.

Select Tools > Design Wizards > House Builder.

2.

Click OK in the warning dialog. The House Builder Wizard launches.

Preventing the House Builder Wizard from Launching By default, the House Builder Wizard launches every time you start a new project. You can stop the House Builder Wizard from appearing if you want. If you disable it, a new blank drawing will open when you start a new project. To disable the House Builder Wizard: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

16

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

3.

In the Startup area, uncheck the Launch House Builder wizard when starting new drawing check box.

4.

Click OK.

Note: You can still run the House Builder Wizard from the Tools > Design Wizards menu when a drawing is open.

Chapter

Building Locations When you insert an element in your drawing, it is inserted on the current building location. It is important to define your building locations before inserting elements, since building locations are the key to organizing elements and inserting them at the correct height in your model. If you used the House Builder Wizard to start your project, your main building locations are set up for you. Their settings depend on the selections you made in the House Builder Wizard. If you are drawing from scratch, the program’s default drawing templates have three pre-defined building locations: Foundation, Ground Floor, and Second Floor. You can change the settings for existing building locations as well as add and delete locations. This chapter describes how to define your building locations, and identify the current building location when adding elements to your design.

17

Chapter 4 Building Locations

Defining Building Locations When you define building locations, you are basically doing two things: • •

setting the wall height for each floor (level) in your model specifying where each floor is positioned relative to the ground (zero)

foundation wall would be even with the ground. These are typical settings for someone who isn’t interested in creating a basement. If you wanted to create a full basement, you could change the Floor Level to -8’ and the Wall Height to 8’. By default, the Ground Floor and Second Floor locations each have their Wall Height set to 8’. The Floor Level of the Ground Floor is set to 0. The Floor Level of the Second Floor location is set to 9’. This leaves a 12” space between the Ground Floor walls and Second Floor walls, which is needed to fit the floor structure of the ground floor. To change the properties of a building location: 1.

In the Building Locations dialog, click on the property you want to change. You can change location names or any of the numerical settings.

To view building location settings:

2.

Type the value you want.

1.

Select Settings > Building Locations, or click the Building Locations button on the Settings toolbar.

3.

Press Enter.

Below is a brief description of each building location property.

1.

To add a new building location:

Number. A reference number for the location.

Note: By default the new location will adopt the numerical settings of the currently selected location.

Name. The location’s name (e.g. Ground Floor). Floor Level. Height of floor base above ground level (0). Head Height. Height of tops of windows and wall openings relative to the floor level.

In the Building Locations dialog, click the Add Location button. A new location is added to the bottom of the list.

2.

Specify the location’s properties. To specify a property, click on the current value, type the new value, then press Enter.

Ceiling Height. Height of underside of ceiling surface relative to the floor level.

Note: When you add a location to your list, it does not become the current location unless you select it in the list or edit its properties.

Wall Height. Physical height of the walls on the location.

To delete a building location:

By default, if you are drawing from scratch, the Foundation location has a Floor Level of -1’, meaning the base of the foundation starts one foot below the ground. (In other words, it is not a full basement.) The Wall Height of the Foundation location is 1’, meaning the foundation wall runs 1’ up from the foundation floor. The top of the

18

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

In the Building Locations dialog, click on one of the location’s fields to make it the current location.

2.

Click Delete Location.

Note: You cannot delete a location if it contains any elements. Also, you cannot delete a location if it is the only one in the list.

Current Building Location

Current Building Location Before inserting an element in your drawing you should make sure that the building location you want to insert the element on is the current building location. To identify the current building location: •

Take a look at the building locations drop box on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

By default, elements on other locations are dimmed by 90%. You can adjust the dimming so that it is lighter or darker according to your preference. To change the dimming percentage: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Workspace tab.

3.

Type the desired dimming percentage in the Dimming Percentage edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values.

4.

Click OK.

or •

See which location is checked in the Building Locations dialog. Check mark identifies the current location

To make a different location current within the current view: •

Click on the building locations drop box on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select the desired location. or

•

In the Building Locations dialog, click in the far left field of the location you want to make current. A check mark indicates the location is now current.

Location Dimming When a particular location is current, elements on all other visible locations are dimmed. This makes it easier to insert and edit elements on the current location because it is more obvious which elements are part of the current location.

User’s Guide

19

4

Chapter

Drawing & Editing Basics Whether you have automatically built a house using the House Builder Wizard, or have started a drawing from scratch, you will insert a variety of elements to create your home design. Everything is point-and-click in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite, making it extremely simple to use and leaving you free to be as creative as you like. All elements are intelligent and know what they are in relation to other elements. For example, a door can only be inserted in a wall. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite automatically displays dimensions as you draw, making it even easier to create accurate drawings right from the start. While working on your project, you will probably want to edit it as you go. You can select elements by clicking on them, or by drawing a selection window around them. This chapter describes the basics of inserting elements, and selecting them for editing.

21

Chapter 5 Drawing & Editing Basics

Inserting Elements When you select a tool from the Insert menu or one of the insertion toolbars, you are in Insertion mode. To insert an element, you select it in the catalog panel, then click in your drawing area. Many elements can be inserted with a single mouse click. Single-click elements include doors, windows, stairs, columns, cabinets, furniture, appliances, light fixtures, electrical elements, plumbing fixtures, and plants. Line-drawn elements, like walls and railings, require that you select two points to define the element’s start point and end point. The points you pick determine the element’s length and angle. Areadrawn elements, such as pads, fills and plateaus, are drawn by picking a series of points to define their outline. In many cases, on-screen dimensions are displayed as you draw, making it easy to create line-drawn and area-drawn elements at the correct length or size, and insert elements like doors and windows precisely where you want them in a wall. Once you insert an element in your drawing area, you can: • • •

Continue inserting the same element Select a different element in the catalog to insert Right-click and select Finish to end the command and return to Selection mode

Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements Some elements, like walls and railings, are drawn by picking two or more points. By default, linedrawn elements use the Pick and drag insertion method. With this method, you keep the mouse button depressed after clicking the first point, drag the mouse to draw the element, then release your mouse button to select the next point. If you prefer to pick points without dragging, you can select the Pick Points insertion method. With this method you do not have to keep your mouse button depressed to draw the element (i.e. you do not have to click and drag the mouse). Once you’ve selected the first point, you can simply move your mouse in the direction you want the element to run, then click to select the next point. To select an insertion method for line-drawn elements: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Insertion Method area, select either Pick Points or Pick and drag.

4.

Click OK.

Inserting Ceilings Automatically

Tip: When an Insert tool is active, double-clicking inserts the element and finishes the command at the same time. Note, however, that doubleclicking after you’ve already inserted an element will, in most cases, insert another element.

If you want ceilings to be inserted automatically when you draw a wall layout, you need to enable the Automatically Insert Ceilings option. By default, a 1/2” drywall ceiling is inserted, or whatever ceiling type was last selected in the catalog. You can edit the ceiling type later if you want.

Tip: If you are in Selection mode, you can insert any element currently accessible in the catalog by clicking the desired element in the catalog and dragging your pointer into the drawing area.

To enable or disable automatic ceiling insertion: 1.

Note: If you don’t see the exact element you want to insert in the catalog, you can create custom elements to suit your needs. See Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 335.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

22

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Going into Selection Mode for Editing 3.

Check or uncheck the Automatically Insert Ceilings check box.

4.

Click OK.

Note: You can also insert ceilings separately using one of the Insert > Ceilings tools. Tip: The underside of a floor can also serve as a ceiling.

Going into Selection Mode for Editing When you have finished using an insertion tool, either by double-clicking or selecting Finish from the right-click menu, you automatically go into Selection mode. When in Selection mode, you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them. You can also go into Selection mode by clicking the Select/Edit button on any insertion toolbar, or by selecting Select/Edit from the Edit menu.

Disabling Pre-Selection When pre-selection is turned on, elements highlight when you hover your cursor over them. Tooltips are also displayed that tell you what the elements are as they are highlighted. By default, pre-selection is enabled. On some systems, disabling pre-selection can help improve program speed.

Selecting Elements for Editing When in Selection Mode, you can select elements for editing. You can select individual elements, a group of elements, or all elements. When an element is selected, it is highlighted in a different color (usually light green). One or more handles are also displayed on the element. When you are in 3D view, all elements on all locations are selectable. When you are in 2D plan view, only elements on the current building location are selectable. However, you can change this if you want. See Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View on page 24. If you are having trouble selecting the element you want, you may want to use the View Filter to make other elements non-selectable. This makes selection of the element much easier. See Selection Filtering on page 37. Note: Automatic floors and ceilings cannot be selected in 2D. They can only be selected in 3D. To select a single element: 1.

To select multiple elements by clicking: 1.

Click the first element you want to select.

2.

Hold down the Shift key and click on the rest of the elements you want to select. The most recent selection is green and prior selections are blue.

To disable pre-selection: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Visual Aids area, uncheck the Enable Pre-Selection check box.

4.

Click OK.

Click on the element.

To select a group of elements by creating a selection window: 1.

Going from either left to right, or right to left, drag a selection window around the elements you want to select. Any elements touching the selection window will be selected (they do not need to be totally enclosed).

To select all elements on the current location: 1.

Select Edit > Select All.

To re-select the elements you last selected: 1.

Select Edit > Select Previous. User’s Guide

23

5

Chapter 5 Drawing & Editing Basics

Deselecting Elements When you select elements, you can remove individual elements from your selection set. You can also deselect everything that is currently selected. To deselect individual elements: 1.

Hold down your Shift key.

2.

Click the element you want to deselect.

To deselect everything in your selection set: 1.

Select Edit > Deselect All, or right-click in the drawing area and select Deselect All, or simply click in a blank spot somewhere else in the drawing area.

Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D Plan View By default, only elements on the current building location can be selected in 2D plan view, even if elements on other locations are visible. If you want to make elements on all locations selectable, you need to change one of your program settings. To make elements on all locations selectable in 2D plan view: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Drawing Assistance area, uncheck the Select elements on current location only while in plan view check box.

4.

Click OK.

Accessing Edit Tools Most elements can be moved once they are selected by simply clicking and dragging them. Some can also be stretched or rotated. You can access a full menu of edit tools by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify Elements. Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical tools are Properties, Move, Rotate,

24

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only tools that are common to both element types are available. Each chapter includes editing instructions specific to the contents of that chapter. For information about general editing, see Editing Your Design on page 253.

Part 2

Controlling the View 2D and 3D Viewing

page 27

View Filter

page 33

Chapter

2D and 3D Viewing 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe offers a variety of options for viewing your design in 2D and 3D. When working in 2D plan view, you can magnify or reduce the view using the Zoom Realtime tool. You can also magnify a selected area using the Zoom Window tool. The Zoom to Fit tool magnifies your design so it fills the drawing area, creating the largest view possible. The Pan tool lets you pan the view in any direction by simply clicking and dragging. You can instantly switch to 3D view with a couple of mouse clicks. You can choose from the realistic 3D Perspective view, which is like viewing your house from a distance, or 3D Overview, which eliminates distance from the view and lets you see the house from above. While viewing in 3D you can choose from a variety of display types, including Wireframe, Patterned and Rendered. Using the Framing Visibility options you can view your house frame, which consists of wall, roof, floor and ceiling framing. This chapter describes all basic 2D and 3D viewing features. For information about advanced viewing features, see page 321.

27

Chapter 6 2D and 3D Viewing

Viewing the 2D Plan

Viewing a 2D Designer’s View

When you start a drawing, the default view is a 2D plan view. It shows your model in a "flat" view, as if you were looking at it from above. 2D Plan view is ideal for creating a floor plan.

By default, your design is displayed in a wireframe 2D plan view. You can use the 2D Designer’s View tool to quickly display a rendered version of the 2D plan view. In a rendered view, materials are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a more realistic view. For example, if you have a shingled roof on your model, you will actually see the shingles in 2D Designer’s View.

To display your model in 2D plan view: • •

Select View > 2D Plan View, or Click the 2D Plan View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar, or

•

Right-click in the drawing area and select 2D Plan View

By default, all locations are visible at the same time. However, any locations other than the current location are dimmed. You can control which elements and locations are displayed by using the View Filter. See Filtering the Display on page 34. While in 2D plan view you can zoom in and out, and pan your drawing.

28

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To view a 2D Designer’s View: 1.

Select View > 2D Designer’s View, or click the 2D Designer’s View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

Note: If you want to be able to see inside the model, you can use the View Filter to hide elements like the roof or ceilings. See Filtering the Display on page 34.

Viewing in 3D

Viewing in 3D You can instantly switch to 3D view by selecting either the 3D Perspective or 3D Overview tool.

The 3D Overview is an orthographic view, where the view is set from a common angle, and distance is eliminated from the view. This creates an instant close-up of your design.

In a 3D Perspective view, the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer, creating a more real-world view.

To view a 3D overview: To view a 3D perspective view: 1.

Select View > 3D Model View > 3D Perspective, or click the 3D Model View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select 3D Perspective.

1.

Select View > 3D Model View > 3D Overview, or click the 3D Model View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select 3D Overview.

Tip: If you have your cameras turned on in 2D, you can switch to a 3D view by selecting a camera, right-clicking it, then selecting Look Through. Note: By default, 3D views are displayed in Rendered mode. For information about changing the display mode, see Changing the Display Mode on page 30. For information about moving around in a 3D view, or creating or customizing 3D views, see Custom Viewing on page 321.

User’s Guide

29

6

Chapter 6 2D and 3D Viewing

Zooming In and Out

Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area

The Zoom Realtime tool continuously magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse. You can zoom in and out in 2D plan view or any 3D view.

The Zoom to Fit tool instantly extends your drawing to the edges of the drawing area. This ensures your entire drawing is visible at the most maximized view possible, and makes full use of the drawing area.

To zoom in and out: 1.

2.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Realtime, or click the Zoom Realtime button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of the screen. To zoom out, click and drag toward the bottom of the screen.

To zoom the drawing to fit the drawing area: 1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button.

Note that the terrain is considered part of your drawing. If you want to zoom your model to fit the drawing area, you need to turn the terrain off before using Zoom to Fit.

Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll button on your mouse.

Note: The Zoom to Fit tool is not available in 3D perspective views.

3.

Zooming a Selected Area Using the Zoom Window tool you can magnify a particular area of your design by drawing a selection window around it. To zoom a selected area: 1.

2.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Window, or click the Zoom Window button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Your cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify.

Panning Across a Drawing Using the Pan tool you can move the current view of your design to bring a particular part of your design into view. This is especially useful when the area you want to view is currently not visible because you have zoomed in on your drawing. To pan the current view: 1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Pan, or click the Pan button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2.

Click in the drawing.

3.

Hold your mouse button down.

4.

Drag the view in the direction you want to pan.

5.

Release the mouse button.

Note: The Pan tool is not available in 3D perspective views.

Changing the Display Mode

Note: The Zoom Window tool is not available in 3D perspective views.

30

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

By default, your design is displayed in Wireframe mode when you are in 2D plan view. When you switch to a 3D view, the default display mode is Rendered mode. There are five display modes you can choose from.

Changing the Display Mode Wireframe. Each line in your design is visible, creating a “see-through” view.

Hidden Line. Removes lines from the view that you would normally not see, creating an opaque view.

Rendered. Applies materials to the elements and terrain, creating a very realistic view.

Rendered Outline. Applies materials to the elements and terrain, and outlines surface edges in a single, dark line for increased surface definition.

Patterned. Applies patterns of lines (hatching) to the surfaces of elements.

To view Wireframe mode: • •

Select View > Display Mode > Wireframe, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Wireframe

To view Hidden Line mode: • •

Select View > Display Mode > Hidden Line, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Hidden Line

User’s Guide

31

6

Chapter 6 2D and 3D Viewing To view Rendered mode: • •

Select View > Display Mode > Rendered, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Rendered

To view Rendered Outline mode: • •

Select View > Display Mode > Rendered Outline, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Rendered Outline

Note: Framing cannot be selected for editing. It is available for viewing purposes only. To return to a non-framed view: 1.

To change framing members or member spacing: 1.

In non-framed view, select the wall, floor, ceiling or roof whose framing you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, click the Specify Framing button.

4.

Select the desired framing members and specify the spacing you want.

5.

Click OK.

To view Patterned mode: • •

Select View > Display Mode > Patterned, or Click the Display Mode button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Patterned

Select View > Framing Visibility > Display All But Framing.

Displaying Framing Walls, floors, ceilings and roofs have a framing configuration assigned to them in their properties. You can instantly view just your house frame using the Display Framing tool, then return to a regular view of your model at any time.

To display framing: 1.

Select View > Framing Visibility > Display Framing.

Note: You can also use the View Filter to display framing. However, the framing will not be displayed on its own unless you turn everything else off.

32

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

View Filter The program’s unique View Filter feature lets you decide which elements or locations you want displayed at any given time. For example, you may want to hide your roof and ceilings to be able to see inside the model. It also lets you make selected elements non-selectable, which is sometimes necessary when trying to select a particular element in your drawing, like a floor or ceiling.

33

Chapter 7 View Filter

Filtering the Display The View Filter provides precise control over what elements and locations are displayed in a view at any given time. You can display/hide: • • • •

an entire location, or multiple locations building elements on a specific location or multiple locations selected or all landscaping elements text and dimension elements

below the element name. If you choose to sort by location, a list of building locations is displayed with a list of elements under each one. The Landscape tab contains a list of exterior landscaping elements, and the Notation tab contains text, dimensions, project trace images, and electrical wiring. The icons in the Display column indicate whether or not that location or element is currently displayed. Clicking an icon toggles the icon to the opposite state (on or off). Location or element is turned on

Note: Using the View Filter does not delete elements from your drawing. It just hides them from view.

Location or element is turned off If sorting by element, this means that the element is displayed on some locations and not on others. If sorting by location, it means that some elements on the location are displayed and some are not.

To access the View Filter: •

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

Elements

Tabs

Display Filter

Clicking Display All turns on all locations and elements on the current tab. Clicking Display None turns off all locations and elements on the current tab. The View Filter dialog also lets you control whether or not individual locations and elements can be selected. See Selection Filtering on page 37.

Displaying/Hiding Building Elements Building elements are things like walls, doors and windows - things that make up an architectural model. Using the View Filter you can display or hide selected element types on all or selected building locations. To display or hide building elements:

The View Filter dialog contains three tabs: Building, Landscape and Notation. The Building tab lists all elements types. If you expand an element, a list of building locations is displayed

34

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab.

Displaying/Hiding Building Locations 3.

In the Sort By area, make sure the Element radio button is selected.

Displaying/Hiding Building Locations

4.

If you want to change the visibility of an element on all locations, click the element’s eye icon in the Display column. If you want to filter an element on a specific location, click the element’s plus sign (+) to display a list of building locations. Then, click the location’s eye icon in the Display column.

You can turn individual locations on or off. When you turn a location off, all elements on that location are hidden from view. To display or hide entire locations: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, enable the Location radio button. A list of building locations is displayed in the window.

4.

Click the eye icon next to the name of the location you want to display or hide.

Eye Icon

Element is turned on Element is turned off You can also filter elements by location. If you enable the Location radio button in the Sort By area, a list of building locations is displayed. You can then expand the location you want to filter elements on to display a list of elements. Toggling the eye icons of elements in this list filters elements on the selected location.

Location is turned on Location is turned off 5.

If you want to make all elements on all locations visible, click the Display All button. If you want to make all elements on all locations non-visible, click Display None. 5.

Once you’ve selected what you want to filter, click OK.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Landscape Elements Landscape elements include things like the terrain, site boundary, paths and plants. Using the View Filter you can display or hide selected landscape element types. To filter landscape elements: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

User’s Guide

35

7

Chapter 7 View Filter 2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Landscape tab. A list of landscape elements is displayed.

3.

In the Text row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn text on or off. Text is turned on Text is turned off

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Dimensions Using the View Filter you can display or hide dimensions in your drawing. To filter dimensions from view:

3.

1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

3.

In the Dimension row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn dimensions on or off.

Click the eye icons in the Display column to turn elements on or off. Element is turned on Element is turned off

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Text Using the View Filter you can display or hide text in your drawing.

Dimensions are turned on Dimensions are turned off

To filter text from view: 1.

2.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

4.

Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring Using the View Filter you can display or hide electrical wiring in your drawing. To filter electrical wiring from view: 1.

36

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Click OK.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images 2.

3.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

In the Electrical Wiring row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn wiring on or off. Wiring is turned on Wiring is turned off

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images If you have used the Project Trace Image tool to import a plan into your project, you can hide the image if you want using the View Filter. This is an alternative to deleting the image.

Selection Filtering When your model contains a number of elements, it can sometimes be difficult to select certain ones because of proximity or overlapping edges. Floors, for example, can be very difficult to select because floor edges are typically right up against your walls. Also, small elements can be hard to select in an extreme zoomed out view, even in 2D. You can use the View Filter to stop certain elements from being selected. You can even prevent entire building locations from being selected. To access the View Filter: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

Elements

Tabs

Selection Filter

To filter project trace images from view: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

3.

In the Project Trace Image row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn wiring on or off. Project trace image is turned on Project trace image is turned off

4.

Click OK.

The View Filter dialog contains three tabs: Building, Landscape and Notation. The Building tab lists all element types. When you expand an element, all of your building locations are listed below the element. The Landscape tab contains a

User’s Guide

37

7

Chapter 7 View Filter list of exterior landscaping elements, and the Notation tab contains text, dimensions, project trace images, and electrical wiring.

You can also filter elements by location. If you enable the Location radio button in the Sort By area, a list of building locations is displayed. You can then expand the location you want to filter elements on to display a list of elements. Toggling the filter icons of elements in this list filters elements on the selected location.

The icons in the Selection column indicate whether or not that location or element is currently selectable. Clicking an icon toggles the icon to the opposite state (selectable or non-selectable). Element or location is selectable Element or location is not selectable

Making Building Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable Building elements are things like walls, doors and windows - things that make up an architectural model. Using the View Filter you can make individual element types selectable or nonselectable on all or selected building locations. To change the selectability of building elements: 1.

5.

Once you’ve selected what you want to filter, click OK.

Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

When you make a location non-selectable, no elements on that location can be selected in any view.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, make sure the Element radio button is selected.

4.

If you want to change the selectability of an element on all locations, click the element’s filter icon in the Selection column. If you want to filter an element on a specific location, click the element’s plus sign (+) to display a list of building locations. Then, click the location’s filter icon in the Selection column. Filter Icon

Element is selectable Element is not selectable

38

If you want to make all elements on all locations selectable, click the Select All button. If you want to make all elements on all locations non-selectable, click Select None.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To make a location selectable or non-selectable: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Building tab.

3.

In the Sort By area, enable the Location radio button. A list of building locations is displayed in the window.

Making Landscape Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable 4.

Click the filter icon next to the name of the location you want to make selectable or nonselectable.

3.

Click the filter icons in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Element is selectable

Location is selectable Location is not selectable If you want to make all locations selectable, click the Select All button. If you want to make all locations non-selectable, click Select None. 5.

Once you’ve made your selections, click OK.

Making Landscape Elements Selectable or Non-Selectable Landscape elements include things like the terrain, site boundary, paths and plants. Using the View Filter you can make selected landscape element types selectable or non-selectable.

Element is not selectable 4.

If you want to make all landscape elements selectable, click the Select All button. If you want to make all landscape elements nonselectable, click Select None.

5.

Click OK.

Making Text Selectable or NonSelectable Using the View Filter you can make text selectable or non-selectable. To make text selectable or non-selectable: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

3.

In the Text row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

To make landscape elements selectable or non-selectable: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Landscape tab. A list of landscape elements is displayed.

Text is selectable Text is not selectable 4.

Click OK.

User’s Guide

39

7

Chapter 7 View Filter

Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

3.

In the Electrical Wiring row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Using the View Filter you can make dimensions selectable or non-selectable. To make dimensions selectable or nonselectable: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

Wiring is selectable Wiring is not selectable 4.

Click OK.

Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable 3.

In the Dimension row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off. Dimensions are selectable Dimensions are not selectable

4.

Click OK.

Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable

If you have used the Project Trace Image tool to import a plan into your project, you can use the View Filter to make the image selectable or non-selectable. To make project trace images selectable or non-selectable: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.

3.

In the Project Trace Image row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Using the View Filter you can make electrical wiring selectable or non-selectable. To make electrical wiring selectable or nonselectable: 1.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

Project trace image is selectable Project trace image is not selectable 4.

40

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Click OK.

Part 3

Building Your Home Foundation

page 43

Walls

page 53

Doors, Windows & Openings

page 61

Floors & Ceilings

page 73

Stairs, Ramps & Railings

page 81

Roofs

page 93

Chapter

Foundation If you have decided to create your project from scratch, you can do what builders do in the real world — build from the ground up. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite offers the versatility of creating a variety of foundation types. You can create a full basement, crawl space foundation, or a slab on grade. First you need to define the foundation’s building location, if you haven’t already done so. The building location’s Floor Level variable determines how far below the ground the foundation floor will be positioned, and the Wall Height variable determines how tall the walls will be. See Defining Building Locations on page 18. To create a basement or crawlspace foundation, you start by drawing your foundation walls. A floor is created for you automatically. You can then add support columns where needed and quickly create footings beneath walls and columns. If you are not creating a basement or crawlspace foundation, you can use the Pads tool to quickly create a slab on grade. The slab can have any thickness you want, and by drawing its outline, you control its precise size and shape. To begin, set your current building location on the Basic View Control toolbar to the Foundation location, or whatever location you have set up for your foundation.

43

Chapter 8 Foundation

Creating a Basement or Crawlspace Foundation

dimension is displayed to indicate the length of the wall.

The first step in creating a basement or crawlspace foundation is drawing the foundation walls, which are typically made of poured concrete or concrete blocks. You can draw the entire perimeter in seconds by just pointing and clicking with your mouse. A floor is automatically inserted when you create a closed foundation wall layout. You can change the floor type after it has been inserted if you want. If you want you can also opt to insert ceilings automatically. See Inserting Ceilings Automatically on page 22. To draw the foundation walls: 1.

Make sure the current location in the Building Locations drop box is the Foundation location, or whatever location you have set up for your foundation elements. Make sure that you have defined the correct Floor Level and Wall Height for that location in the Building Locations dialog.

Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 5º angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap. 6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint.

7.

Continue drawing walls until the perimeter is complete. You can add walls to the interior of the foundation layout if you want (if you are creating a cold cellar, for example).

8.

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

2.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the Foundation Walls category, then select the type of wall you want to insert.

1.

Click on one of the foundation walls to select it, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle on the currently selected wall to display the Move cursor.

4.

In the drawing area, select a start point for the first wall.

3.

Click and drag the foundation to where you want it, then release your mouse button.

5.

Move your pointer in the direction you want your wall to run. A dynamic

To resize the foundation by stretching:

To move the foundation:

1.

Select the foundation wall you want to move. All attached walls will stretch along with it when you move it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the wall to resize the wall layout, then release your mouse button.

Note: If you have footings attached to your walls, the footings will stretch along with the walls.

44

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing a Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation To resize the foundation by editing its dimensions: 1.

Select one of the foundation walls. If you want to stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical wall. If you want to stretch the layout up or down, select a horizontal wall. Dimensions are displayed on the foundation. Positioning your cursor over one of the dimensions changes your cursor to a pointing finger.

Editing a Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation You can edit the size properties of a wall by making changes on the wall’s Basic property page. To edit a wall’s size properties: 1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Edit the properties as desired. Width. The thickness of the wall. Wall Height. The physical height of the wall. Extension Below Base. The height of the wall below floor level.

5.

Once the properties are set, click OK.

Lengthening and Shortening Walls 2.

3.

Click the dimension you want to edit. The Edit Dimension dialog appears.

Enter the new value in the Enter Distance edit box, then press Enter or click OK. The walls update automatically.

To remove the foundation: 1.

2.

Select the foundation by dragging a selection window around it, or by clicking on one wall and using Shift+click to select the remaining walls. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by clicking and dragging one of the wall’s ends. To lengthen or shorten a wall: 1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the wall end you want to stretch. The Stretch cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the wall end until it has reached the desired length.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Rotating a Wall You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate a wall: 1.

Select the wall.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

User’s Guide

45

8

Chapter 8 Foundation 3.

Position your pointer over the grab handle you want to rotate the wall around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release your mouse button.

Deleting a Wall You can delete a wall in a couple of easy steps. To delete a wall:

Curving a Wall

1.

You can curve a wall using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to curve to.

Select the wall to delete. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

To curve a wall by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To curve a wall to a selected point:

Note: The floor will be deleted if the wall you are deleting opens up the wall layout.

Applying a Different Material to the Foundation Floor You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different material such as poured concrete to the foundation floor.

1.

Click the wall to select it.

To apply a material to the floor:

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

1.

Display your model in 3D view and make sure the floor is visible in the view.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The wall automatically curves to the point.

2.

4.

Click to finish.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the floor surface. The material is immediately applied.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Breaking a Wall You can break a wall into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually. To break a wall: 1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Double-click the point where you want to break the wall. This divides the wall into two segments that can be moved, stretched or manipulated individually.

46

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Inserting Strip Footings Beneath the Foundation Walls

Inserting Strip Footings Beneath the Foundation Walls Since foundation walls bear the weight of exterior walls above them, you need to insert footings beneath the foundation walls to transfer support for the vertical load. Strip footings are easy to insert — just click on a wall and a footing is automatically inserted underneath the wall.

Editing the Strip Footing Type Strip footing types include rectangular, tapered and filleted. The footing type determines the footing’s general appearance. To edit the footing type: 1.

Select the footing whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Basic tab, then click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.

4.

Click OK.

To insert strip footings under walls: 1.

Select Insert > Footings > Strip Footings Attached to Walls, or click the Footings button on the Building toolbar and select Strip Footings Attached to Walls.

2.

In the catalog panel, select the footing you want to insert. Typically you would choose one that is wider than the wall you are attaching it to.

3.

4. 5.

Click on the wall you want to attach the footing to. The footing is inserted automatically. In plan view, strip footings are usually shown using a dashed line. Continue inserting footings underneath each exterior foundation wall. Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

Editing the Size of Strip Footings You can edit the dimensions of a footing on the footing’s Basic property page. To change the footing size: 1.

Select the footing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Strip Footing dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Edit the dimensions of the footing.

5.

Click OK.

Moving/Stretching Strip Footings When you move a strip footing, all footings attached to it move with it for a stretching effect. You can move strip footings by just clicking and dragging. To move/stretch strip footings: 1.

Select the footing to move. You may need to make walls non-selectable to be able to select the footing.

User’s Guide

47

8

Chapter 8 Foundation 2.

Position your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the footing to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Note: When you move a strip footing, it becomes detached from the wall. Therefore, if you move or stretch the wall, the footing will not go with it. If you want to re-attach a footing to a wall, you will need to delete the footing, then insert a new one.

Lengthening and Shortening Strip Footings You can lengthen or shorten an individual footing by clicking and dragging one of the footing’s ends. To lengthen or shorten a footing: 1.

Select the footing. A grab handle is displayed at each end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch. The Move cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the footing end until it has reached the desired length.

Deleting Strip Footings You can delete a strip footing in a couple of easy steps. To delete strip footings: 1.

Select the footing to delete. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Columns Typically, any bearing members in your basement require support. For example, if you have a Wtype I-beam in your basement, it may be supported by steel posts at each end. Columns are an important consideration when designing your basement, especially if you intend to finish it. When inserting columns, you can choose from a variety of wood, concrete, steel, brick and gypsum columns in various shapes and sizes. To insert a column: 1.

Breaking Strip Footings

Select Insert > Columns, or click the Columns button on the Building toolbar.

2.

You can break a footing into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually.

In the catalog panel, select the column you want to insert.

3.

Position the column where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To break a footing: 1.

Click the footing to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Double-click the point where you want to break the footing.

48

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing the Column Type

Editing the Column Type

2.

Columns come in a variety of materials and shapes.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the column to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To edit the column type: 1.

Select the column whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple columns using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Basic tab, then click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.

Note: If you have a mono footing attached to the column, the footing will remain attached to the column and move with it.

Deleting a Column You can remove a column in a couple of quick steps. To remove a column:

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Size and Elevation of a Column You can edit the dimensions of a column (e.g. height, width and depth) as well as its elevation height. To edit the size properties of a column: 1.

Click on the column to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties as desired. Different column shapes will have different dimension variables. If you want to offset the base of the column from the floor (so it sits higher or lower), enter a value in the Base Offset edit box.

4.

Click OK.

1.

Click on the column to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Mono Footings Under Columns Since support columns in your basement bear loads at a concentrated point, the load should be transferred to a proper footing. Using the Mono Footings Attached to Columns tool you can insert a single pad footing beneath a selected column. All you have to do is select the column. To insert a footing under a column: 1.

Select Insert > Footings > Mono Footings Attached to Columns, or click the Footings button on the Building toolbar and select Mono Footings Attached to Columns.

Moving Columns You can move a column by simply clicking and dragging it. To move a column: 1.

Click on the column to select it.

User’s Guide

49

8

Chapter 8 Foundation 2.

3.

4.

In the catalog panel, select the footing you want to insert. Typically you would choose one that is wider than the column you are attaching it to.

4.

Edit the dimensions of the footing.

5.

Click OK.

Click on the column you want to attach the footing to. The footing is inserted automatically.

To move a mono footing by clicking and dragging:

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

Editing the Mono Footing Type Mono footing types include rectangular, tapered, cylinder and cylinder tapered. The footing type determines the footing’s general appearance. To edit the footing type: 1.

Select the footing whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Basic tab, then click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.

4.

Click OK.

Moving Mono Footings You can move a mono footing by clicking and dragging it.

1.

Select the footing to move.

2.

Position your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the footing to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Note: When you move a mono footing, it becomes detached from the column. Therefore, if you move the column, the footing will not go with it. If you want to re-attach a footing to a column, you will need to delete the footing, then insert a new one.

Rotating a Mono Footing You can rotate a mono footing by simply clicking and dragging it. To rotate a mono footing: 1.

Select the footing.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the footing.

4.

When the footing is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of Mono Footings

Deleting Mono Footings

You can edit the dimensions of a footing on the footing’s Basic property page.

You can delete a mono footing in a couple of easy steps.

To change the footing size:

To delete mono footings:

1.

Select the footing.

1.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Select the footing to remove. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click.

2.

3.

In the Mono Footing dialog, select the Basic tab.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

50

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Creating a Slab Foundation

Creating a Slab Foundation

To disable the slab’s Hug Terrain option:

You can use the Pads tool to insert a concrete slab directly on your terrain. By drawing the outline of the pad, you control the precise size and shape of the slab.

1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, uncheck the Hug Terrain? check box.

4.

Click OK.

After you insert the slab, you need to turn off the slab’s Hug Terrain option to make sure the slab remains flat and positioned at the Terrain Base Level specified in your Terrain Settings. Note: Slabs created with the Pads tool are considered landscape elements that are associated with the terrain. When using the View Filter, pads are listed on the Landscape tab. To create a slab on grade: 1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Pads, or click the Pads button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the catalog panel, select the type of slab you want to insert.

3.

Select a start point for the slab.

4.

You can move a slab by selecting all of its sides, then clicking and dragging it. To move the entire slab: 1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the slab to move it, then release your mouse button.

Resizing a Slab You can resize a slab by stretching one of its edges.

Continue selecting points to define the outline of the slab. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. 1

Moving a Slab

To resize the slab by stretching it:

4

1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3.

Hover your pointer over the grab handle to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag to stretch the slab.

5.

Release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Slab You can change the shape of a slab by clicking and dragging its corners. To reshape a slab: 2 5.

3

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the slab.

3.

Release your mouse button.

User’s Guide

51

8

Chapter 8 Foundation

Rotating a Slab You can rotate a slab easily using the Rotate tool. To rotate a slab: 1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Position your pointer over the corner grab handle you want to rotate the slab around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the slab, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Thickness of a Slab You can edit the thickness of a slab on the slab’s Basic property page. To edit the thickness of a slab: 1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Pads dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Enter the desired thickness in the Thickness edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Deleting a Slab You can delete a slab in a couple of easy steps. To delete a slab: 1.

Click on the edge of the slab to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

52

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Walls Once you’ve created your foundation, the next step is to create the ground floor exterior walls as well as the exterior walls of any additional stories. You can then add interior walls on all stories. Drawing walls is easy — just point and click. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite automatically displays dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you. If the Object Snap is turned on, which by default it is, interior walls snap to other existing walls and create clean intersections with them. Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, broken, curved or deleted. This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want. The catalog contains a wide variety of wall types including brick, stone, sided, wood-framed and steel-framed. Once your walls are drawn, you can add paint, wallpaper, baseboards and other types of trim to them for a truly customized look.

Walls

53

Chapter 9 Walls

Drawing the Ground Floor Exterior Walls

want the new wall to run. When it is the right length, click to set its endpoint.

You can draw your ground floor exterior walls by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. If you have created a foundation, you can just trace around the foundation. A floor is automatically inserted when you create a closed foundation wall layout. You can change the properties of the floor after it has been inserted if you want. If you want you can also opt to insert ceilings automatically. See Inserting Ceilings Automatically on page 22.

8.

To draw the ground floor exterior walls: 1.

Make sure the current location is the Ground Floor location, or whatever location you have set up for your ground floor elements.

2.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert.

4. 5.

Select a start point for the first wall. Move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the wall. Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 5º angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap.

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint.

7.

To add another wall to the one you have just drawn, move the mouse in the direction you

54

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

When the wall layout is complete, right-click and select Finish.

To move the entire wall layout: 1.

Click on one of the exterior walls to select it, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle on the currently selected wall to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the layout to where you want it, then release your mouse button.

To resize the wall layout by stretching: 1.

Select the exterior wall you want to move. All attached walls will stretch along with it when you move it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the wall to resize the wall layout, then release your mouse button.

To resize the wall layout by editing its dimensions: 1.

Select one of the exterior walls. If you want to stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical wall. If you want to stretch the layout up or down, select a horizontal wall. Dimensions are displayed on the wall layout.

Adding a Story 2.

3.

Click the dimension you want to edit. The Edit Dimension dialog appears.

3.

In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert.

4.

Select a start point for the first wall.

5.

Move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the wall.

Enter the new value in the Enter Distance edit box, then press Enter or click OK. The walls update automatically.

Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 5º angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap.

To remove the wall layout: 1.

Click on one of the walls, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Adding a Story

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint. Your cursor will snap to the dimmed image of the walls below for ease.

7.

To add another wall to the one you have just drawn, move the mouse in the direction you want the new wall to run. When it is the right length, click to set its endpoint.

8.

When the wall layout is complete, right-click and select Finish.

Once you have created your ground floor exterior walls, adding more levels to your design is easy. You can draw the layout just like you did to create the ground floor, or you can use the Duplicate to Locations tool to copy the ground floor exterior walls to the second floor location. To create a new story by drawing the walls: 1.

2.

Make sure the current location is the Second Floor location, or whatever location you have set up for the story you are creating.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar.

To create a new story by duplicating walls on the ground floor: 1.

Make sure the current location is the Ground Floor, or whatever location that contains the walls to copy.

2.

Click one of the walls to copy, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

3.

Right-click and select Duplicate to Locations, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Duplicate to Locations.

User’s Guide

55

9

Chapter 9 Walls 4.

In the Duplicate to Locations dialog, select the Second Floor (or whatever location you are copying to).

3.

Enter the new value in the Enter Distance edit box, then press Enter or click OK. The walls update automatically.

To remove the wall layout: 1.

Click on one of the walls, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Applying Different Finishes to Exterior Walls You can apply different finishes to your exterior walls using the handy Materials Paintbrush. The materials catalog contains an excellent selection of brick, concrete, stone and siding. 5.

Click OK. The walls are copied, and you now have a new story.

Note: When you copy a wall layout, a floor with the default material is automatically created on the location you are copying to. To resize the wall layout by stretching: 1.

Select the exterior wall you want to move. All attached walls will stretch along with it when you move it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the wall to resize the wall layout, then release your mouse button.

To apply a finish to an exterior wall: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the wall face you want to apply the material to is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the wall face that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied. You can continue applying the material to other walls if you want.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To resize the wall layout by editing its dimensions: 1.

2.

56

Select one of the exterior walls. If you want to stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical wall. If you want to stretch the layout up or down, select a horizontal wall. Dimensions are displayed on the wall layout. Click the dimension you want to edit. The Edit Dimension dialog appears.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Drawing Interior Walls

Drawing Interior Walls Once you’ve created your exterior walls, you can start drawing interior walls. Walls snap to other walls automatically, creating clean corners and intersections. As you create rooms in your model, the floor is split up into separate floors that you can edit individually.

Editing a Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation You can edit the size properties of a wall by making changes on the wall’s Basic property page. To edit a wall’s size properties: 1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Edit the properties as desired:

To draw interior walls: 1.

From the location drop box, select the location where you want to draw interior walls.

Width. The thickness of the wall. Wall Height. The physical height of the wall. 2.

Select Insert > Walls, or click the Walls button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the wall type you want to insert.

4.

Select a start point for the first wall.

5.

Move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the wall. Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 5º angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap.

6.

When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint.

7.

When you are done, right-click and select Finish.

Extension Below Base. The height of the wall below floor level. 5.

Once the properties are set, click OK.

Lengthening and Shortening Walls You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by clicking and dragging one of the wall’s ends. To lengthen or shorten a wall: 1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the wall end you want to stretch. The Stretch cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the wall end until it has reached the desired length.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Rotating a Wall You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate a wall: 1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

User’s Guide

57

9

Chapter 9 Walls 3.

Position your pointer over the grab handle you want to rotate the wall around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release your mouse button.

Deleting a Wall You can delete a wall in a couple of easy steps. To delete a wall:

Curving a Wall

1.

You can curve a wall using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to curve to.

Select the wall to delete. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

To curve a wall by clicking and dragging:

Note: If a floor was inserted automatically when you created your wall layout, the floor will be deleted if the wall you are deleting opens up the wall layout.

1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.

Adding Paint and Wallpaper

4.

Release your mouse button.

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply custom paint, wallpaper or wood paneling to a wall.

To curve a wall to a selected point: 1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The wall automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

To apply paint or wallpaper to walls: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the wall face you want to apply the paint or wallpaper to is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Paint colors are located in the Paint category, and wallpaper can be found in the Finishes category. You can apply any material in the catalog that you want.

4.

Click on the wall face that you want to apply the paint or wallpaper to. The material is immediately applied. You can continue applying the material to other walls if you want.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Breaking a Wall You can break a wall into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually. You may, for example, want to apply different materials to each new individual wall. To break a wall: 1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and click Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.

3.

58

Double-click the point where you want to break the wall. This divides the wall into two segments that can be moved, stretched or edited individually.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Adding Trim to Walls

Adding Trim to Walls

side is the western side of the wall, or the side closest to the left side of the screen.

Trim types include baseboards, crown molding, chair rails, door/window trim, cove molding, wainscoting and decorative wallpaper borders. You can add as many types of trim to a wall as you want, and even add different materials to either side of the wall.

Right Interior Side. If a wall was drawn left to right, this is the south side of the wall, or the side closest to the bottom of the screen. If a wall was drawn right to left, this is the north side of the wall, or the side closest to the top of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the top downward, the right side is the western side of the wall, or the side closest to the left side of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the bottom up, the right side is the eastern side of the wall, or the side closest to the right side of the screen.

Trim selections are made on a wall’s Trim property page. To add trim to walls: 1.

Select the wall you want to add trim to.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Trim tab.

4.

5.

In the list of trim types, select the trim you would like to select a member for, then click Add.

6.

In the catalog, select the trim you want to use, then click OK. The trim list displays the member you selected.

7.

If you want to edit the properties of the selected member, such as the height or width, click Edit, then make your changes in the Trim dialog.

From the Application drop box, select the wall side you want to add trim to.

8.

To delete the member from the trim list, select it, then click Delete.

Exterior Side. The exterior side of an exterior wall.

9.

In the Apply to area, specify how you would like the trim applied to the wall. Different variables are available depending on the trim type.

Left Interior Side. If a wall was drawn left to right, this is the north side of the wall, or the side closest to the top of the screen. If a wall was drawn right to left, this is the south side of the wall, or the side closer to the bottom of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the top downward, the left side is the eastern side of the wall, or the side closest to the right side of the screen. If a wall was drawn vertically from the bottom up, the left

Gap. For trim around door and window openings, this is the offset of the trim from the opening. For crown moldings, baseboards and chair rails, this is the offset of the trim from the wall face. Offset. For crown moldings, this is the offset of the molding from the top of the wall. For baseboards and chair rails, this is the offset of the member from the bottom of the wall. User’s Guide

59

9

Chapter 9 Walls Offset from wall. If creating custom trim, this determines where the member is offset from when an offset is specified. Choose from Wall Bottom, Wall Top, Ceiling or Floor. Trim basepoint. If creating custom trim, this determines which edge of the trim is used to measure the offset. Choose either Top of Trim or Bottom of Trim. 10. Once you’ve selected your trim, click OK. The walls are updated automatically.

60

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Doors, Windows & Openings Once you’ve drawn walls, you can insert a variety of doors, windows and openings in them to create the exact design you want. Like all elements in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite, doors, windows and openings are intelligent. They know that they can only be inserted in walls. As soon as your pointer gets close to a wall, they snap into place. All you have to do is position it where you want it along the wall, then click to insert it. Dimensions are displayed as you are positioning the element so you can get the precise placement you want. Even though doors, windows and openings automatically become associated with the walls they are inserted in, you can edit them independently if you want.

Doors

Windows

Openings

61

Chapter 10 Doors, Windows & Openings

Inserting Doors

Editing Door Types

The catalog contains a wide variety of doors for you to insert, including hinged, bi-fold, pocket, sliding glass and garage doors. You can point and click to insert a door, or offset the door a specific distance from the end of a wall.

Door types include hinged, bi-fold, pocket, face slider, track slider, fold-up, tilt, and roller. You can edit a door’s type on the door’s Basic property page.

Doors are inserted at floor level. You can raise or lower a door after you have inserted it if you need to. To insert a door: 1.

Make sure the location you want to insert doors on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Doors, or click the Doors button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog, select the door you want to insert.

4.

If you want to offset the door a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset.

To edit a door type: 1.

Select the door whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

In the Type area, click on the desired door type to select it.

5.

Click OK.

Editing the Size and Shape of a Door You can edit the shape of a door, its height and width, and swing type.

Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.

5.

Position the door in the receiving wall. If you are using an insertion offset, position the door close to the end you want to offset it from. The door will snap inside the wall. Dimensions are displayed that show you the distance on either side of the door.

6.

With your door positioned where you want it, click to insert it.

7.

Right-click and select Finish.

62

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To edit the size of a door: 1.

Select the door whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Editing a Door’s Sidelites and Highlites 3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To display a highlite over the door, enable the Display Highlite check box.

5.

To display a sidelite on the left side of the door, enable the Display Left Sidelite check box.

6.

To display a sidelite on the right side of the door, enable the Display Right Sidelite check box.

To edit sidelites and highlites:

4.

Edit the shape and dimensions as desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the door graphic, and vice versa.

1.

Select the door whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Lites tab.

4.

In the Type window, select the lite you want to specify settings for. Note that the lite must be enabled on the Basic property page before it can be edited.

5.

To select a specific window type for the currently selected lite, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.

6.

Edit the dimensions of the lite in the Properties area if desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the

Shape. Choose from Rectangular, Arched or Apexed. Width. The width of the door leaf. Height. The height of the door leaf. Swing Type. Choose from Left, Right or Double. A door with a left door swing will have its hinges on the right. 3D % Open. How much the door is shown swung open in 3D view. By default, doors are shown closed in 3D view. 2D % Open. How much the door is swung open in 2D plan view.

Editing a Door’s Sidelites and Highlites A sidelite is a fixed glass panel set on one or both sides of a door (usually an entry door). A highlite is a fixed glass panel above a door. You can create a custom configuration of sidelites and/or highlights for a door. To display lites on a door: 1.

Select the door.

User’s Guide

63

10

Chapter 10 Doors, Windows & Openings 3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Leaf tab.

Height. The overall height of the lite.

4.

# of Horizontal Panels. The number of panels across the lite. If you specify more than one panel, vertical dividers are added inside the lite’s frame.

In the Type area, click on the leaf type you want.

5.

If you want to change the thickness of the leaf, enter the thickness in the Leaf Depth edit box.

6.

Each door leaf type has its own set of dimensions that you can define. These dimensions vary according to how many panels the leaf has. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the door leaf graphic, and vice versa.

7.

Click OK.

corresponding dimension in the sidelite/ highlite graphic, and vice versa. Shape. Choose from Rectangle, Arched or Trapezoid. (highlite) Adjust Width. Selecting Opening adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the opening (including any sidelites). Selecting Door adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the door (excluding any sidelites). Selecting User Defined lets you specify a precise width for the highlite in the Width edit box. Width. The total width of the lite. (sidelites) Adjust Height to Door. Automatically adjusts the height of a sidelite to match the height of the door.

# of Vertical Panels. The number of panels running vertically along the lite. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers are added inside the lite’s frame. # of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes of glass across the lite. # of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of glass running vertically along the lite. 7.

Click OK.

Editing a Door Leaf You can choose from a variety of door leaf types and change the thickness of the leaf. To edit a door’s leaf: 1.

Select the door whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

64

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing Door Details You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for the door frame, sash, mullions and transoms. To edit door details: 1.

Select the door whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Flipping a Door 3.

In the Doors dialog, select the Details tab.

Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of the mullion as seen from an overhead view. Transom Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the transom member as seen from an overhead view. The transom is the member between the door and the sidelite or highlite frame. Width. The width of the transom as seen from an overhead view. 5.

Click OK.

Flipping a Door You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire door around. If the door originally opened out, it now opens in; if it was hinged on the left, it is now hinged on the right (and vice versa). 4.

Edit the dimensions as desired. They are described below.

To flip a door: 1.

Click the door to select it.

Frame

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening.

Depth. The depth of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the door frame from the wall face. Sash Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/ highlite frame) as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of sash members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of the door frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the door frame. Mullion Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more panels running across it, this adds vertical dividers between the panels. Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or more stacked panels, this adds horizontal dividers between them. Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.

Flipping a Door Swing Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a door. The door will be hinged on the opposite side, but it will still open in the same direction, either in or out. To flip a door swing: 1.

Click the door to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Swing.

Moving a Door You can move a door by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either side of the door. To move a door by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the door to select it.

2.

Click and drag the door to move it, then release your mouse button.

User’s Guide

65

10

Chapter 10 Doors, Windows & Openings To move a door by editing dimensions: 1.

Click on the door. Dimensions appear on either side of the door.

2.

Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3.

In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value, then press Enter or click OK. The door position updates automatically.

Deleting a Door You can delete a door with a couple of mouse clicks. To delete a door: 1.

Select the door to delete. To select multiple doors, use Shift+click.

2.

Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Windows The catalog contains a wide variety of windows for you to insert, including fixed, casement, double casement, hopper, awning, sliding, double-hung, single-hung, bay, bow and louvered windows.

Raising or Lowering a Door

You can point and click to insert a window, or offset the window a specific distance from the end of a wall.

You can raise or lower a door in a wall using the Elevate tool on the door’s right-click menu. You may, for example, want to lower your garage door if your ground floor sits above the ground.

Windows are inserted at the Head Height defined for the building location you insert the window on. You can raise or lower a window after you have inserted it if you need to.

To raise or lower a door:

Note: If you want to insert a skylight, see Inserting Skylights on page 104.

1.

Select the door whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value currently shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the door above or below the floor level.

3.

4.

66

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the door base above the floor. You can enter a negative value to move the door down. Click OK.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To insert a window: 1.

Make sure the location you want to insert windows on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Windows, or click the Windows button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog, select the window you want to insert.

4.

If you want to offset the window a specific distance from the end of

Editing Window Types the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset.

Editing a Window’s Size Properties

Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.

You can edit the height and width of a window. You can also control the number of horizontal and vertical panes in the window. Some window types have additional properties that define their geometry. To edit the size of a window:

5.

Position the window in the receiving wall. If you are using an insertion offset, position the window close to the end you want to offset it from. The window will snap inside the wall. Dimensions are displayed that show you the distance on either side of the window.

6.

With your window positioned where you want it, click to insert it.

7.

Right-click and select Finish.

1.

Select the window whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Edit the dimensions as desired. Most windows have the common dimensions listed below. Some have additional settings to define their geometry. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the window graphic, and vice versa.

Editing Window Types Window types include fixed, casement, hung, sliding, awning, hopper, vent, bay, bow and louvre. You can edit a window’s type on the window’s Basic property page. To edit a window type: 1.

Select the window whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

In the Type area, click on the desired window type to select it.

Window Width. The width of the window, not including the frame. Window Height. The height of the window.

5.

Click OK.

# of Horizontal Panels. The number of window panels running horizontally across the window frame. If you specify more than one

User’s Guide

67

10

Chapter 10 Doors, Windows & Openings panel, vertical dividers are added inside the window frame.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Lites tab.

4.

To display a highlite, sidelite or lowlite, check the appropriate box in the Type area (Highlite, Lowlite, Sidelite - left, Sidelite - right). You can select as many as you want.

5.

In the Type window, select the lite you want to specify settings for.

6.

To select a specific window type for the currently selected lite, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.

7.

Edit the dimensions of the lite in the Properties area if desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the sidelite/ highlite graphic, and vice versa.

# of Vertical Panels. The number of window panels running vertically along the window frame. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers are added inside the window frame. # of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes of glass across each window panel. # of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of glass running vertically along each window panel. 5.

Click OK.

Editing a Window’s Sidelites, Highlites and Lowlites A sidelite is a fixed glass panel set on one or both sides of a window. A highlite is a glass panel above a window. A lowlite is a glass panel below a window. You can create a custom configuration of sidelites, highlites and lowlites for a window. To display lites on a window: 1.

Select the window.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To display a highlite over the window, enable the Display Highlite check box.

5.

To display a lowlite under the window, enable the Display Lowlite check box.

6.

To display a sidelite on the left side of the window, enable the Display Left Sidelite check box.

7.

To display a sidelite on the right side of the window, enable the Display Right Sidelite check box.

8.

Click OK.

To edit a window’s lites: 1.

Select the window whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

68

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Shape. Choose from Rectangle, Arched or Trapezoid. (highlite/lowlite) Adjust Width. Selecting Opening adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the opening (including any sidelites). Selecting Window adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the window (excluding any sidelites). Selecting User Defined lets you specify a precise width for the highlite/lowlite in the Width edit box. Width. The total width of the lite.

Editing Window Details (sidelites) Adjust Height to Window. Automatically adjusts the height of a sidelite to match the height of the window. Height. The overall height of the lite. # of Horizontal Panels. The number of panels across the lite. If you specify more than one panel, vertical dividers are added inside the lite’s frame. # of Vertical Panels. The number of panels running vertically along the lite. If you specify more than one panel, horizontal dividers are added inside the lite’s frame.

8.

4.

Edit the dimensions as desired. They are described below. Frame Depth. The depth of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width of the frame members as seen from an overhead view. Offset. The offset of the window frame from the wall face. Sash

# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes of glass across the lite.

Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/ highlite/lowlite frame) as seen from an overhead view.

# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of glass running vertically along the lite.

Width. The width of sash members as seen from an overhead view.

Click OK.

Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of the window frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the window frame.

Editing Window Details You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for the window frame, sash, mullions and transoms. To edit window details: 1.

Select the window whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Windows dialog, select the Details tab.

Post (for Bays and Bows) Depth: The thickness of posts in bay and bow windows. Width: The width of posts in bay and bow windows. Mullion Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more panels running across it, this adds vertical dividers between the panels. Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or more stacked panels, this adds horizontal dividers between them. Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the mullion as seen from an overhead view. Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of the mullion as seen from an overhead view. Transom (for Lites) Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the transom member as seen from an overhead view. The transom is the member between the window and the sidelite, highlite or lowlite frame. Width. The width of the transom as seen from an overhead view.

User’s Guide

69

10

Chapter 10 Doors, Windows & Openings 5.

Click OK.

Flipping a Window You can use the Flip Opening tool to instantly flip a window around in the wall. If the window has a swing, the swing is also flipped. To flip a window: 1.

Select the window.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening.

Raising or Lowering a Window You can raise or lower a window in a wall using the Elevate tool on the window’s right-click menu. To raise or lower a window: 1.

Select the window whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value currently shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the window top above the floor level.

Moving a Window You can move a window by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either side of the window. To move a window by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the window to select it.

2.

Click and drag the window to move it.

To move a window by editing dimensions: 1.

Click on the window. Dimensions appear on either side of the window.

2.

Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the top of the window above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Deleting a Window You can delete a window with a couple of mouse clicks. To delete a window: 1.

Select the window to delete. To select multiple windows, use Shift+click.

2.

Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Wall Openings 3.

In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value, then press Enter or click OK. The window position updates automatically.

An opening is a cutout in a wall of a specific shape, width and height. Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal or trapezoidal. You can point and click to insert an opening, or offset the opening a specific distance from the end of a wall. Openings are inserted at the Head Height defined for the building location you insert the opening on. You can raise or lower an opening after you have inserted it if you need to.

70

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing the Shape of a Wall Opening To insert an opening: 1.

Make sure the location you want to insert openings on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Openings, or click the Openings button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog, select the opening you want to insert.

4.

If you want to offset the opening a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset.

Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.

5.

Position the opening in the receiving wall. If you are using an insertion offset, position the opening close to the end you want to offset it from. The opening will snap inside the wall. Dimensions are displayed that show you the distance on either side of the opening.

6.

With your opening positioned where you want it, click to insert it.

7.

Right-click and select Finish.

Editing the Shape of a Wall Opening Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal or trapezoidal. To change the shape a wall opening: 1.

Select the opening whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Type area, click on the shape you want.

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Size of a Wall Opening You can edit the dimensions of a wall opening by changing the properties on the opening’s Basic property page. To edit the size of a wall opening: 1.

Select the opening whose properties you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Properties area, edit the dimensions of the opening. Dimensions vary according to the shape of the opening.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: If you want the bottom of your opening to be level with the floor, change the height of opening to match the Head Height of the building location it is inserted on. Alternatively you can lower the opening using the Elevate tool.

Moving a Wall Opening You can move a wall opening by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either side of the opening. To move an opening by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the opening to select it.

2.

Click and drag the opening to move it.

To move an opening by editing dimensions: 1.

Click on the opening. Dimensions appear on either side of the opening.

User’s Guide

71

10

Chapter 10 Doors, Windows & Openings 2.

Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3.

In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value, then press Enter or click OK. The opening position updates automatically.

Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening You can raise or lower an opening in a wall using the Elevate tool on the opening’s right-click menu. To raise or lower a wall opening: 1.

Select the opening whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value currently shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the opening top above the floor level.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the top of the opening above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Deleting a Wall Opening You can delete a wall opening with a couple of mouse clicks. To delete an opening: 1.

72

Select the opening to delete. To select multiple openings, use Shift+click.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

2.

Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Chapter

Floors & Ceilings A floor is inserted automatically when you connect three or more walls to create a closed wall layout. When you insert interior walls, the floor is split as new rooms are created. If you want different flooring types in different rooms, you can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different types of carpet, tiles, wood flooring, vinyl flooring, linoleum, or concrete to individual floors. Ceilings are not created automatically unless you turn on the Insert Ceilings Automatically option in your program settings before drawing walls. Alternatively you can point and click to insert ceilings using one of the handy Ceiling tools.

Define Floors

Ceilings

73

Chapter 11 Floors & Ceilings

How Floors are Created A floor is automatically inserted throughout your model when you connect three or more walls to create a closed exterior wall layout. The material applied to the floor depends on the house style you selected when using the House Builder Wizard. If you created your model from scratch, a nylon carpet was applied.

Floors tool can be moved to increase or decrease the size of the individual floor area. They can also be deleted if necessary. To define individual floor areas: 1.

Select Insert > Define Floors, or click the Define Floors button on the Building toolbar.

2.

Select points to define the split line.

When you draw interior walls, the floor is split into individual floors as new rooms are created provided the room’s walls are all connected. You can also manually split any floor surface using the Define Floors tool.

x

Floors cannot be selected in 2D plan view. They can only be selected in 3D view. The only exception are floor edges that have been defined using the Define Floors tool. Such edges are marked with a dashed line in 2D view, and can be moved if necessary. Floors are directly associated with the walls that contain them. If you stretch your wall layout, the floor stretches with it. If you open up your wall layout by deleting a wall, the floor will be deleted. You cannot re-insert a floor manually. Tip: For projects in which you plan to use the House Builder Wizard, you can change the default floor type by editing the House Builder Wizard element configuration before running the Wizard. See Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration on page 376. If you plan to create a model from scratch, you can change the default floor type by selecting the desired floor type in the Catalog Manager before creating your wall layout. See Using the Catalog Manager on page 334.

Defining Individual Floor Areas As you draw interior walls, the floor is split into individual floors as new rooms are created provided the rooms are completely enclosed by walls. You can manually split a floor if you want. You may, for example, want to create two different floor areas in one room. You can also use the Define Floors tool to define an opening in your floor. Floor edges defined with the Define

74

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

x

Note that the start point and end point of the line must be on an existing floor edge, although intermediate points are permitted anywhere on the floor surface (if you are creating a custom floor shape, for example). 3.

Right-click and select Finish.

To move a defined floor edge: 1.

Click on the dashed floor edge in 2D plan view. Blue grab handles are displayed along the line.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle, then click and drag to move the line.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering a Floor You can raise or lower a floor using the Elevate tool. To raise or lower a floor: 1.

Select the floor in 3D.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the floor above the floor level defined for the current building location.

4.

Click OK.

Editing the Thickness of a Floor

Editing the Thickness of a Floor

Inserting Openings in Floors

You can edit the thickness of a floor on its Basic property page.

You can insert an opening of any shape and size in a floor. You may need to do this to accommodate a staircase.

To edit the thickness of a floor: 1.

Select the floor in 3D.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the value in the Thickness edit box on the Basic page.

4.

Click OK.

Applying Different Materials to Floors

To insert an opening in a floor: 1.

Select Insert > Define Floors, or click the Define Floors button on the Building toolbar.

2.

Select points to define the outline of the opening, ensuring the outline is a closed shape.

3.

Right-click and select Finish. An outline is created on the floor surface. You can stretch, move and curve the opening if necessary to get the exact size and shape you want. Note that you cannot edit the size, shape or position of the opening later, so make sure it’s correct before proceeding.

4.

Go into 3D view and make sure the floor is visible and accessible.

5.

Click in the center of the outline you drew to select the outline.

6.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different types of materials to floors, such as different colors or patterns of carpet, tile or linoleum. To apply a material to a floor: 1.

Display your model in 3D view and make sure the floor is visible in the view. You may need to use the View Filter to hide the roof and ceilings.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Categories that contain flooring include Wood, Concrete, Carpet, Tile and Linoleum.

4.

5.

Click on the floor surface you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied. You can continue applying the material to other floor surfaces, or select another material in the catalog. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Floor You can delete a floor while in 3D view. Warning: There is no method of inserting floors manually. They can only be created while drawing walls. To delete a floor: 1.

Select the floor in 3D.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

How Ceilings Are Created If you turn on the Insert Ceilings Automatically feature in your Program Settings before drawing walls, a ceiling is automatically created when you connect three or more walls to form a closed wall layout. User’s Guide

75

11

Chapter 11 Floors & Ceilings The type of ceiling that is inserted depends on the house style you select when using the House Builder Wizard. If you create your model from scratch, a 1/2” drywall material is applied to the ceiling, or whatever ceiling material was last selected in the catalog. When you draw interior walls, the ceiling is split into individual ceilings as new rooms are created provided the room’s walls are all connected. Automatic ceilings can only be selected and edited in 3D view. If you did not turn on the Insert Ceilings Automatically feature before drawing walls, or you have deleted a ceiling, you can insert ceilings using any of the handy Ceiling tools — Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter, or Ceiling by Picking Points. You can edit the thickness and appearance of any ceiling as well as lower it to create a suspended ceiling, regardless of how you created it. You can also use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to individual ceilings.

Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Perimeter.

3.

In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.

4.

Click anywhere inside the perimeter of the model. The ceiling is added automatically.

5.

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

Inserting Ceilings by Room

Tip: The underside of an upper-story floor can also serve as a ceiling. By the same token, the top side of a lower-story ceiling can serve as a floor.

The Ceiling by Room option inserts a ceiling inside the perimeter of a room provided all the walls are connected. Adding ceilings by room allows you to have different ceiling types in different rooms.

Inserting Ceilings by Perimeter

To insert a ceiling inside a room:

You can use the Ceiling by Perimeter tool to instantly insert a ceiling of your choice inside the perimeter of your model. This means that every room on a selected location will have the same ceiling. Also, the ceiling will be considered one element, even though it is present in individual rooms.

1.

Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Room, or click the Ceilings button on the Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Room.

To instantly add a ceiling to the entire perimeter of a location: 1.

Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2.

Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Perimeter, or click the Ceilings button on the

76

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Inserting a Ceiling by Picking Points 3.

In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.

4.

Click inside the room that you want to add the ceiling to. The ceiling is added automatically. (If you want, you can continue adding ceilings to other rooms.)

5.

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

Inserting a Ceiling by Picking Points Using the Ceiling by Picking Points tool you can insert a ceiling by picking points to define the ceiling’s outline. This lets you create a ceiling of any shape and size, anywhere in the drawing area. To create a ceiling by picking points: 1.

2.

Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box. Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Picking Points, or click the Ceilings button on the Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Picking Points.

last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.) 6.

Right-click and select Finish.

Raising or Lowering a Ceiling You can change the height of a ceiling using the Elevate tool. To raise or lower a ceiling: 1.

Select the ceiling you want to raise or lower by clicking on the edge of it. If the ceiling was created automatically when drawing walls, you need to select it in 3D view.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The current value in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the ceiling above the floor level.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the height you want the ceiling to sit at above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Curving a Ceiling Edge You can curve a ceiling edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve a ceiling edge by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the ceiling edge to the desired curve. Release your mouse button.

3.

In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.

4.

4.

Select a start point for the ceiling outline.

1.

Click on the ceiling edge you want to curve.

5.

2.

Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because the

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The ceiling edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

To curve a ceiling edge to a selected point:

User’s Guide

77

11

Chapter 11 Floors & Ceilings

Inserting Openings in Automatic Ceilings If you opted to insert a ceiling automatically before drawing walls, you can create a custom opening in the automatic ceiling using the Define Floors and Delete tools. To insert an opening in an automatic ceiling: 1.

In 2D plan view, select Insert > Define Floors, or click the Define Floors button on the Building toolbar.

2.

Select points to define the outline of the opening, ensuring the outline is a closed shape.

3.

Right-click and select Finish. An outline is created on both the floor and ceiling of the current location. If necessary you can move, stretch or curve edges to get the exact size and shape you want. Note that you cannot edit the size, shape or position of the opening later, so make sure it’s correct before proceeding.

4.

Go into 3D view and make sure the ceiling is visible.

5.

Click in the center of the outline you drew to select the outline.

6.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

4.

Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to select the start point again.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Note: You cannot insert openings this way in ceilings that were created automatically when drawing walls.

Resizing a Ceiling Opening If you created a ceiling opening in a manually inserted ceiling, you can resize the opening by clicking and dragging one of its edges. Note: You cannot edit an opening created in an automatic ceiling. To stretch a ceiling opening: 1.

Inserting Openings in Manually Inserted Ceilings If you used a Ceiling tool to insert a ceiling, you can insert a custom opening in it of virtually any shape and size using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its outline. To insert an opening in a ceiling: 1.

Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.

3.

Select a start point for the opening.

78

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge you want to move. The entire opening is highlighted, and a blue grab handle appears at the center of the opening edge you selected.

Grab handle

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

Curving a Ceiling Opening Edge 3.

Click and drag in the direction you want to stretch.

Removing Ceiling Openings You can remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling by selecting all sides of the opening, then clicking and dragging it away from the ceiling. Note: You cannot remove an opening using Delete. Also, you cannot remove an opening created in an automatic ceiling. To remove a ceiling opening:

4.

When the opening is the correct size, release your mouse button.

1.

Click on one of the opening’s edges.

2.

Shift+click to select the remaining sides.

3.

Hover your pointer over one of the grab handles to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag the opening off the ceiling surface until it disappears.

Tip: You can also reshape a ceiling opening by clicking and dragging its corner grab handles.

Curving a Ceiling Opening Edge You can curve an opening edge in a manually inserted ceiling using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. Note: You cannot edit an opening created in an automatic ceiling. To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the opening edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different colors or materials to ceilings. The paintbrush intelligently applies the material to the underside of the ceiling, even if you select the top side of the ceiling. To apply a material to a ceiling: 1.

Display your model in 3D view and make sure the ceiling is visible in the view. You may need to use the View Filter to hide the roof.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

To curve an opening edge to a selected point: 1.

Click on the opening edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

User’s Guide

79

11

Chapter 11 Floors & Ceilings 3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Paint colors are located in the Paint category, and Stucco and Drywall can be found in the Finishes category.

4.

Click on the ceiling you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied to the underside of the ceiling. You can continue applying the material to other ceiling surfaces, or select another material in the catalog.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Ceiling You can delete a ceiling in a couple of easy steps. To delete a ceiling: 1.

Select the ceiling. If the ceiling was created automatically when drawing walls, you need to select it in 3D view.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

80

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Stairs, Ramps & Railings If your design has more than one floor, you’ll want to insert a staircase. The catalog contains a variety of stair and ramp styles, including straight, spiral, fold-back, L-shaped, L-winder. There are even stairs specifically for decks and porches. You can edit the composition and dimensions of each component in your staircase to create the exact look you want. Stairs and ramps are inserted as solid objects with point-and-click simplicity. Just select the staircase or ramp you want to insert in the catalog, then click to insert it in your model. The catalog also contains an excellent selection of railing types. A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. You can insert railings on a staircase automatically. You can choose to put it on both sides, the left side, the right side, or the center. You can also draw a horizontal railing by picking points.

Stairs/Ramps

Railings

81

Chapter 12 Stairs, Ramps & Railings

Inserting Stairs and Ramps

Editing Stair Size Properties

You can insert a staircase or ramp with a single mouse click. If you place the staircase near a wall, the staircase will automatically snap to the wall. Once you have inserted a staircase, you can edit its size, style and geometry.

By default, most stairs (except porch stairs) have an overall height of 9’ and have 18 steps. You can edit the general dimensions of a staircase, such as height, width, and number of steps. To edit stair size properties:

To insert a staircase or ramp: 1.

In the building locations drop box, select the location where you want to insert the base of the staircase.

2.

Select Insert > Stairs/Ramps, or click the Stairs/Ramps button on the Building toolbar.

3.

In the catalog, select the staircase or ramp you want to insert.

4.

Position the staircase and click to insert it.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

1.

Select the staircase whose stair properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, edit the dimensions in the Properties window.

Parts of a Staircase Riser

Overall Height. The vertical distance from the base of the staircase to the top of the staircase. Generally this is the distance from one floor to the next.

Tread

Nosing Stringer

Total Steps. The total number of steps in the staircase including all treads and landings. This value is controlled by the Overall Height and Riser Maximum, so you can only go so high or so low when specifying the total number of steps. Riser Height. The distance from the top of one tread to the top of the next tread. The riser height adjusts if you edit the Overall Height or Total Steps, making this a readonly value.

82

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing a Staircase Layout Tread Run. The width of a step from the nose of the step to the riser of the next step. Riser Maximum. The maximum height allowed for risers. The riser height adjusts when you change the Overall Height or Total Steps variables. Show Riser. Inserts vertical boards under the treads. If turned off, the stairs are open under the treads.

Editing a Staircase Layout You can choose from a multitude of preset staircase layouts and edit the dimensions of individual segments to suit your needs. To edit a staircase layout: 1.

Select the staircase whose stair properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Layout tab.

4.

To change the layout of the staircase, make a selection from the Preset Layouts drop box, or click the graphic to display the available layouts and select the one you want.

6.

Different layouts will have different parameters. Common ones are described below. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the stair graphic, and vice versa. Stair Segments Number of Steps. The number of steps in the flight. Position Offset. Shifts the base of the staircase left or right from the center line. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it left. If the Upper Offset is set to 0, the entire staircase is moved. Lower Width. The width of the bottom step. Upper Width. The width of the top step. Upper Offset. Shifts the top of the stair segment left or right to create an angled flight. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it left. Landing Connection. Choose from Front, Bottom or Under to determine how the stairs attach to the landing. Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached landings and stair flights to match the width settings of the current segment. Adjust Segment. When editing the number of risers or height of the segment, this determines which other segments (or all others) are to be adjusted to make up the overall height of all segments. Landing Segments (vary per style) Position Offset. Shifts the landing left or right. A positive value moves the landing right. A negative value moves it left.

5.

To edit the dimensions of a particular segment, select the segment in the Layout Segments window. For example, an L-shaped staircase will have three segments: Stair 1, Landing 2 and Stair 3. The Stair 1 segment is the lower flight of stairs, Landing 2 is the central landing between the two flights, and Stair 3 is the upper flight of stairs.

Width. The width of the landing along the lower flight of stairs. By default this matches the Upper Width setting of the lower stair flight. Depth 1. The width of the landing along the upper flight of stairs. By default this matches the Lower Width setting of the upper stair flight. Depth 2. The width of the exposed side of the landing. User’s Guide

83

12

Chapter 12 Stairs, Ramps & Railings Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached stair flights to match the width of the landing. 7.

3.

To change the stringer style or create a solid stair, click the appropriate graphic in the Type area.

4.

To edit tread, riser, stringer and landing details, select the Details tab. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the stair graphic, and vice versa.

5.

Edit the properties in the Properties area.

To add a flight or landing to your staircase, click Add in the Layout Segments area. Select the segment you want to add in the Add/Edit Segment dialog.

Tread Thickness. The thickness of each step. Nosing Depth. The distance the step extends past the riser. The segment is added to your list of segments in the Layout Segments window. Proceed with defining the parameters for the new segment in the Parameters window. 8.

9.

To change an existing segment to another type, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Edit. Select the new segment type in the Add/Edit Segment dialog.

0º

20º

To delete a segment from the staircase, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Delete.

10. Once you are satisfied with your layout settings, click OK.

Editing Stair Details Editing stair details lets you precisely control the size and position of treads, risers, stringers and landing platforms. To edit stair details: 1.

Select the staircase whose stair properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

84

Riser Angle. The tilt of the riser board. A value of 0 means the board is perpendicular to the step (straight up and down). A value above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20º.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Stringer Side Offset. The distance the side stringers are offset from the ends of the treads. Stringer Waste. The distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection. Setting the stringer waste to match the height of your staircase

Editing the Appearance of the Cut Line creates a stringer that runs from the staircase right to the floor.

4.

Make your changes in the Cut Line area. Show Cut Lines. Shows or hides the cut lines in 2D plan view. Extension. The distance the cut line extends past the edge of the staircase in 2D plan view. Angle. The angle of the cut line in 2D plan view.

Waste = 3 5/16”

Stringer Thickness. The thickness of the stringer member.

Elevation. How high up the staircase the cut line sits.

Max Stringer Spacing. The maximum distance allowed between stringers. If you increase the width of the staircase, additional stringers will be inserted if this spacing is exceeded.

Style. Choose from Single, Single Architectural, Double and Double Architectural. The default is Double Architectural.

Landing Thickness. The thickness of the landing platform. 6.

Spacing. If using the Double or Double Arch style, this is the distance between the lines.

Waste = 8’

Click OK.

Editing the Appearance of the Cut Line When viewing a staircase in 2D plan view you can see a cut line through the staircase. The cut line is a standard drafting symbol for stairs.

5.

Once you’ve defined your cut line, click OK.

Editing General Ramp Properties If editing a ramp, you can select a uniform or full style, and edit the ramp thickness and landing thickness. If you want to change the layout (shape) of the ramp or edit properties such as the height or slope, see Editing the Layout of a Ramp on page 86. To edit ramp properties: 1.

Select the ramp.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

If you want to change the ramp type, click on the type you want in the Type area. The first type is a ramp with uniform thickness, while the second is a full, wedge-style ramp.

5.

If you selected the uniform ramp style, you can change its thickness by entering the desired thickness in the Ramp Thickness edit box.

Cut Line

You can change the cut line’s position, size, angle and style. You can also hide it from view if you want. To edit the appearance of the cut line: 1.

Select the staircase.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Details tab.

User’s Guide

85

12

Chapter 12 Stairs, Ramps & Railings 6.

To change the thickness of the landing, enter a value in the Landing Thickness edit box.

7.

Click OK.

6.

Ramp segments Slope. The angle of the ramp’s incline.

Editing the Layout of a Ramp

Length. The length of the ramp’s surface. Position Offset. Shifts the base of the ramp left or right from the center line. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it left. If the Upper Offset is set to 0, the entire ramp is moved.

You can choose from a multitude of preset ramp layouts as well as edit various layout properties such as length and slope. To edit the layout of a ramp: 1.

Select the ramp.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Layout tab.

4.

To change the layout of the ramp, make a selection from the Preset Layouts drop box, or click the graphic to display the available layouts and select the one you want.

Edit the variables in the Parameters window.

Lower Width. The width of the bottom of the ramp. Upper Width. The width of the top of the ramp. Upper Offset. Shifts the top of the ramp segment left or right to create an angled ramp. A positive value shifts it right, a negative value shifts it left. Landing Segments (vary per style) Position Offset. Shifts the landing left or right from the center line. A positive value moves it right, a negative value moves it left. Width. The width of the landing along the lower ramp section. By default this matches the Upper Width setting of the lower ramp section. Depth 1. The width of the landing along the upper ramp section. By default this matches the Lower Width setting of the upper ramp section.

5.

86

To edit the dimensions of a particular segment, select the segment in the Layout Segments window. A straight ramp will have one segment, named Ramp 1. Other ramp styles will have more segments. For example, an L-shaped ramp will have three segments: Ramp 1, Landing 2 and Ramp 3. The Ramp 1 segment is the lower section of the ramp, Landing 2 is the central landing between the two sections, and Ramp 3 is the upper section of the ramp. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the ramp graphic, and vice versa.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Depth 2. The width of the exposed side of the landing. Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached ramp segments to match the width of the landing. 7.

To add a segment or landing to your ramp, click Add in the Layout Segments area. Select

Moving a Staircase or Ramp the segment you want to add in the Add/Edit Segment dialog.

Rotating a Staircase or Ramp You can rotate a staircase or ramp by simply clicking and dragging it. To rotate a staircase or ramp:

8.

9.

1.

Select the staircase or ramp.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the staircase or ramp.

4.

When the staircase or ramp is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

The segment is added to your list of segments in the Layout Segments window. Proceed with defining the parameters for the new segment in the Parameters window.

Deleting a Staircase or Ramp

To change an existing segment to another type, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Edit. Select the new segment type in the Add/Edit Segment dialog.

To delete a staircase or ramp:

To delete a segment from the ramp, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Delete.

10. Once you are satisfied with your layout settings, click OK.

Moving a Staircase or Ramp You can move a staircase or ramp by clicking and dragging it. To move a staircase or ramp: 1.

Click on the staircase or ramp to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the staircase/ramp to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

You can delete a staircase or ramp in a couple of easy steps.

1.

Select the staircase or ramp.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Railings on Staircases and Ramps A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. You can insert railings on both sides of a staircase or ramp automatically. Or you can very easily draw one on the left side, the right side, or the center. To insert railings on both sides of a staircase or ramp automatically: 1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railings on Stairs Automatically, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railings on Stairs Automatically.

User’s Guide

87

12

Chapter 12 Stairs, Ramps & Railings 2.

In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.

3.

Click on the staircase. The railings are inserted automatically on both sides.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert a railing on the left side of a staircase or ramp: 1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railing on Stair Left, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Left.

2.

In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.

3.

Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railing’s bottom post. Your cursor will snap to the left side of the staircase as you start to draw the railing.

4.

Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railing’s top post.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert a railing on the right side of a staircase or ramp: 1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railing on Stair Right, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Right.

2.

In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.

3.

Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railing’s bottom post. Your cursor will snap to the right side of the staircase as you start to draw the railing.

4.

Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railing’s top post.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

88

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To insert a railing along the center of a staircase or ramp: 1.

Select Insert > Railings > Railing on Stair Center, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Center.

Inserting a Horizontal Railing 2.

In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.

3.

In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.

3.

Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railing’s bottom post. Your cursor will snap to the center of the staircase as you start to draw the railing.

4.

Select the start point for the railing.

5.

Select an end point for the railing. You can continue adding sections to the railing if you want.

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to define the level of the railing’s top post.

Parts of a Railing

4.

5.

Post

Right-click and select Finish.

Handrail

Inserting a Horizontal Railing

Newels

You can use the Railing by Picking Points tool to create a horizontal railing anywhere in your model. You may, for example, want to create a railing around a stairwell, or insert a railing to separate two rooms in your house. You create the railing by picking the start point and end point of the railing. Each point you pick serves as a main post point.

Bottom Rail

To insert a railing along a floor: 1.

Make sure the building location that you want to insert the railing on is current.

2.

Select Insert > Railings > Railings by Picking Points, or click the Railings button on the Building toolbar and select Railings by Picking Points.

Editing Railing Properties When editing a railing, you can choose a different railing type as well as control the dimensions and settings of posts, rails and newels. To edit railing properties: 1.

Select the railing. If the railing has multiple segments, use Shift+click to select the remaining segments.

User’s Guide

89

12

Chapter 12 Stairs, Ramps & Railings 2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Centered inserts an intermediate post at the center of the railing and measures other intermediate posts from there. Post Height. This value is determined by the handrail and bottom rail heights, and cannot be edited. Post Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round for the post shape. Post Width. The width of the post. Post Depth. The depth of the post. Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of the connecting post where two railings connect. Choosing Half Way rotates the connecting post half way between the angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting post aligned to the first railing.

3.

In the Railings dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To change the railing type, click on the type you want in the Type area.

5.

To edit the settings of individual railing components, make your changes in parameters window. The available parameters vary depending on the railing type. Below is a brief description of typical parameters you might see. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the railing graphic, and vice versa.

Handrail Height. The height of the handrail above the insertion surface. Make Continuous. Makes the handrail cut through all posts, creating a continuous, solid member. Handrail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or Round shape. Handrail Width. The width of the handrail (as seen in 2D plan view). Handrail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the handrail. Bottom Rail

Posts Include Posts. Inserts a post at the railing’s start point and endpoint, and at points in between defined by the Post Spacing. Include First Post. If disabled, eliminates the post at the start point of the railing. Include Last Post. If disabled, eliminates the post at the end point of the railing. Post Spacing. The distance between intermediate posts in your railing. Post Position. Choosing From Start measures the intermediate posts from the start point of the railing. Choosing

90

Handrail

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Bottom Rail Height. The height of the bottom rail from the insertion surface. Bottom Rail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or Round shape for the rail. Bottom Rail Width. The width of the bottom (as seen in 2D plan view). Bottom Rail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the bottom rail. Newels Newel Spacing. The horizontal distance between newels.

Stretching a Railing Newel Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round for the newel shape.

3.

Click on the point you want to rotate around, then move your mouse to rotate the railing around the selected point.

4.

When the railing is at the desired rotation, click to finish.

Newel Width. The width of the newel. Newel Depth. The depth (thickness) of the newel. Stair Insertion Post Offset. The horizontal offset of the first post from the bottom of the staircase. Only a positive value can be specified, which moves the post further back along the stairs. Side Offset. Offset of railing from the sides of the treads. Connection. Determines how railings are connected to the staircase. Connection 2 maintains the distance from the nosing to the railing at all times. Connection 1 breaks this rule to create a nicer-looking railing.

Deleting Railings You can delete a railing in a couple of easy steps. To delete a railing: 1.

Select the railing. If a railing has multiple segments you can Shift+click to select all the segments you want to remove.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Stretching a Railing You can stretch a railing by clicking and dragging one of its end points. Note that if your railing has multiple segments, you can stretch the individual segments. To stretch a railing: 1.

Select the railing. A grab handle is displayed at each railing end.

2.

Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch to display the Stretch cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the railing. Note that you can adjust the rotation of the railing as well as its length.

4.

When the railing is the desired length, release your mouse button.

Rotating a Railing You can rotate a railing using the Rotate tool. To rotate a railing: 1.

Select the railing.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

User’s Guide

91

12

Chapter

Roofs To complete your structural model, you want to insert a roof over it. The design of your roof can be a major factor in the overall look and feel of your home. Inserting a roof in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite is incredibly simple. Just click inside your model and the roof is inserted. Roofs are inserted by location. Therefore, if you have a two-story house, each story may require its own roof. The great thing about roofs in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite is that you can edit each roof edge individually to achieve the precise geometry, dimensions and appearance you want. This means that virtually any roof configuration is possible, including multiple pitch, multiple plate height roofs. And with a wide selection of roof styles to choose from, including hip, gable, mansard and arched, you can be as creative as you want. To give your roof design that extra edge, you can add things like dormers, skylights and openings, all of which are completely customizable to suit your needs.

93

Chapter 13 Roofs

Inserting an Automatic Roof Over Perimeter Walls You can use the Roof by Perimeter tool to automatically insert a roof over the perimeter wall layout of a selected building location. If you have a two-story home where the ground floor wall layout is different than the upper story wall layout, and you want each story to have its own roof, you will need to insert a roof on each location.

Upper Story

To insert a roof over an entire wall layout: 1.

Make sure the current location is the location containing the walls you want to insert the roof over.

2.

Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by Perimeter, or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Roof by Perimeter.

3.

In the catalog, select the roof type you want to insert. Note that the catalog does not contain gable roofs. If you want to create a gable roof, insert a hip roof first, then convert it to a gable. (See Converting a

Lower Story

Roof

Hip Roof to a Gable Roof on page 96.) 4.

Click inside the wall perimeter. The roof is inserted automatically.

Note: If the roof you are inserting will run up against any upper-story walls, the roof cuts around the walls and may adjust to avoid saddle situations. If you do not want the roof to adjust, or you want the roof to ignore the walls, you need to change the roof’s Solution Type before inserting the roof. See Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created on page 95.

Inserting a Roof by Picking Points By default, the roof is inserted directly on top of the walls of the current building location. You can edit the support height as well as change the roof’s style and dimensions after it has been inserted.

You can use the Roof by Picking Points tool to create a roof of a custom size and shape by drawing the basic outline of the roof. This option is ideal when you want the roof to cover only a specific area, such as a porch. To create a roof by picking points: 1.

94

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Make sure the current location is the location containing the walls you want to insert the roof over.

Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created 2.

3.

Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by Picking Points, or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Roof by Picking Points.

In the catalog, select the roof type you want to insert. Note that the catalog does not contain gable roofs. If you want to create a gable roof, insert a hip roof first, then convert it to a gable. (See Converting a

Hip Roof to a Gable Roof on page 96.) 4.

5.

Select a start point for the roof boundary. Typically you would select an exterior wall corner. Continue selecting points until the boundary is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because the last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.) Right-click and select Finish. 4

3

1

2

Note: If the roof you are inserting will run up against any upper-story walls, the roof cuts around the walls and may adjust to avoid saddle situations. If you do not want the roof to adjust, or you want the roof to ignore the walls, you need to change the roof’s Solution Type before inserting

the roof. See Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created on page 95.

Changing the Way a Lower-story Roof is Created By default, a lower-story roof cuts around upperstory walls and is adjusted to avoid saddle situations where it runs up against upper-story walls. A saddle situation is one where rain or snow runs down the roof slope and collects in areas where the roof meets a wall. If you prefer, you can have the roof cut around walls but not adjust to avoid saddle situations, or you can have the roof ignore the upper-story walls completely. You must change the solution type before inserting the roof — you can’t change it after it’s been inserted. To change the way a lower-story roof is created: 1.

In the catalog, select the roof type you want to insert.

2.

Right-click and select Catalog Manager.

3.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select Catalog > Element Properties.

4.

In the Roofs dialog, click the Solution Type button.

5.

In the Solution Type dialog, click on the solution you want.

6.

Click OK in the Roofs dialog.

7.

Click OK in the Catalog Manager dialog. You can now insert the roof.

User’s Guide

95

13

Chapter 13 Roofs

Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof

5.

Click OK in the Roofs dialog. The roof is converted.

To convert a hip roof to a gable roof, you need to select two hip ends, then select the gable roof type in the roof properties. To convert a hip roof to a gable roof: 1.

Click on the roof edge of one of the ends you want to convert. A blue grab handle appears on the plate line of that hip end. Holding down your Shift button, click on the plate line on the opposite side of the roof.

Roof Edge

Plate Line

Grab Handle

Note: When you create a gable roof, the areas beneath the pitched ends of the roof are filled in with a surface, such as siding. This surface is not an actual element — it is there for appearance only. You can change the appearance of the surface (see Changing the Appearance of Raked Surfaces Under Gable Ends on page 96), or extend your exterior walls to meet the pitched ends of the gable roof (see Extending Walls Beneath Gable Ends on page 97).

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Changing the Appearance of Raked Surfaces Under Gable Ends

3.

In the Roofs dialog, click the Hip button in the Roof Shape area of the Basic page.

If you have created a gable roof, you can change the appearance of the raked surfaces beneath the pitched ends of the roof by editing the material selection for the roof’s Gable End component.

4.

In the Roof Shape dialog, click the Gable graphic.

96

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To change the appearance of raked surfaces under gable ends: 1.

Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Extending Walls Beneath Gable Ends 3.

In the Roofs dialog, select the Appearance tab.

4.

In the Components list, select Gable End.

5.

In the Material area, click the Select button.

6.

In the Materials dialog, select the material you would like to use, then click OK.

7.

Click OK in the Roofs dialog.

Extending Walls Beneath Gable Ends When you create a gable roof, a false surface such as siding is created beneath the pitched ends of the gable roof. You can get rid of this false surface by raking your exterior walls so that they extend to the roof’s pitch.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Behavior tab.

4.

To rake the external side of the wall, check the Exterior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you want to offset the wall a specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface edit box.

5.

To rake the internal side of the wall, check the Interior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you want to offset the wall a specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface edit box.

6.

Click OK. The walls are adjusted.

Creating a Porch Roof A typical porch roof is a simple roof having only one slope. Also known as a shed roof or lean-to roof, this type of roof can be attached to a wall face and be completely independent from the main roof. You create a porch roof by inserting a hip roof, then converting three sides to gables. To create a porch roof: 1.

Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by Picking Points, or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Roof by Picking Points.

2.

In the catalog, select a hip roof to insert.

3.

Select four points to define the outline of the roof. It may be easier to draw the roof out in

To extend gable end walls to the roof: 1.

Select the wall beneath the gable end. You can select additional gable end walls using Shift+click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

User’s Guide

97

13

Chapter 13 Roofs space (away from the model), then move it into place later. 1

4

4.

9.

In the Roof Shape dialog, click the Gable graphic.

2

3

Right-click and select Finish.

5.

Click on the roof edge that will be attached to the wall, or that will be the high side of the roof. The roof is selected.

6.

Hold down the Shift key, then click on the plate line at each end of the roof. Blue grab handles appear on each of the three selected sides.

10. Next you need to turn off the surfaces displayed beneath the gable ends of the roof. On the Basic property page, disable the Display Gable check box in the Parameters window.

11. Click OK. Plate line

7.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

8.

In the Roofs dialog, click the Hip button in the Roof Shape area of the Basic page.

12. Deselect the roof by clicking in the drawing area. 13. Click on the front edge (low side) of the roof. 14. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. 15. If you want to change the elevation of the roof at this point, select the Support and Details tab, then edit the value in the Support Height edit box. 16. On the Support and Details page, enable the Raked radio button in the Soffit area. 17. Click OK. 18. Now all that’s left is to move the roof into place. With the roof selected, right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit >

98

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Selecting a Roof for Editing Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag the roof into position. If you need to you can adjust the length and width of the roof by stretching it. Just remember to select the appropriate edge first.

At this point, general editing tools like Move Whole Element and Rotate will affect the roof as a whole, as will editing the roof’s Support Height, Support Type (rafters or trusses), and framing configuration. However, changes to other roof properties, such as the roof type, slope, and overhang distance, affect only the currently selected roof segment (which is marked by the blue handle). You can select additional roof segments by holding down your Shift key and clicking on a segment’s plate line. When you select a segment, it is marked with a blue handle. If you do select multiple segments, changes to roof properties (except for Support Height, Support Type and framing) affect all selected segments.

Stretching a Roof

If you want to insert support columns under the porch roof, see Inserting Columns on page 48.

You can stretch a roof by clicking and dragging one of its edges. Note that if you stretch your exterior wall layout, the roof stretches with it, eliminating the need to stretch the roof separately. To stretch a roof:

Selecting a Roof for Editing A roof can be edited as one unit, or by one or more of its segments. When you click on a roof edge, the entire roof becomes selected. This is indicated by the plate line being highlighted in green. You’ll also notice a small blue grab handle on the green line. This handle indicates the currently selected roof segment. In the figure below, the blue handle on the right side indicates that the user clicked on the right hip end to select the roof.

1.

Click on the roof edge you want to stretch.

2.

Hover your pointer over the blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the roof segment, then release your mouse button.

Moving a Roof

To move an entire roof you need to select all roof segments, then click and drag it to where you want it. You can do this quickly using the Move Whole Element tool. Note that if you move your Green line indicates roof is selected exterior wall layout, the roof will go with it, eliminating the need to move it separately. To move an entire roof:

Blue handle indicates currently selected segment

1.

Click on one of the roof’s edges to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag to move the roof, then release your mouse button. User’s Guide

99

13

Chapter 13 Roofs

Rotating a Roof

button in the Roof Shape area, then select a roof type in the Roof Shape dialog.

You can rotate an entire roof about a selected point using the Rotate tool. To rotate a roof: 1.

Click on one of the roof’s edges to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the roof, then release your mouse button.

4.

Editing a Roof’s Shape and Size You can change a roof’s shape, slope, overhang distance, fascia distance, etc. You can specify different settings for different segments if you want.

Thickness. The combined thickness of all roofing materials, such as shingles and sheathing. Slope Type. The method used to measure the pitch of the roof. Choose from Degrees, ? in 12, 1 in ?, or Percent.

To edit a roof’s shape or size: 1.

Click on the roof edge whose properties you want to edit. You can select additional segments using Shift+click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To edit the general dimensions and geometry of the roof, edit the values on the Basic page. These are described below. Note that a gable roof will have fewer properties.

Slope Value. The pitch of the roof measured using the Slope Type method selected above. Overhang. The distance from the side wall to the fascia. Overhang Drop. The distance measured vertically from the support point to the underside of the fascia. Horiz. Distance. The maximum horizontal distance allowed from the support point the uppermost point of the underside of the rafter. This is a calculated result from the Slope Value and Vert. Distance variables. Vert. Distance. The maximum vertical distance allowed from the support point to the uppermost point of the underside of the rafter. Fascia Distance. The distance from the ground to the top edge of the fascia board. 5.

3.

100

To convert the currently selected segments to a different roof type, click the graphical

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Click OK.

Editing the Height of a Roof

Editing the Height of a Roof

5.

You can raise or lower a roof by editing its Support Height variable.

Support Type. Choose Truss or Rafter. Raised Heel. The portion of the rafter that rests on the wall plate.

To edit the height of a roof: 1.

Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Roofs dialog, select the Support and Details tab.

4.

Edit the value in the Support Height edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Birds Mouth. The notch cut in the lower end of a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall. Seat. The horizontal cut that is made when cutting a bird's mouth in a rafter. Fascia Depth. The thickness of the fascia board. Plumb. The ends of the rafters are cut vertically resulting in a 90º fascia board.

Editing a Roof’s Frame Details

Raked. the ends of the rafters have an angled cut.

You can choose to frame with rafters or trusses. You can also select the members you want to use and edit the precise dimensions of your roof’s framing configuration.

Soffit Plumb. Creates a flat soffit that is parallel with the ground.

To edit a roof’s framing details: 1.

Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To select a member type for your rafters or trusses, click the Specify Framing button on the Basic page. In the Roof Framing dialog, click Select to select a member from the catalog, then specify the spacing between the members in the Member Spacing edit box. Click OK.

Edit the parameters as desired. They are described below.

Raked. Creates a soffit that is angled to match the roof slope. Gable Type. Choose either Plain, Squared, Full Hip or Half Hip for the gable return. Horizontal. The horizontal distance of the return when looking at the gable end face on. Depth. The depth of the return. 6.

Once you have set your properties, click OK.

Applying a Different Roofing Material You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different shingles or tiles to a roof. To apply a different material to a roof:

4.

1.

Display your model in 3D view and make sure the roof is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

In the Roofs dialog, select the Support and Details tab. User’s Guide

101

13

Chapter 13 Roofs 3.

4.

5.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You can find a wide selection of shingles and tiles in the Roofing category. Click anywhere on the roof surface. The material is immediately applied to the entire roof. Right-click and select Finish.

Cutting an Opening in a Roof Once you have created a roof, you can create a custom opening in it of virtually any shape and size using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its outline. To insert an opening in a roof: 1.

Select the roof by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.

3.

Select a start point for the opening.

4.

Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to select the start point again.

5.

When you have selected your final point, right-click and select Finish.

2.

Press the Shift key and click on each of the roof opening edges.

3.

Hover your pointer over one of the opening’s grab handles to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag the opening off the roof surface, then release your mouse button.

Deleting a Roof You can delete a roof in a couple of easy steps. To delete a roof: 1.

Click on one of the roof’s edges to select the roof.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting Dormers A dormer is a small structure that projects from a roof slope. Dormers are often used to extend the usable floor area of a second story that is under a moderate to steeply pitched roof. They can be quite effective in opening up cramped rooms under the roof. A typical dormer consists of a roof and three walls. One of the most common dormer types is the gable dormer, characterized by the front gable in the roof.

Removing Roof Openings You can remove an opening from a roof by dragging it off the roof surface. Note: You cannot use Delete to remove a roof opening. To remove a roof opening: 1.

102

Select the roof by clicking on one of its edges.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

You can also create a dormer without walls. In this case the dormer roof sits on top of the main roof. Its purpose is usually to add character to an otherwise plain roof or to make your roof design more complex. For example, you can insert a dormer roof on your main roof and stretch it to create a porch roof or gable extension.

Moving a Dormer Roof Dormers are easy to insert - just point and click. You can control the dormer’s width, roof type, wall type, and wall height. To create a dormer: 1.

In the building locations drop box, select the location containing the roof you want to add the dormer to.

2.

Select Insert > Roofs > Dormer Roof, or click the Roofs button on the Building toolbar and select Dormer Roof.

3.

In the Dormers dialog, specify the desired width for the dormer in the Dormer Width edit box.

4.

Click the Dormer Roof button, then select the desired roof type for the dormer. By default, the roof will have a gable front, regardless of the roof type. If you do not want it to have a gable front, uncheck the Gable Front check box.

5.

If you want your dormer to have walls, check the Include Walls check box. Then, click the Dormer Wall button and select the desired wall type from the catalog. If you do not want your dormer to have walls, disable the Include Walls check box.

6.

In the Support height above main roof edit box, type the height of the dormer’s front wall, not including the raked portion between the two roof slopes. You can use this

option even if you are not inserting walls to control the position of the bottom of the dormer roof. Note that dormer walls extend only to the roof surface. 7.

Click OK. The dormer’s wall footprint is attached to your cursor.

8.

Position the dormer where you want it, then click to insert it. In most cases you would place the front dormer wall directly on top of the exterior wall.

9.

Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If you can’t seem to insert the dormer, it means that the dormer is too large for the surface you are inserting it on. You may want to try decreasing the wall height before inserting it.

Moving a Dormer Roof You can use the Move Whole Element tool to move a dormer roof to another spot on your roof. To move a dormer roof: 1.

Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select it.

User’s Guide

103

13

Chapter 13 Roofs 2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Element > Move Whole Element.

3.

Click anywhere on the screen, then drag to move the dormer roof.

4.

When the dormer roof is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Inserting Skylights You can insert a skylight in your roof with pointand-click simplicity. The catalog contains a long list of skylights in a variety of sizes. To insert a skylight: 1.

Select Insert > Skylights, or click the Skylights button on the Building toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the skylight you want to insert.

Stretching a Dormer Roof

3.

Position the skylight on the roof.

You can stretch the front or sides a dormer roof by clicking and dragging the appropriate roof edge.

4.

Click to insert the skylight.

To stretch a dormer roof:

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If the dormer has walls, you need to move the walls separately. To move the dormer walls, click on one wall, Shift+click to select the remaining walls, right-click and select Move, then click and drag the walls into place.

1.

Click on the roof edge you want to stretch. A blue grab handle appears on the footprint line of the selected roof edge.

2.

Position your pointer over the grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the roof, then release your mouse button.

Moving a Skylight You can move a skylight by clicking and dragging it. To move a skylight: 1.

Click on the skylight to select it.

Note: If your dormer has walls, the dormer roof will not adjust if you stretch the dormer walls.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

Deleting a Dormer

3.

Click and drag the skylight to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

You can delete a dormer roof in a couple of easy steps. If the dormer has walls, they need to be deleted separately.

Rotating a Skylight You can rotate a skylight using the Rotate tool.

To delete a dormer: 1.

Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Element > Delete.

3.

If the dormer has walls, select one of the walls, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls. Use the Delete tool to delete the selected walls.

104

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To rotate a skylight: 1.

Click on the skylight to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the skylight, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Properties of a Skylight

Editing the Properties of a Skylight

Deleting a Skylight

Skylight properties include height and width, as well as dimensions for the frame and sash.

You can delete a skylight in a couple of easy steps. To delete a skylight:

To edit the properties of a skylight:

1.

Select the skylight.

1.

Click on the skylight to select it.

2.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

3.

Edit the properties in the Properties window. Height. The overall height of the skylight window opening. Width. The overall width of the skylight window opening. Frame Depth. The depth of the window frame. Frame Width. The thickness of the window frame. Sash Offset. The distance the sash sits back in the window frame. The sash is the frame that holds the glass. Sash Depth. The thickness of the sash in plan view. Sash Width. The width of the sash in elevation.

4.

Once you’ve set your properties, click OK.

User’s Guide

105

13

Part 4

Designing the Interior Kitchen Builder Wizard

page 109

Cabinets

page 113

Appliances

page 117

Furniture, Electronics & Accessories

page 121

Chapter

Kitchen Builder Wizard The structural elements of your home are built — now it’s time to start designing the interior. One of the best places to start is the kitchen, since it is generally the room that’s used the most in a house. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s Kitchen Builder Wizard creates a kitchen for you in a few easy steps. All you have to do is select the general shape and layout you want. Then, just point and click to insert all of your cupboards and appliances in one shot. It couldn’t be easier! Once you’ve inserted the kitchen you can move things around and edit individual elements to create a look that’s customized to your taste and needs.

109

Chapter 14 Kitchen Builder Wizard

Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard Using the Kitchen Builder Wizard you can quickly create a kitchen layout that includes upper and lower cabinets, a sink, refrigerator and stove. There are a number of layouts and styles to choose from.

3.

Click on the general style of kitchen you want — L-Shape, Galley or U-Shape.

4.

Click Next.

5.

Select the layout that most closely resembles the layout you want. Remember that you can move and edit things later.

6.

Click Next.

7.

Select a general style for your kitchen. The selection you make mainly determines the materials and colors used for the cupboards and countertops.

To create a kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard: 1.

2.

110

Select Tools > Design Wizards > Kitchen Builder.

Click Next.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard 8.

Click Next.

are displayed to show you the size of the layout. 13. If you want you can stretch the layout by simply moving your pointer in the direction you want to stretch. 14. Once the dimensions are correct, click to finish the insertion.

15. Click Yes to finish the task. If you click No you can reposition and reinsert the kitchen.

9.

Select the desired rotation for the kitchen layout by clicking the appropriate graphic. This is how it will be attached to your cursor prior to insertion.

Tip: You can create your own custom configuration that can saved for use in any project. See Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder Wizard Configuration on page 376.

10. Click Next.

11. Click Finish. The kitchen configuration is attached to your cursor. 12. Position the kitchen layout in your kitchen area. It will automatically snap to the walls when you get close to them. Click to anchor the kitchen elements. Dynamic dimensions

User’s Guide

111

14

Chapter

Cabinets Cabinets are essential for storage and can also contribute to the overall look and feel of a room. The catalog contains a huge selection of cabinet types, styles and sizes, all customizable to suit your taste and needs. Cabinet types include base cabinets, corner cabinets, upper cabinets, islands, pantry cabinets and bathroom vanities. You can insert cabinets in any room in your house with just a click of your mouse. Cabinets are designed to snap to walls and other cabinets, making insertion even easier.

Cabinets

113

Chapter 15 Cabinets

Inserting Cabinets You can insert a wide variety of cabinets in your design by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. Cabinets automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them provided Collision Control is turned on. To insert a cabinet:

3.

Click and drag to rotate the cabinet.

4.

When the cabinet is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering a Cabinet You can raise or lower a cabinet using the Elevate tool on the cabinet’s right-click menu.

Select Insert > Interiors > Cabinets, or click the Cabinets button on the Interiors toolbar.

To edit a cabinet’s elevation: 1.

Select the cabinet whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

In the catalog, select the cabinet you want to insert.

2.

3.

Position the cabinet where you want it, then click to insert it.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the cabinet.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the cabinet above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

1.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Cabinets You can move individual or multiple cabinets by clicking and dragging them. To move cabinets:

Tip: You can also change a cabinet’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the cabinet’s Behavior property page.

Editing Cabinet Properties Cabinet properties include cabinet type, size, and leaf style, as well as settings for the counter, shelves, toe space and hardware.

1.

Select the cabinet you want to move. If you want to move multiple cabinets, use Shift+click to select the additional cabinets.

2.

Hover your pointer over the cabinet’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

To edit cabinet properties: 1.

3.

Select the cabinet whose properties you want to edit.

Click and drag to move the cabinet.

4.

2.

When the cabinet is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To change the cabinet type or dimensions, select the Basic tab. Cabinet types include Base, Upper and Pantry. Cabinet styles and size properties will vary depending on the cabinet type selected. Use the graphics as guides when determining the cabinet’s properties. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.)

Rotating Cabinets You can rotate cabinets by clicking and dragging them. To rotate a cabinet: 1.

Select the cabinet you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

114

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing Cabinet Properties highlights the corresponding dimension in the cabinet graphic, and vice versa.

4.

To change the cabinet’s leaf style, select the Leaf tab.

5.

To edit the counter, shelving, toe space or hardware details, select the Details tab.

Show Counter. Displays a counter on the cabinet. Thickness. The thickness of the counter material. Show Backsplash. Displays a backsplash on the cabinet. The backsplash is a vertical surface designed to protect the wall behind a countertop. Thickness. The thickness of the backsplash material. Height. The distance from the countertop to the top of the backsplash. Show Nosing. Displays nosing (moulded projection) on the front edge of the counter. Thickness. The depth of the nosing. Height. The height of the nosing.

To select a leaf style for the door, select Door from the Apply to drop box, then make your selections. To select a leaf style for the drawers, if applicable, select Drawer from the Apply to drop box. Leaf properties vary depending on the leaf style selected. Use the graphics as guides when setting these properties.

Radius. The radius of the curve. Show Shelves. Displays shelves inside the cabinet. The shelves would be visible if the cabinet door is glass. Number of Shelves. The number of shelves you would like to display inside the cabinet. Show Toe Space. Causes the bottom of the cabinet to recess so you can stand close to the cabinet without contacting it with their toes. Toe Depth. The depth of the recess. User’s Guide

115

15

Chapter 15 Cabinets Toe Height. The height of the recess. Show Handle. Displays handles on the cabinet door and drawers, if present. Handle Style. Choose from Box, Circle or Cylinder. A box style creates a rectangular handle. A circle style creates a round knob. The cylinder style creates a cylindrical handle. Distance a. For pantry cabinets, this is the distance from the bottom of the upper cabinet portion to the top of the door handle. Distance b. The distance from the bottom of the cabinet to the top of the door handle. 6.

You can insert a kitchen or bathroom sink into a cabinet that you have inserted in your drawing by simply pointing and clicking. The sink automatically snaps itself into place at the center of the cabinet top. To insert a sink into a cabinet: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures, or click the Plumbing Fixtures button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the Sinks category, then select the sink you want to insert.

3.

Position the fixture inside the cabinet, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

When you’re finished editing properties, click OK.

Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different finish to a cabinet, such as a different type of wood, or another type of material altogether. To apply a different finish to a cabinet: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the cabinet is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the cabinet component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the cabinet (frame, door, counter, handles, etc.).

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

116

Inserting a Sink into a Cabinet

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Deleting a Cabinet You can delete a cabinet in a couple of easy steps. To delete a cabinet: 1.

Select the cabinet.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Chapter

Appliances Most home plans usually show the location of appliances in the kitchen and laundry room. Inserting appliances in your project can obviously enhance the design of a room, and can also help identify where electrical outlets are needed. The 3D Home Architect® Design Suite catalog offers an excellent selection of kitchen and laundry appliances, including refrigerators, dishwashers, ovens, ranges, washers, dryers — even toasters. And of course, just like everything else, you can customize appliances to create the exact look you want. Inserting appliances is easy — just point and click. Most major appliances are set to snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them.

Appliances

117

Chapter 16 Appliances

Inserting Appliances

Rotating Appliances

You can insert a wide variety of kitchen and laundry appliances in your design by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. Appliances automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them provided Collision Control is turned on.

You can rotate appliances by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an appliance: 1.

Select the appliance you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the appliance.

4.

When the appliance is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

To insert an appliance: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Appliances, or click the Appliances button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the appliance you want to insert.

3.

Position the appliance where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If you are inserting a built-in oven, just position it where you want it in the wall and it will snap into place correctly with only the oven door and controls protruding from the wall.

Raising or Lowering an Appliance You can raise or lower an appliance using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. For example, you might want to place a microwave on the kitchen counter. To raise or lower an appliance: 1.

Select the appliance whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the appliance.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the appliance above the floor.

To move an appliance:

4.

Click OK.

1.

Select the appliance you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the appliance’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

Tip: You can also change an appliance’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the appliance’s Behavior property page.

3.

Click and drag to move the appliance.

Editing Appliance Size Properties

4.

When the appliance is where you want it, release your mouse button.

You can edit the height, width and depth of most appliances. Some appliances have additional properties that define their size and style.

Moving Appliances You can move individual appliances by clicking and dragging them.

To edit appliance properties: 1.

118

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Select the appliance whose properties you want to edit.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to Appliances 2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To change the size or style of the appliance, select the Basic tab. Appliance styles and size properties will vary depending on the appliance. Use the graphics as guides when determining the appliance’s properties. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the appliance graphic, and vice versa.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or finish you want to apply. You can find an assortment of colors in the Paint category. For the stainless steel look you may want to try the Silver material in the Finishes category.

4.

Click on the appliance component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the appliance. For example, you can select a different color just for a knob or handle.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Appliance You can delete an appliance in a couple of easy steps. To delete an appliance:

4.

Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

1.

Select the appliance.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to Appliances You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly change the color or finish of an appliance. To apply a color or finish to an appliance: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the appliance is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

User’s Guide

119

16

Chapter

Furniture, Electronics & Accessories Once you’ve got your cabinets and appliances in place, you can jump right into the fun stuff — furnishing and decorating your home. The catalog contains so many different types of furniture, electronics and decorative accessories, the possibilities are endless. And with easy, point-andclick insertion, you can play around with different design ideas and quickly decorate every room of your home, just the way you want it.

Electronics

Furniture

Accessories

121

Chapter 17 Furniture, Electronics & Accessories

Inserting Furniture The catalog contains a variety of furnishings for every room in your home — everything from beds to CD stands. Furnishings automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them provided Collision Control is turned on.

2.

3.

4.

To insert accessories: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Accessories, or click the Accessories button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

Select Insert > Interiors > Furniture, or click the Furniture button on the Interiors toolbar.

In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.

3.

In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert furniture: 1.

medicine cabinets, plates, bowls, cups, mirrors and pictures.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Furnishing Elements You can move furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them.

Inserting Electronics

To move an element:

Electronics include televisions, computers, clocks and telephones.

1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the cabinet’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

To insert electronics: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Electronics, or click the Electronics button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Accessories Accessories are those small, personal touches that really pull a room together. They are things like curtains, blinds, towel racks, shower curtains,

122

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Rotating Furnishing Elements You can rotate furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an element: 1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering a Furnishing Element

Raising or Lowering a Furnishing Element

3.

To change the dimensions of the element, select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary depending on the element.

4.

Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

You can raise or lower furniture, electronics and accessories using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. For example, you might want to adjust the height of a picture on the wall. To edit the elevation of a furnishing element: 1.

Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change a furnishing element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements You can edit the height, width and depth of most furnishing elements. Some elements have additional properties that define their size and style. To edit the size of furnishing elements: 1.

Select the element whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a color, fabric or finish to any furnishing element. To apply a material to a furnishing element: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the furnishing element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

User’s Guide

123

17

Chapter 17 Furniture, Electronics & Accessories 3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. You can find an assortment of colors in the Paint category.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the element. For example, you can apply a specific fabric to the bedspread on a bed.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Furnishing Elements You can delete furniture, electronics or accessories in a couple of easy steps. To delete a furnishing element: 1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

124

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Part 5

Utilities Interior Lighting

page 127

Electrical

page 133

Plumbing

page 139

Heating & Ventilation

page 143

Chapter

Interior Lighting Interior lighting can drastically change the look and atmosphere of a room. They also play an important part when you create interior 3DTrueView™ renderings. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite provides an excellent selection of ceiling lights, wall lights, track lights, recessed lights and lamps for you to insert. You can even turn them on and off! Lights are inserted at a logical height in your plan depending on their type, making accurate placement easy. Also, ceiling lights snap to ceilings, and wall lights snap to walls. Just point and click!

Lighting

127

Chapter 18 Interior Lighting

Inserting Interior Light Fixtures

To change the way a light snaps on insertion:

3D Home Architect® Design Suite offers a good selection of lighting fixtures for the interior of your home. Interior light fixtures include ceiling lights, wall lights, track lighting, recessed lights, and lamps.

1.

In the catalog, select the light fixture whose snap setting you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Catalog Manager. You can also access the Catalog Manager by selecting File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager.

3.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, make sure the correct fixture is selected, then select Catalog > Element Properties.

4.

In the Lights dialog, select the Behavior tab.

5.

From the Snap Light to drop box, select either Ceiling, Wall or None.

6.

Click OK in the Lights dialog.

7.

Click OK.

Each lighting fixture has a light source in its property definition, such as an incandescent light bulb. Lights are particularly important if you plan to create a 3DTrueView of your model, since the program uses light to calculate and create the rendered view. With the exception of lamps, light fixtures are set to snap to either ceilings or walls depending on what kind of fixture they are. Note: If you want to insert exterior light fixtures, use the Landscape Lighting tool. To insert a light fixture: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Lighting, or click the Lighting button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the light fixture you want to insert.

3.

Position the light where you want it, then click to insert it. If you want the light to snap to a ceiling or wall and it isn’t, or you want to stop the light from snapping, see Changing the Way a Light Snaps on Insertion below.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Changing the Way a Light Snaps on Insertion By default, ceiling lights are set to snap to ceilings, and wall lights are set to snap to walls. Lamps have no snap setting so that you can place them anywhere in a room. You can change a light fixture’s snap setting on the fixture’s Behavior property page.

128

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture You can raise or lower a light fixture using the Elevate tool on the fixture’s right-click menu. To raise or lower a light fixture: 1.

Select the fixture whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the light fixture.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the fixture above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change a light fixture’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the fixture’s Behavior property page.

Moving Light Fixtures You can move light fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To move a light fixture: 1.

Select the light fixture you want to move.

Rotating Light Fixtures 2.

Hover your pointer over the fixture’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the light fixture.

4.

When the light fixture is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Light Fixtures You can rotate light fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To rotate a light fixture:

3.

Select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary depending on the type of fixture. Use the diagram as a guide when determining the fixture’s properties. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the light fixture diagram, and vice versa.

4.

Click OK.

Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source A light source is usually a type of light bulb. You can edit a light fixture’s light source to achieve a different lighting effect.

1.

Select the light fixture you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the light fixture.

1.

4.

When the light fixture is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Select the light fixture whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Editing the Size of Light Fixtures

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Lights tab.

4.

To replace the currently selected light source with another type, click Edit, then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog. To add a light source to the fixture, click Add,

To edit a light fixture’s light source:

You can edit the dimensions of a light fixture on its Basic property page. To edit the size of a light fixture: 1.

Select the light fixture whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

User’s Guide

129

18

Chapter 18 Interior Lighting then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog.

Turning a Light On or Off By default, lights are on when you insert them. You can virtually turn a light off by disabling its light source. To turn a light on or off: 1.

Select the light fixture you want to turn on or off.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Lights tab.

eye icon

5.

To delete a light source from the light fixture, click Delete.

6.

To edit the position of the light source in relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y and Z coordinates in the Light Position area. Coordinates are measured from the bottom center of the fixture. The small red box in the preview window indicates the current position of the light source. Changing the X value moves the light source left or right. Selecting Middle positions the light in the center of the fixture, and selecting Minimum or Maximum positions it on the left or right side. If you select Custom you can enter a specific value in the adjacent edit box which is relative to the center position. For example, entering -3 moves the light source 3” left from the center. Changing the Y value moves the light source forward or backward. Selecting Minimum brings the light source all the way forward, and selecting Maximum moves it to the back of the fixture. Changing the Z value moves the light source up or down. Selecting Minimum positions the light source at the bottom of the fixture, while selecting Maximum positions it at the top of the fixture.

7.

130

Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

4.

To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon next to the light source name.

5.

Click OK.

Changing the Look of a Light Fixture You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to different parts of a light fixture. For example, you may want to change the color of a lamp shade. To change the look of a light fixture: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the light fixture is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

Deleting Light Fixtures 3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the light fixture.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Light Fixtures You can delete a light fixture in a couple of easy steps. To delete a light fixture: 1.

Select the fixture.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

131

18

Chapter

Electrical 3D Home Architect® Design Suite makes it easy to insert electrical outlets, switches, thermostats and smoke detectors in your plan — just point and click. Electrical elements automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height depending on their type, making it easy to place them accurately. Once you’ve inserted electrical elements you may want to draw wiring in your 2D plan. All it takes is a few clicks of the mouse.

133

Chapter 19 Electrical

Inserting Outlets and Switches You can insert electrical outlets and light switches in your plan with a single mouse click. The backs of these elements automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height on the wall, making accurate placement effortless. You can move, raise and lower these elements after you have inserted them.

button on the Interiors toolbar and select Electrical Elements.

2.

In the catalog, select the Sensors category, then select the element you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert outlets and switches: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical > Electrical Elements, or click the Electrical button on the Interiors toolbar and select Electrical Elements.

Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element 2.

In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.

You can raise or lower an outlet, switch, thermostat or smoke detector using the Elevate tool.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

To raise or lower an electrical element:

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Thermostats and Smoke Detectors To insert a thermostat or smoke detector, all you need to do is point and click. Thermostats are set to automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a default height of 5’. Smoke detectors insert a default height of 8’. You can move, raise or lower thermostats and smoke detectors after you have inserted them. To insert thermostats and smoke detectors: 1.

134

Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical > Electrical Elements, or click the Electrical

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change an element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Moving an Electrical Element

Moving an Electrical Element You can move outlets, switches, thermostats and smoke detectors in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them. To move an element: 1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Applying a Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different color or material to an electrical element. To apply a color or material to an electrical element: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the electrical element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. You can find an assortment of colors in the Paint category.

4.

Click on the electrical element. The color or material is applied immediately.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Editing the Size of an Electrical Element You can edit the height, width and depth of most electrical elements. Some elements have additional dimensions for individual components in the element. To edit the size of an electrical element: 1.

Select the element whose size you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Deleting Electrical Elements You can delete an outlet, switch, thermostat or smoke detector in a couple of easy steps. To delete an electrical element:

3.

Edit the properties as desired.

4.

Click OK.

1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

135

19

Chapter 19 Electrical

Inserting Wiring Once you’ve inserted electrical elements, you can use the Wiring tool to indicate the location of electrical wiring in your 2D plan. By default, wiring lines have arched segments and use a dashed linestyle. You can stretch and reshape individual segments after you’ve inserted the line. You can also edit the linestyle. Wiring is only visible in 2D plan view.

2.

Hover your pointer over the grab handle you want to grab and stretch.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the line, then release your mouse button.

To add electrical wiring: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical > Wiring, or click the Electrical button on the Interiors toolbar and select Wiring.

2.

Select a start point for the wiring line.

3.

Select the next point for the wiring line. An arched line segment is created between the two points.

1

2

3

4.

Continue selecting points to add more segments.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Changing the Line Style of Wiring By default, electrical wiring is displayed using the Electrical Power Distribution line style, which is a brown, dashed line. You can select a different line style for selected wiring segments if you want. For example, you may want to select the Telephone line style for your telephone lines. 4

To change the line style of wiring: 1.

Select one of the line segments you want to change. Use Shift+click to select the remaining segments in the line.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Line Styles dialog, select the line style you want to use.

Note: You can change the line style of individual wires if you want. See Changing the Line Style of Wiring on page 136. You can also mark your wiring lines with text. See Adding Text to Your Drawing on page 274.

Stretching and Reshaping Wiring Segments You can stretch individual segments in a wiring line by clicking and dragging their grab handles. Stretching wiring segments can change their length or shape. To stretch a wiring segment: 1.

136

Select the segment you want to stretch. Grab handles are displayed along the segment.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Deleting Wiring If you want to edit a line style, click one of the swatches to access the Edit Line Styles dialog. To add a new line style to the list, select Linestyle > Add Linestyle. For more information, see the Line Styles chapter page 355. 4.

Click OK. The line style is updated in your drawing.

Deleting Wiring You can delete individual wiring segments or an entire wire in a couple of easy steps. To delete wiring: 1.

Select the wiring segment you want to delete. To select an entire wire, drag a selection window around it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

137

19

Chapter

Plumbing 3D Home Architect® Design Suite offers a complete selection of sinks, faucets, tubs, showers, toilets and bidets to help you properly equip your home. Plumbing fixtures are inserted with a single mouse click and will automatically snap to walls if Collision Control is turned on. You can control which edge of a fixture snaps to the wall, as well as edit the fixture’s size, style and elevation.

Plumbing

139

Chapter 20 Plumbing

Inserting Plumbing Fixtures

4.

Placing plumbing fixtures in your plan is easy — just select what you want to insert, then point and click. With Collision Control turned on, fixtures will automatically snap to walls when you get close to them. Also, fixtures will insert at a logical height. For example, a toilet will insert on the floor, while a sink may insert 3’ off the floor. You can edit a fixture’s size and elevation, as well as move and rotate it.

Tip: You can also change a plumbing fixture’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the fixture’s Behavior property page.

Note: The first four sinks in the Sinks category (kitchen and bathroom sinks) can only be inserted into a cabinet. Also, the cabinet must be large enough to house the sink.

To move a plumbing fixture:

Moving Plumbing Fixtures You can move plumbing fixtures by clicking and dragging them.

1.

Select the plumbing fixture you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the fixture’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the fixture.

4.

When the fixture is where you want it, release your mouse button.

To insert plumbing fixtures: 1.

2.

3.

4.

Select Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures, or click the Plumbing Fixtures button on the Interiors toolbar. In the catalog, select the fixture you want to insert. Position the fixture where you want it, then click to insert it. Right-click and select Finish.

Raising or Lowering a Plumbing Fixture You can raise or lower a plumbing fixture using the Elevate tool on the fixture’s right-click menu. To edit a plumbing fixture’s elevation: 1.

Select the fixture whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element.

3.

140

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the fixture above the floor. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Click OK.

Rotating Plumbing Fixtures You can rotate plumbing fixtures by clicking and dragging them. To rotate a plumbing fixture: 1.

Select the fixture you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the fixture.

4.

When the fixture is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of a Plumbing Fixture You can edit the height, width and depth of a plumbing fixture. To edit the properties of a plumbing fixture: 1.

Select the plumbing fixture whose properties you want to edit.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to Plumbing Fixtures 2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or finish you want to apply. You can find an assortment of colors in the Paint category.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the plumbing fixture. For example, you can select a different color just for a tap or handle.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Plumbing Fixtures 3.

Edit the properties as desired.

4.

Click OK.

You can delete a plumbing fixture in a couple of easy steps.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to Plumbing Fixtures

To delete a plumbing fixture: 1.

Select the fixture.

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or finishes to different parts of a plumbing fixture.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

To apply a color or finish to a plumbing fixture: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the fixture is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

User’s Guide

141

20

Chapter

Heating & Ventilation The correct placement of heating and ventilation elements is an important part of the home design process. Laying out HVAC elements in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite is quick and easy just point and click. The catalog contains just about anything you’d need — furnaces, fireplaces, wood stoves, chimneys, water heaters, floor registers and cold air returns. Of course, just like anything else, you can move, rotate and edit these elements if you change your mind.

HVAC

143

Chapter 21 Heating & Ventilation

Inserting Heating Elements

2.

You can insert heating elements with a click of your mouse. Heating elements include fireplaces, wood stoves, furnaces and water heaters. By default, heating elements are inserted on the floor and will snap to walls if Collision Control is turned on.

In the catalog, select the Ventilation category, then select the element you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert a heating element: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the HVAC Elements button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the Heating category, then select the element you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Floor Registers and Cold Air Returns Registers and air returns come in a variety of sizes, but you can create a different size if you need to. Wall air returns will insert directly onto walls. You can change the height of them later if you want.

Inserting a Chimney Chimneys by default are 12’ tall, but you can change this before or after you insert the chimney to create the correct height needed for your house. By default, the chimney in the catalog has a brick base and concrete cap. You can edit the appearance of the chimney to match the exterior of your home if you are inserting the chimney on the outside. To insert a chimney: 1.

Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the HVAC Elements button on the Interiors toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the Ventilation category, then select the Chimney element.

3.

Position the chimney where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

To insert a ventilation element: 1.

144

Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click the HVAC Elements button on the Interiors toolbar.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To edit the height of the chimney: 1.

Select the chimney.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, change the value in the Base Height edit box.

4.

Click OK.

Moving HVAC Elements To apply different materials to the chimney: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the chimney is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

4.

5.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. You can apply different materials to the base, cap and flue. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Moving HVAC Elements You can move HVAC elements by clicking and dragging them. To move an HVAC element: 1.

Select the HVAC element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering an HVAC Element You can raise or lower an HVAC element using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. To edit an HVAC element’s elevation: 1.

Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.

4.

Click OK.

Tip: You can also change an HVAC element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of an HVAC Element You can edit the dimensions of an HVAC element. The more complex an element is, the more variables it will have. A chimney, for example, has separate variables for the base, cap and flue, so you can create the exact look and size you want. To edit the size of an HVAC element:

Rotating HVAC Elements

1.

You can rotate HVAC elements by clicking and dragging them.

Select the HVAC element whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To rotate an HVAC element:

3.

Edit the properties as desired.

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

4.

Click OK.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

Deleting HVAC Elements

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

You can delete an HVAC element in a couple of easy steps.

User’s Guide

145

21

Chapter 21 Heating & Ventilation To delete an HVAC element: 1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

146

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Part 6

Terrain Modeling Terrain Modeling

page 149

Property Lines

page 157

147

Chapter

Terrain Modeling 3D Home Architect® Design Suite goes well beyond home design by letting you recreate the topography of the lot your home will be built on. By default, a basic 150’ x 150’ grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area. In 2D view, only the boundary of the terrain is shown (you may need to zoom out to see it). Contour lines may also be visible depending on the terrain’s defined properties. In 3D view, the terrain is displayed as a solid, 3D object. It can be viewed in wireframe, hidden line or rendered form. You add hills, berms, plateaus and slopes to your terrain to create an incredibly realistic-looking building site.

149

Chapter 22 Terrain Modeling

Defining the Basic Terrain You can control the base level, size (length and width), mesh spacing, and contour interval of the terrain. You can also select a texture to use when displaying the terrain in rendered view (the default is grass). You can specify whether or not you want the terrain to cut around your building, and select the location that you want the terrain to cut around.

desired value in the Grid Mesh Spacing edit box. 7.

To change the texture used for the terrain, click the Select button in the Material area, then make your selection in the Materials dialog.

8.

To display contours on your terrain, enable the Show contours check box. In the Start edit box, enter the elevation of the first contour. In the Interval check box, enter the desired spacing between contours.

9.

Click OK.

To define the terrain: 1.

Select Settings > Terrain Settings, or click the Terrain Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

Creating Hills and Valleys You can add hills to your terrain with a single mouse click. You can control the height of a hill as well as its peak shape. Generally, the diameter of the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can insert multiple hills together to create one larger hill. Also, if you insert hills next to other terrain elements, like plateaus or slopes, the elements will automatically blend together.

2.

In the Terrain Settings dialog, set your terrain options:

3.

To force the terrain to cut around a building, enable the Auto-cut terrain around building check box, then select the building location that you want the terrain to cut around from the Select Building Location to cut around drop box.

4.

To change the level at which the base of the terrain sits, type the desired value in the Terrain Base Level edit box. This value is measured from 0.

5.

To change the overall size of the terrain, enter the desired values in the Length and Width edit boxes.

6.

To change the spacing between mesh lines (when viewing the terrain in Wireframe, Hidden Line or Patterned view), enter the

150

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Creating Berms and Trenches To create a hill or valley: 1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Hills / Valleys, or click the Hills/Valleys button on the Terrain toolbar.

Creating Berms and Trenches A berm is a mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used for noise control. On a reduced scale, a natural berm can provide some interesting benefits in a backyard landscape. These include: Climate control. Berms act as windbreaks, channeling air flow. Berms can create a warmer microclimate or direct cooling breezes. Privacy. A berm can be a "friendly fence" in the back yard or between your house and a sidewalk.

2.

In the Hills / Valleys dialog, specify the height of the hill in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value will create a valley.

3.

Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak shape for the hill.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Click to insert the hill. You can insert multiple hills if you like.

6.

Right-click and select Finish.

To move a hill/valley: 1.

Click in the center of the hill to select it.

2.

Click and drag the center grab handle to move the hill, then release your mouse button.

Vertical interest. You can add variety and texture to your gardens with berms, change the view from your outdoor sitting areas, or even hide eyesores with them. Noise control. A berm can cut down on traffic noise if you live on a busy street or near a schoolyard. Berms may be shored with stone, bricks, or timbers, and planted with groundcovers, perennials, annuals, trees, etc. You can control the height of a berm as well as its peak shape.

To edit the height or peak shape of a hill: 1.

Click in the center of the hill to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties in the Hills/Valleys dialog.

4.

Click OK.

To remove a hill/valley: 1.

Click in the center of the hill to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

151

22

Chapter 22 Terrain Modeling To create a berm/trench:

To move a berm/trench:

1.

1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it. A blue grab handle is displayed in the middle of the berm’s central line.

2.

Click and drag the central blue grab handle to move the berm, then release your mouse button.

Select Insert > Terrain > Berms/ Trenches, or click the Berms/ Trenches button on the Terrain toolbar.

To rotate a berm/trench:

2.

In the Berms/Trenches dialog, specify the height of the berm in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value creates a trench.

1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it. Grab handles are displayed along the berm’s central line.

2.

Click and drag a grab handle to rotate the berm around the selected point.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak shape for the berm.

To edit the height or peak shape of a berm: 1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

4.

Click OK.

2.

5.

Select two points to define the length of the top of the berm. The berm will be created downward and outward from this line.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties in the Berms/Trenches dialog.

4.

Click OK.

3.

To delete a berm/trench: 1

2

1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating Plateaus 6.

Right-click and select Finish.

To stretch a berm/trench: 1.

Click in the center of the berm to select it.

2.

Grab handles are displayed at either end of the berm’s central line.

3.

Click and drag an end grab handle to stretch the berm, then release your mouse button. You can move the end point to any position on the screen.

152

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

A plateau is a relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Adding a plateau to your terrain involves clicking a few points to define the shape of the plateau. You can control the height of the plateau as well as its peak shape. Note that if you insert a plateau in close proximity to other terrain elements, such as hills, the elements automatically blend together.

Creating Slopes To create a plateau:

To reshape a plateau:

1.

1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Corner grab handles are displayed on the central outline of the plateau.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the shape, then release your mouse button.

Select Insert > Terrain > Plateaus, or click the Plateaus button on the Terrain toolbar.

To move a plateau: 1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag to move the plateau, then release your mouse button.

2.

In the Plateaus dialog, specify the height of the plateau in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value creates an excavated area.

3.

3.

Using the Zenith slider control, select a general shape for the plateau. The pointier the shape, the steeper the sides will be.

To edit the height or peak shape of a plateau:

4.

Click OK.

5.

In the drawing area, select points to define the outline of the top of the plateau. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. The plateau will be created downward and outward from your outline.

1

2

1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties in the Plateaus dialog.

4.

Click OK.

To delete a plateau: 1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating Slopes 4

6.

3

Right-click and select Finish.

To stretch a plateau: 1.

Click in the center of the plateau to select it.

2.

Click on the edge of the central outline that you want to stretch. A blue grab handle is displayed on the selected edge.

3.

Click and drag the edge to stretch the plateau, then release your mouse button.

A slope is an area of land with a natural incline. It is often common practise to slope the land away from the sides of a house so that water drains away from it rather than towards it. When you create a slope, you select two points: the first point is the starting point of the slope, and the second point determines the length and direction of the slope. If the slope comes into contact with other terrain elements, like hills and plateaus, the elements automatically blend together.

User’s Guide

153

22

Chapter 22 Terrain Modeling To create a slope in your terrain: 1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Slopes, or click the Slopes button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height button.

3.

In the Height edit box, enter the desired height for the top of the slope. Note that slopes are built from the top surface of the terrain up.

4.

Enable the Angle button.

5.

In the Angle edit box, enter an angle (in degrees) for the slope. The higher the value, the steeper the slope.

6.

Click OK.

7.

Select a start point for the slope. The slope will incline from this point. Note that the sides of the slope will extend to the very edges of the terrain.

8.

Move your cursor in the direction you want the slope to run. A stretchable arrow is displayed.

9.

When the arrow is pointing in the right direction and is the desired length, click to insert the slope. The longer the arrow, the more gradual the slope will be. A shorter arrow will result in a steeper slope. Note that if the point you pick is not on the edge of the terrain, the land will level off at the top of the slope.

10. Right-click and select Finish. Note: If you insert another slope, and that slope comes into contact with an existing slope, the new slope will insert on top of the existing slope. To stretch a slope:

154

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow is displayed, and grab handles are displayed at either end of it.

2.

Click and drag an end grab handle to stretch the arrow, then release your mouse button.

Turning the Terrain On and Off Note that you can also rotate the arrow by selecting a different position for it while clicking and dragging. This changes the direction of the slope.

Turning the Terrain On and Off You can hide the terrain from view and display it again whenever you want using the View Filter.

To move a slope:

To turn the terrain on or off:

1.

Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow is displayed.

1.

2.

Click and drag the arrow’s center blue grab handle to move the slope, then release your mouse button.

Select View > View Filter or click the View Filter button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

In the View Filter dialog, select the Landscape tab.

3.

Click the eye icon next to the Terrain option. The eye closes.

4.

Click OK.

To edit the height of a slope: 1.

Click in the center of the slope to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height radio button.

4.

Edit the height in the Height edit box.

5.

Click OK.

To edit the angle (steepness) of a slope: 1.

Click in the center of the slope to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Slopes dialog, enable the Angle radio button.

4.

Edit the height in the Angle edit box.

5.

Click OK.

To delete a slope: 1.

Click in the center of the slope to select it. The central arrow is displayed.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

155

22

Chapter

Property Lines You may want to know where your property lines are, especially if you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area. Lot lines and setbacks can be found on a survey plan or surveyor’s certificate. Using the Site Boundary tool you can define and insert a site boundary, which shows your property lines, stakes, and building setbacks.

Site Boundary

157

Chapter 23 Property Lines

Defining Your Building Lot

3.

In the catalog, select the boundary you want to insert. If you want to create a custom site boundary, right-click the lot that is closest to the one you want to create, then select Catalog Manager. See Defining a Custom Building Lot on page 159. You can also insert a lot for now and edit it later if you want.

4.

Position the boundary where you want it, then click to insert it.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

You can use the Site Boundary tool to insert a site boundary in your 2D plan. A site boundary consists of two continuous lines: one that shows the legal property boundary (lot lines), and one that defines the building envelope (setbacks). The site boundary can be annotated with peg markers, bearing text, length text and peg numbers. It will only appear in 2D wireframe view.

Peg (stake)

Lot Line Setback Line

Tip: You can put a fence along your lot lines to show where the lot lines are in 3D. See Inserting a Fence on page 164. To move the site boundary:

The catalog contains some pre-defined site boundaries that you can edit to suit your needs. You can also create a new site boundary element from scratch if you prefer.

1.

Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary. A blue grab handle is displayed at the center of the site boundary.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the boundary, then release your mouse button.

Note: Site boundaries are visible in 2D plan view only.

To edit the site boundary:

To insert a site boundary:

1.

Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary.

1.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Make your changes in the Site Boundary dialog, then click OK. For more information about site boundary properties, see Defining a Custom Building Lot on page 159.

2.

158

In 2D plan view, select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click the Zoom to Fit button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar. This will bring the entire terrain into view so you can insert the boundary easily and precisely. Select Insert > Terrain > Site Boundary, or click the Site Boundary button on the Terrain toolbar.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To delete the site boundary: 1.

Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary.

Defining a Custom Building Lot 2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

7.

The Ref. angle option lets you define lot lines using compass points (N, S, E, W) and specifying a reference angle in degrees, minutes and seconds (e.g. 5d12’10”). The Angle bearing option lets you use angles to specify a forward and back bearing.

Defining a Custom Building Lot If the building lot you want to insert is not available in the catalog, you can create a custom one on the fly. Defining a site boundary involves entering a bearing and length from one peg to the next. This information can be found on a survey plan or surveyor’s certificate.

8.

Define your first lot line by filling in the fields in the parameters window, then clicking Add. The line appears in the preview window, and its properties appear in the Segments window.

9.

Continue defining lot lines. When you are ready to define the last lot line, just check the Closing check box, then click Add. This closes the last line created back to the first line.

To define a custom building lot: 1.

If you haven’t already accessed the Catalog Manager, select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, make sure Site Boundary is selected in the Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to add the site boundary to (Rectangle Lots, Pie Shape Lots or Square Lots). If your boundary has an unusual shape, you may want to create a new group for it.

4.

Select Catalog > Add Element.

5.

In the Site Boundary dialog, click Clear All.

6.

Type a name for your boundary in the Name edit box.

On the Basic property page, click the Direction drop box, then select the method you want to use to define your lot lines.

•

To edit an existing lot line, select it in the upper window, edit its parameters in the lower window, then click Update. • To delete a lot line, select it in the upper window, then click Delete. • To delete all existing lot lines, click Clear All. 10. Once you’ve defined the size and shape of the site boundary, select the Annotation tab in the Site Boundary dialog.

User’s Guide

159

23

Chapter 23 Property Lines 11. Specify the desired annotation settings. You can choose round or square peg markers, and specify the marker’s diameter. You can also choose to include bearing text, length text and peg text (numbers), as well as specify the position and style for the text.

83’-4” @ N 90d00’00” E 12. Once your lot lines are defined, click OK. The boundary is added to the current catalog. 13. Click OK. You can now insert the boundary in your drawing.

160

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Part 7

Working on the Exterior of Your Home Fences & Gates

page 163

Decks & Patios

page 171

Retaining Walls

page 185

Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways

page 189

Chapter

Fences & Gates Fences can add beauty, privacy and security to your property. Fences are drawn with ease in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite. Just point and click to fence off a yard in seconds! The catalog contains an assortment of fences in a variety of materials, including concrete, stone and wood. You can even add a white picket fence for that classic look. Once you’ve drawn your fence you can easily pop a gate into it. You can choose a style that matches your fence, or choose an entirely different style to create a stylish accent.

163

Chapter 24 Fences & Gates

Inserting a Fence

5.

To insert a fence, you draw it just like a wall by selecting a start point and end point. This allows you to create a fence of any length. You can continue selecting points in other directions to add on to the fencing (if you want to fence around your yard, for example).

Select an end point for the fence. If you want you can continue adding sections to the fence in any direction by simply selecting points. 3

4

Tip: If you have inserted a site boundary in your plan, you can draw your fence on top of the lot lines for ease. The fence then acts as a visual indicator of your property extents in 3D. To insert a fence: 1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Fences/Gates > Fences, or click the Fences/Gates button on the Landscape toolbar and select Fences. 2

2.

In the catalog, select the fence type you want to insert.

3.

Select a start point for the fence.

4.

Move your cursor in the direction you want the fence to run. The fence stretches as you move your cursor.

164

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

6.

1

Right-click and select Finish.

6

5

Stretching a Fence Layout

Stretching a Fence Layout

Parts of a Fence

You can stretch a fence layout by clicking and dragging one of the fence segments.

Post Boards

To stretch a fence layout: 1.

Click on the fence segment you want to move.

2.

Position your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the layout, then release your mouse button.

Secondary Post Rails

Changing the Length of a Fence You can lengthen or shorten a fence by clicking and dragging its end points. To change the length of a fence: 1.

Select the fence you want to lengthen or shorten.

2.

Click and drag one of the fence’s end handles to stretch the fence, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Properties of a Fence You can change the height of a fence, specify whether or not you want the fence to hug the terrain, edit the size and position of fence posts, and edit the dimensions of the rails and boards.

Creating a Break in a Fence

To edit the properties of a fence:

When you create a break in a fence, you can select the fence portions on either side of the break independently. You may want to insert one or more breaks in a fence so that you can then remove certain segments of it.

1.

Click on the fence to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

To create a break in a fence: 1.

Select the fence you want to break.

2.

Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Double-click where you want to break the fence.

User’s Guide

165

24

Chapter 24 Fences & Gates 3.

To change the type of fence, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose from General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The General style just inserts a plain, flat surface.

4.

To change the height of the fence, edit the values in the Fence Height edit box.

5.

If you want the bottom of the fence to hug the terrain, check the Hug Terrain? check box, then select either Raked or Stepped from the Slope Type drop box.

spacing of intermediate posts from the first main post. Max. Post Spacing. The maximum allowable spacing between posts. If you stretch the fence, the spacing between posts increases. More posts are added to prevent the spacing from exceeding the maximum. Post Width. The width (and depth) of fence posts. Post Extension. The distance the fence posts extend past the top of the fence boards. Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of the connecting post where two fence segments connect. Choosing Half Way rotates the connecting post half way between the angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting post aligned to the first fence.

Raked

7.

To change the dimensions of the top, middle or bottom rail, edit the parameters in the Rails area. Rail Width. The width of the rail members. Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail members. Top Rail Height. The distance from the bottom of the fence to the top rail. Middle Rail Height. The distance from the top rail to the middle rail. Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the middle rail to the bottom rail.

Stepped

8.

To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the parameters in the Boards area. Board Style. Choose either Squared or Pointed. You would typically see pointed boards on a picket fence. Board Width. The width of one fence board.

6.

To change the dimensions or position of the fence posts, edit the parameters in the Posts area. Secondary Post Position. Choosing Centered starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the middle of the fence to create a balanced look. Choose From Start starts the

166

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Board Depth. The thickness of one fence board. Board Spacing. The distance from the center of one board to the center of the next board. Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the fence boards from the ground.

Changing the Fencing Material 9.

When you’re done editing properties, click OK.

Changing the Fencing Material You can apply a different color or material to the boards, posts or rails of a fence. For example, you can select a different type of wood for a wood fence. To apply different materials to a fence: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the fence is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the fence component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the fence (fence boards, posts and rails). Clicking on one component will apply the material to all components of the same type. For example, clicking on one post will apply the material to all posts.

5.

Inserting a Gate The catalog contains a variety of gate types, including wood, picket and ranch style gates. Gates just pop themselves right into fences. Naturally, if you are inserting a gate in a fence, you want to choose a gate size that corresponds to the fence size. For example, if your fence is a 6’ wood privacy fence, you would likely choose the 6’ wood privacy gate. Gates are shown slightly open so you can identify them easily in 2D and 3D views. To insert a gate: 1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Fences/Gates > Gates, or click the Fences/Gates button on the Landscape toolbar and select Gates.

2.

In the catalog, select the gate you want to insert.

3.

Position the gate where you want it, then click to insert it. The gate will automatically pop itself into the fence when you position it in the fence.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Fence You can delete a fence in a couple of easy steps. To delete a fence: 1.

Select the fence. You can select multiple fence segments using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

167

24

Chapter 24 Fences & Gates 4.

Right-click and select Finish.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Swing.

Editing the Properties of a Gate You can change the height and width of a gate as well as the dimensions of the rails and boards. You can also control how far the gate is open in 2D and 3D views. To edit the properties of a gate:

Moving a Gate

1.

Click on the gate to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To change the type of gate, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose from General, Privacy, Picket or Ranch. The General style just inserts a plain, flat door.

4.

To change the overall size of the gate, edit the values in the Gate Width and Gate Height edit boxes.

5.

To change the swing type, select either Left or Right from the Swing Type drop box. This determines which side the gate is hinged on.

6.

If you want to change how far the gate is open in 3D views, edit the percentage in the 3D Percent Open edit box. To change how far the gate is open in 2D views, change the percentage in the 2D Percent Open edit box.

You can move a gate back and forth inside a fence by simply clicking and dragging it. To move a gate: 1.

Click on the gate to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the gate, then release your mouse button.

Flipping a Gate You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire gate around. If the gate originally opened out, it now opens in; if it was hinged on the left, it is now hinged on the right (and vice versa). To flip a gate: 1.

Click the gate to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening.

Flipping a Gate’s Swing Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a gate. The gate will be hinged on the opposite side, but it will still open in the same direction, either in or out. To flip a gate swing: 1.

168

Click the gate to select it.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Deleting a Gate 7.

To change the dimensions of the top, middle or bottom rail, edit the parameters in the Rails area. Rail Width. The width of the rail members. Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail members. Top Rail Height. The distance from the bottom of the gate to the top rail. Middle Rail Height. The distance from the top rail to the middle rail. Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the middle rail to the bottom rail.

8.

To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the parameters in the Boards area. Board Style. Choose either Squared or Pointed. You would typically see pointed boards on a picket fence. Board Width. The width of one fence board. Board Depth. The thickness of one fence board. Board Spacing. The distance from the center of one board to the center of the next board. Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the gate boards from the ground.

9.

When you’re done editing properties, click OK.

Deleting a Gate You can delete a gate in a couple of easy steps. When you delete a gate, the fence returns to its original state. To delete a gate: 1.

Select the gate.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

169

24

Chapter

Decks & Patios A great way to add more living space to your home without building an addition is to build a deck or patio. With outdoor living spaces becoming more and more desirable, 3D Home Architect® Design Suite gives you all the tools you need to create the exact look you want, quickly and easily. The Deck Builder Wizard makes building a deck so simple — just select the material and shape you want, and the deck is built for you automatically. Or if you prefer, you can create the precise size and shape you want using the Deck tool. You can even add levels to your deck if you want for a truly customized look. Once you’ve got the main platform up, you can point and click to insert stairs of your choice. Creating a patio involves clicking a few points to define the outline of the slab using the Pads tool.

171

Chapter 25 Decks & Patios

Using the Deck Builder Wizard

3.

In the Deck Wizard dialog, click Next.

4.

Select the decking material you would like to use.

5.

Click Next.

6.

In the Shape area, click on the shape that most closely resembles the shape you want to create. Remember that you can edit the shape after the deck has been inserted.

7.

In the Size area, specify the desired dimensions for the deck.

The Deck Builder Wizard takes all the work out of building a deck because it does it all for you! Just select the decking material and deck shape, enter the dimensions you want, then point and click to insert the deck. By default, decks include posts, beams and railings. After inserting a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which include settings for posts, railings and skirting. To build a deck using the Deck Builder Wizard: 1.

2.

172

In the Building Locations drop box, select the location you want to associate the deck with. The height of a deck is determined by the Height above current location variable in the deck properties. You can edit this value after the deck has been inserted if necessary. Select Tools > Design Wizards > Deck Builder.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Building a Deck with the Deck Tool 8.

Click Next.

Building a Deck with the Deck Tool You can use the Deck tool to build a deck of virtually any shape and size. By default, decks include posts and railings. You can opt to include skirting if you want. Once you’ve inserted a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which include settings for posts, railings and skirting. To create a deck:

9.

In the Deck Rotation area, select the desired rotation for your deck. This is how the deck will be oriented when it is attached to your cursor.

1.

In the Building Locations drop box, select the location you want to associate the deck with. The height of a deck is determined by the Height above current location variable in the deck properties. You can edit this value after the deck has been inserted if necessary.

2.

Select Insert > Landscape > Decks > Decks, or click the Decks button on the Landscape toolbar and select Decks.

3.

In the catalog, select the decking material you want to use.

4.

Select a start point for the deck outline. Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because the last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.)

10. In the Decking Direction area, select the direction you want the deck boards to run. 11. Click Next.

2

12. Click Finish. The Deck Wizard closes, and the deck is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.

1

3

4

13. Position the deck where you want it, then click to insert it. User’s Guide

173

25

Chapter 25 Decks & Patios 5.

Right-click and select Finish.

2.

Right-click and select Set Decking Direction, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Set Decking Direction.

3.

Select two points to define a line that runs in the direction you want the deck boards to run. The deck boards update to match the direction of the line.

Moving a Deck You can move a deck using the Move Whole Element tool. To move a deck: 1.

Click on one of the deck’s edges to select the deck.

Stretching a Deck

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Alternatively you can Shift+click to select the remaining edges.

You can stretch a deck in any direction by clicking and dragging one of its edges.

3.

Click and drag the deck to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

To stretch a deck: 1.

Click on the deck edge you want to stretch.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to stretch the deck, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Deck You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a deck about a selected point. To rotate a deck: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3. 4.

To reshape a deck:

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.

Click on the deck to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag to rotate the deck, then release your mouse button.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the deck.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Changing the Direction of Deck Boards You can use the Set Decking Direction tool to change the direction of your deck boards. To change the direction of deck boards:

174

You can change the shape of a deck by stretching any of its corners.

1.

Note: When you rotate a deck, the direction of the deck boards does not change. You can change the decking direction if you want.

1.

Reshaping a Deck

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Curving a Deck Edge You can curve a deck edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the deck edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to. To curve a deck edge by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the deck edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the deck edge to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Changing the Height of a Deck To curve a deck edge to a selected point: 1.

Click on the deck edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The deck edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

Changing the Height of a Deck By default, decks are inserted at the floor level of the current building location. To change the height of a deck: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Support property page, edit the value in the Height above current location edit box.

4.

Click OK.

Editing Deck Post Properties By default, the support system of a deck consists of 4”x4” wood posts spaced 8’ apart. Posts are sunken 3’-6” into the ground for adequate support. You can edit the post type, post spacing and post depth. You can also disable posts altogether if you want. To edit deck post properties: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Support tab.

4.

If you want to remove posts from the deck, uncheck the Include Posts check box in the Posts area.

5.

To select a different member to use for deck posts, click the Select button in the Posts area, then make your selection from the catalog.

6.

To change the spacing between posts along beams, edit the value in the Spacing along Beam edit box.

7.

To change the depth of the posts in the ground, edit the value in the Depth below ground level edit box. This effectively changes the overall height of the post, but does not affect the portion shown above ground.

8.

Click OK.

Displaying Footings Under Deck Posts Footings are not included in your deck by default, but you can display them instantly by editing deck properties. You can also choose the footing material you want to use. To create footings under deck posts: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Support property page, check the Include Footings check box in the Footings area.

4.

Click the Select button in the Footings area, then select the desired footing type from the catalog.

5.

Click OK.

Editing the Deck Frame You have complete control over the way a deck is constructed. You can specify the way you want the beams constructed in relation to the posts. You can also select specific materials to use for deck boards, beams and joists, as well as edit the spacing and overhang of these members. To edit the deck frame: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

User’s Guide

175

25

Chapter 25 Decks & Patios 3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Frame tab.

thumb is to limit the extension to 1/3 of their length. 12. To select a different material for the deck beams, click the Select button in the Beams area, then make your selection from the catalog. 13. To change the amount the beams extend past each other, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Beams area. 14. Once you’ve specified the deck frame properties, click OK.

Changing the Railing Style You can change a deck’s railing type by making a selection on the Accessories property page. 4.

To change the way the beams are constructed, click on the desired configuration in the Construction area. Beams are the vertical members that rest on or are attached to the posts, and that support the deck joists.

To change a deck’s railing style:

5.

To select a different material for the deck boards, click the Select button in the Decking area, then make your selection from the catalog.

6.

To edit the spacing between deck boards, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Decking area.

7.

To change the amount the deck boards hang over the deck frame, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Decking area.

8.

To adjust the angle of the deck boards in relation to the joists, edit the value in the Angle from Joists edit box.

9.

To select a different material for the deck joists, click the Select button in the Joists area, then make your selection from the catalog.

10. To edit the spacing between joists, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Joists area. 11. To change the amount the joists hang over the beams, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Joists area. The general rule of

176

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab.

4.

In the Railings area, click the Select button.

5.

Select the desired railing type from the catalog.

6.

Click OK.

Controlling the Display of Deck Railings

Controlling the Display of Deck Railings

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab.

4.

If you want to display skirting on your deck, check the Include skirting on selected edges check box.

5.

Click the Select button in the Skirting area, then select the desired skirting material from the catalog.

6.

Click OK.

You can delete railings from selected deck edges to provide access to the deck. If you want to remove all the railings on a deck, you need to select all of the decks edges first. To control the display of deck railings: 1.

Click on the deck edge you want to remove a railing from, or add a railing to. A blue grab handle is displayed at the center of the selected deck edge. If you want to remove railings from other edges as well, use Shift+click to select the additional edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab.

4.

Disable the Include railing on selected edges check box.

5.

Click OK.

Note: If you add stairs to your deck, an opening will be automatically created in the railing.

Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting Skirting is basically screening along the bottom of a deck that conceals the underside of the deck frame. It can also keep out animals and debris. Most decks display skirting. You can choose to turn skirting off if you want. If displaying skirting, you can select the skirting material you want to use, such as lattice. To display skirting on your deck: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Inserting Openings in a Deck Once you have created a deck, you can insert a custom opening in it of virtually any shape and size using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its outline. To insert an opening in a deck: 1.

Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

2.

Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.

3.

Select a start point for the opening.

4.

Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to pick the start point again.

User’s Guide

177

25

Chapter 25 Decks & Patios 5.

When you have selected your final point, right-click and select Finish.

To curve an opening edge to a selected point: 1.

Click on the opening edge you want to curve.

Resizing a Deck Opening

2.

You can resize a deck opening by clicking and dragging one of its edges.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

To stretch a deck opening: 1.

Click on the opening edge you want to move. The entire opening is highlighted, and a blue grab handle appears at the center of the opening edge you selected.

Removing Deck Openings

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

You can remove an opening from a deck by selecting all sides of the opening, then clicking and dragging it away from the deck.

3.

Click and drag in the direction you want to stretch.

Note: You cannot remove an opening using Delete.

4.

When the opening is the correct size, release your mouse button.

To remove a deck opening:

Reshaping a Deck Opening

1.

Click on one of the opening’s edges.

2.

Shift+click to select the remaining sides.

You can change the shape of a deck opening by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging.

3.

Hover your pointer over one of the grab handles to display the Move cursor.

To reshape a deck opening by stretching:

4.

Click and drag the opening off the deck until it disappears.

1.

Click on the opening to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

Deleting a Deck

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the opening.

You can remove a deck completely in a couple of easy steps.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Curving a Deck Opening Edge

To remove a deck: 1.

You can curve an opening edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to.

Click on one of the deck’s edges to select the deck.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging:

Note: If you added stairs to your deck, you need to remove them separately.

1.

Click on the opening edge you want to curve.

2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

Adding Stairs to a Deck

3.

Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

178

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

You can add a staircase to your deck with a single mouse click. Stairs automatically snap to your deck for easy insertion, and the railings on the deck are automatically removed to allow for the stair opening. By default, stairs extend from the

Moving Deck Stairs deck platform to down to the terrain, so there’s absolutely nothing you need to calculate. Also, deck stairs have a railing on both sides by default, but you can remove one or both of them if you want after the stairs have been inserted. You can choose either pressure treated or cedar stairs, and edit the stair dimensions to get the exact result you want.

Parts of a Staircase Riser

Tread

To add stairs to a deck: 1.

Nosing

Select Insert > Landscape > Decks > Deck Stairs, or click the Decks button on the Landscape toolbar and select Deck Stairs.

Stringer

Editing the Size of Deck Stairs 2.

In the catalog, select the type of stairs you would like to insert.

3.

Move your pointer close to the deck edge. Position the stairs where you want them, then click to insert them.

4.

You can edit the overall height and width of deck stairs, the width of the steps, and the riser height. To edit the size of deck stairs: 1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the properties on the Basic tab.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Deck Stairs You can move a deck staircase by clicking and dragging it along the deck edge. Note that you can’t move deck stairs away from the deck, but you can move them to another deck edge. Also, the opening in the deck railing adjusts with the move of the deck stairs. To move a staircase by clicking and dragging: 1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag the staircase along the deck edge to move it.

4.

Release your mouse button.

Extend Stair. The option selected determines where the base of the stairs sit. You can either change where they extend to, or specify an explicit height. By default, the deck stairs are User’s Guide

179

25

Chapter 25 Decks & Patios inserted at deck level and run down to the terrain.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Down to terrain. Extends the stairs down to the ground.

3.

In the Railings area, uncheck the Include Railings check box if you don’t want any railings on your deck stairs. If you want one or more railings on the stairs, leave this check box enabled.

4.

If you want a railing on the left side of the stairs, select Railing on left side from the drop box. If you want a railing on the right side of the stairs, select Railing on right side from the drop box. If you want a railing on both sides of the stairs, select Railing on both sides.

5.

Click OK.

Down to previous location. Extends the stairs to the floor level of the building location below the current one. Down to deck location. Extends the stairs down to the floor level of the building location the deck is associated with. You might use this if you have raised your deck above the floor level of the current location and want to extend the stairs down. Explicit Height. Extends the stairs down a specific distance that you define in the Overall Height edit box. Overall Height. Available only if Explicit Height is selected in the Extend Stair drop box, this lets you define a fixed height for the stairs. Max. Riser Height. The maximum distance allowed between individual steps. Note that if your riser height exceeds the width of the member you are using for your riser boards, two or more boards will be inserted for each riser. Tread Run. The width of each step. The width of a step is measured from the nose of the step to the riser of the next step. Note that if your tread run exceeds the width of the member you are using for your treads, two or more boards will be inserted for each step. Overall Width. The width of the stairs measured from one end of a step to the other end of the step.

Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs By default, deck stairs have a railing on both sides. You can choose to have a railing on the left side only or right side only, or remove them altogether. To remove railings from deck stairs: 1.

180

Click on the staircase to select it.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing Stringers, Risers and Treads You can specify detailed settings for the stringers, risers and treads on your deck stairs. To edit stringer, riser or tread details: 1.

Click on the staircase to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Deck Stairs dialog, select the Details tab.

Deleting Deck Stairs 4.

To change the stringer style, click the appropriate graphic in the Stringer area. Choose from Notched, Stringer and Side.

5.

Edit the remaining properties as desired. They are described below.

tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20º. 0º

20º

Stringer Spacing. The spacing between the outside stringers and intermediate stringers. Height. The distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection. Specifying a stringer height that is the same as the overall height of the staircase creates a staircase that is completely closed on the sides. In other words, the stringers go right to the ground.

Tread Select. Click this button to select the type of wood to use for your steps. Spacing. When each step comprises two or more boards, this is the spacing between those boards. Nosing. The distance the step extends past the riser. Overhang.The distance the ends of the steps extend past the outer stringers.

Height = 12”

Height = 4’

Width. The thickness of the stringer members. Riser Closed Riser. Inserts riser boards under the steps. If you leave this disabled, the staircase will be open under the treads. Select. Click this button to select a riser board to use. Spacing. When the riser comprises two or more boards, this is the spacing between the boards. Angle. The tilt of the riser boards. A value of 0 means the board is perpendicular to the step (straight up and down). A value above 0

6.

Click OK.

Deleting Deck Stairs You can delete a set of stairs in a couple of easy steps. To delete deck stairs: 1.

Click on the stairs.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating a Patio You can use the Pads tool to insert a concrete, brick or wood patio directly on your terrain. By drawing the outline of the patio, you control its precise size and shape. By default, patio slabs hug the terrain they are inserted on. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the patio, you may want to turn off the slab’s Hug Terrain option. This makes the slab flat and positions it at the Terrain Base Level specified in your Terrain Settings.

User’s Guide

181

25

Chapter 25 Decks & Patios You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different color or material to the patio after it has been inserted.

To move a patio slab: 1.

Click on the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element. Click and drag the slab to move it, then release your mouse button.

To create a patio: 1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Pads, or click the Pads button on the Terrain toolbar.

3.

2.

In the catalog, select the type of slab you want to insert.

Resizing a Patio Slab

3.

Select a start point for the slab.

4.

Continue selecting points to define the outline of the slab. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. 1

You can resize a patio slab by stretching one of its edges. To resize a patio slab by stretching it:

4

1.

Click on the slab to select it.

2.

Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3.

Hover your pointer over the grab handle to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag to stretch the slab.

5.

Release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Patio Slab You can change the shape of a patio slab by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging. To reshape a patio slab:

2 5.

1.

Click on the slab to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the slab.

3.

Release your mouse button.

3

Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

To disable the slab’s Hug Terrain option: 1.

Click on the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, uncheck the Hug Terrain? check box.

Rotating a Patio Slab You can rotate a patio slab using the Rotate tool. To rotate a patio slab: 1.

Click on the slab to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

Moving a Patio Slab

3.

You can move a patio slab by clicking and dragging it.

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the slab, then release your mouse button.

4.

182

Click OK.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing the Thickness of a Patio Slab

Editing the Thickness of a Patio Slab You can edit the thickness of a patio slab on the slab’s Basic property page.

Deleting a Patio Slab You can delete a patio slab in a couple of easy steps. To delete a patio slab:

To edit the thickness of a patio slab:

1.

Click on the slab to select it.

1.

Click on the slab to select it.

2.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

3.

In the Pads dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

Enter the desired thickness in the Thickness edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Applying a Different Material to a Patio You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different color or material to your patio. For example, you may want to change the patio to stone. To apply a material to a patio: 1.

Display your model in 3D view and make sure the patio is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the patio surface. The material is immediately applied.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

User’s Guide

183

25

Chapter

Retaining Walls A well-built retaining wall system can preserve the natural shape of your land, reinforce hills and slopes, and protect your home from possible landslides or soil erosion. Retaining walls can also be an attractive addition to a garden or the overall landscaping around your home. Drawing retaining walls is easy — just point and click. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite automatically displays dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you. Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, broken, curved or deleted. This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want. The catalog contains wood, concrete and concrete block retaining walls in a variety of sizes. You can change the properties of walls, such as their thickness and appearance, as well as create custom walls.

185

Chapter 26 Retaining Walls

Drawing Retaining Walls

Wall Height. The physical height of the wall.

Just like regular walls, retaining walls are a snap to draw — just point and click.

Extension Below Base. The height of the wall below the terrain.

To draw a retaining wall: 1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Retaining Walls, or click the Retaining Walls button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert.

5.

Once the properties are set, click OK.

Lengthening and Shortening Retaining Walls You can lengthen or shorten an individual wall by clicking and dragging one of the wall’s ends. To lengthen or shorten a retaining wall:

3.

Select a start point for the wall.

1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end.

4.

Move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the wall.

2.

Hover your pointer over the wall end you want to stretch. The Stretch cursor is displayed.

3.

Click and drag the wall end until it has reached the desired length.

Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 5º angles. To release this constraint, turn off your Angle Snap.

4.

Release your mouse button.

5.

When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint.

6.

Continue selecting points to add on to the wall if you want.

7.

When you are done, right-click and select Finish.

Editing a Retaining Wall’s Height, Width or Elevation You can edit the size properties of a wall by making changes on the wall’s Basic property page. To edit a retaining wall’s size properties:

Rotating a Retaining Wall You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate a retaining wall: 1.

Select the wall. A grab handle is displayed at each wall end.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Position your pointer over the grab handle you want to rotate the wall around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release your mouse button.

Curving a Retaining Wall You can curve a retaining wall using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point to curve to.

1.

Select the wall whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click if you want.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.

To curve a retaining wall by clicking and dragging:

4.

Edit the properties as desired:

1.

Width. The thickness of the wall.

186

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Click the wall to select it.

Breaking a Retaining Wall 2.

Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.

4.

Release your mouse button.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the wall face that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To curve a retaining wall to a selected point: 1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.

3.

Select the point you want to curve to. The wall automatically curves to the point.

4.

Click to finish.

Breaking a Retaining Wall You can break a retaining wall into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually. To break a retaining wall: 1.

Click the wall to select it.

2.

Right-click in the drawing area and click Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Double-click the point where you want to break the wall. This divides the wall into two segments that can be moved, stretched or manipulated individually.

Deleting a Retaining Wall You can delete a retaining wall in a couple of easy steps. To delete a retaining wall: 1.

Select the wall to remove. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Applying Different Finishes to Retaining Walls You can apply different finishes to your retaining walls using the handy Materials Paintbrush. The materials catalog contains an excellent selection of brick, concrete, wood and stone finishes. To apply a material to a retaining wall: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the wall face you want to apply the material to is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

User’s Guide

187

26

Chapter

Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways Sidewalks, pathways and driveways add to the overall aesthetics of your landscape and provide access to different areas of your property. Drawing them is easy — just select a start point, then point and click in the direction you want the pathway to run. Continue picking points to add segments if you want. The 3D Home Architect® Design Suite catalog includes an excellent selection of pathway materials including wood, sand, gravel, concrete, brick and asphalt. You can even create a forest path! A number of different widths are available, but you can create a custom width if you want.

Paths

189

Chapter 27 Sidewalks, Pathways & Driveways

Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways and Driveways

5.

Double-click to finish, or right-click and select Finish.

The catalog contains a wide variety of path types, including boardwalks, sand paths, gravel paths, brick paths, and driveways. The width and thickness of a path is determined by the path’s properties in the catalog. You control the length and direction of the path as you draw it. Dimensions are displayed as you draw each segment.

Double-click after last point

By default, all paths hug the terrain they are inserted on. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the path, you may want to turn off the path’s Hug Terrain option. This makes the path flat and positions it at the Terrain Base Level specified in your Terrain Settings.

Next Point

To create a path: 1.

Select Insert > Terrain > Paths, or click the Paths button on the Terrain toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the path type you want to insert.

3.

4.

Select a start point for your path. Note that your insertion point is on the center line of the path. Move your cursor in the direction you want the path to run, then select an endpoint for the path. You can continue selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the path if you want. Tip: To create a smooth curve in the path, click several points with a short distance between each point.

Start Point

Next Point

To disable the path’s Hug Terrain option: 1.

Click on the path to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

On the Basic property page, uncheck the Hug Terrain? check box.

4.

Click OK.

Stretching a Path Element You can lengthen, shorten or rotate a sidewalk, pathway or driveway by clicking and dragging its end or corner grab handles. If the path has multiple segments, you can also stretch the path layout by moving one of its segments. To stretch a path by clicking and dragging: 1.

190

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Select the path. If the path has multiple segments and you want to stretch the whole path layout by moving a segment, click on the segment you want to move.

Moving a Path Element 2.

Click and drag one of the path’s end or corner grab handles to stretch or reshape the path, then release your mouse button. If you are moving a segment to stretch the entire layout, hover your pointer over the segment’s center blue handle, then click and drag to stretch the path.

Moving a Path Element

To apply a material to a path element: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the path is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. The Landscape category contains a good selection of pavers, flagstone, gravel and sand.

4.

Click anywhere on the path surface.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

You can move an entire path using the Move Whole Element tool. To move a path: 1.

Click on the path to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the path to where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element You can edit the thickness of your path material or the path’s overall width.

Deleting a Path Element You can delete a sidewalk, pathway or driveway in a couple of easy steps. To delete a path:

To edit the thickness or width of a path:

1.

Click on the path to select it.

1.

Select the path. If the path has multiple segments, you do not have to select them all. Property changes affect the whole path.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

To edit the thickness of the path, enter a value in the Thickness edit box.

4.

To edit the width of the path, enter a value in the Width edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Applying Different Materials to Path Elements You can apply a different material to any path, sidewalk or driveway using the quick and handy Materials Paintbrush.

User’s Guide

191

27

Part 8

Landscaping Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas

page 195

Edging

page 199

Trees, Shrubs & Plants

page 203

Exterior Structures

page 223

Exterior Furniture

page 219

Landscape Lighting

page 227

Exterior Accessories

page 231

Irrigation

page 235

Chapter

Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas In the real world, one of the first things you need to do to create a garden is to dig out a bed for your plants. In 3D Home Architect® Design Suite, you can create a garden bed instantly by simply picking points to define the outline of the bed. The bed is then automatically filled with a material of your choice, such as soil or bark. The versatile Fills tool is handy for more than just garden beds. Choose the Water fill to create a pond, or the Sand fill to create a horseshoe pit. The possibilities are endless.

Fills

195

Chapter 28 Garden Beds, Ponds & Other Filled Areas

Creating Filled Areas You can use the Fills tool to define an area filled with soil, sand, gravel, concrete, bark or water. You define the area by picking points to draw its outline. Filled areas automatically hug the terrain they are inserted on.

Tip: If you want to create a raised garden you may want to insert a raised garden box from the catalog. See Inserting Exterior Structures on page 224. Note: You cannot insert a fill on top of another fill.

To create a filled area:

Resizing a Filled Area

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Fills, or click the Fills button on the Landscape toolbar.

You can resize a filled area by stretching one of its edges.

2.

In the catalog, select your fill material.

3.

Select a start point for your filled area.

4.

Continue selecting points to define the boundary of the filled area. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again.

5.

196

To resize a filled area by stretching it: 1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3.

Hover your pointer over the solid blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

4.

Click and drag to stretch the fill.

5.

Release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Filled Area You can change the shape of a filled area by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging its grab handles.

Right-click and select Finish.

To reshape a filled area by stretching:

1

4

2

3

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Click on the filled area to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2.

Click and drag a corner grab handle to stretch the filled area.

Rotating a Filled Area 3.

Release your mouse button.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. The Landscape category contains fill materials like water, sand and gravel.

4.

Click anywhere on the surface of the fill. The material is applied immediately.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

Rotating a Filled Area You can rotate a filled area using the Rotate tool. To rotate a filled area: 1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the corner you want to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the fill, then release your mouse button.

Moving a Filled Area You can move a filled area using the Move Whole Element tool. To move a filled area: 1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Whole Element, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Whole Element.

3.

Click and drag the filled area to move it, then release your mouse button.

Deleting a Filled Area You can delete a filled area in a couple of easy steps. To delete a filled area: 1.

Click on the filled area to select it.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: Deleting a fill returns the terrain to its original state where the fill was located.

Changing the Fill Material You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly change the look of a fill. To change the fill material: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the path is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

User’s Guide

197

28

Chapter

Edging Edging can be an attractive accent around gardens, ponds, sidewalks, driveways, and other areas. It can also help retain fill materials and keep weeds out of your garden. You can choose from PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or rails. Drawing edging is easy — just point and click to define the start and end point of the edging, then keep clicking to add more segments.

Edging

199

Chapter 29 Edging

Inserting Edging

5.

Use the Edging tool to add PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or wood, brick or concrete rails to your landscape design. The width and height of the edging is determined in the material’s properties. You insert edging by simply picking points to define the end points and direction of the edging. To insert edging: 1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Edging, or click the Edging button on the Landscape toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select your edging material.

3.

Select a start point for the edging.

4.

Move your cursor in the direction you want the edging to run, then select an endpoint for the edging. You can continue selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the edging if you want.

Right-click and select Finish. 1

4

2

3

Tip: You can also insert decorative borders around a garden. See Inserting Exterior Accessories on page 232.

Cleaning Up Corners If you edged around an area with posts or rails, you’ll notice that the edging members connect on center at the corners. You may want to stretch the corners to form completely flush intersections.

To clean up the corners of edging:

200

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Click on one of the edging members. Blue grab handles are displayed at the ends of the member.

2.

Hover your pointer over the end grab handle to display the Move cursor.

Changing the Length of Edging 3.

Click and drag the edging so that it meets up with the outside of the member it is connected to, then release your mouse button.

Breaking Edging When you create a break in edging, you can select and edit the portions on either side of the break independently. To create a break in edging:

4.

Select the other member.

5.

Click and drag the end so that it meets up with the inside edge of the connecting member, then release your mouse button.

1.

Select the edging you want to break.

2.

Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.

3.

Double-click where you want to break the edging.

Moving Edging You can move a piece of edging by clicking and dragging it. If the member is attached to any other edging members, the other members move along with it. To move edging: 1.

Select the edging you want to move. If you want to move multiple members, use Shift+click to select the other members.

2.

Hover your pointer over the center blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the edging, then release your mouse button.

Changing the Length of Edging You can lengthen or shorten edging by clicking and dragging its end points. To change the length of edging: 1.

Select the edging you want to lengthen or shorten. Grab handles are displayed at the center and ends of the edging.

2.

Click and drag one of the end grab handles to stretch the edging, then release your mouse button.

Rotating Edging You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point. To rotate edging: 1.

Select the edging. A grab handle is displayed at the center and ends of the edging.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the edging, then release your mouse button.

User’s Guide

201

29

Chapter 29 Edging

Editing the Height or Width of Edging You can edit the height or width (thickness) of edging on the edging’s Basic property page.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the edging.

5.

Right-click and select Finish.

To edit the height or width of edging: 1.

2.

Click on the edging to select it. Use Shift+click to select multiple segments if necessary. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Deleting Edging You can delete edging in a couple of easy steps. To delete edging:

3.

To edit the height of the edging, change the value in the Edge Height edit box.

4.

To edit the width (thickness) of the edging, change the value in the Edge Width edit box. Note that this variable is not available for PVC edging.

5.

If the edging is post edging, you can control the spacing between posts by editing the value in the Approx. Edge Spacing edit box.

6.

Click OK.

Changing the Edging Material You can apply a different color or material to edging using the Materials Paintbrush. To apply different materials to edging: 1.

202

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the edging is visible in the view. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select the edging to remove. You can select multiple edging segments using Shift+click.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Chapter

Trees, Shrubs & Plants Nothing brings your landscape to life like trees, shrubs, plants and flowers. With over 7500 plants to choose from, 3D Home Architect® Design Suite lets you create the landscape of your dreams. Inserting plants involves nothing more than a single mouse click, and once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped anywhere you like. You can even make them grow! If you need to learn more about a particular species of plant, you can view the plant’s light, water, temperature and soil requirements in its properties. For even more detailed information you can browse through 3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s comprehensive Plant Encyclopedia.

Plants

203

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Inserting Plants

Changing the Elevation of a Plant

Plants are inserted with a simple mouse click. Once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped anywhere in the drawing.

You can raise or lower a plant using the Elevate tool. You may want to do this for hanging plants, or plants in raised garden boxes.

To insert a plant:

To change the elevation of a plant:

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Plants, or click the Plants button on the Landscape toolbar.

1.

Select the plant.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate.

In the catalog, select the plant you want to insert. If you want to view the plant’s size or requirements before inserting it, right-click in the catalog and select Properties.

3.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the plant above the ground.

4.

Click OK.

2.

3.

Position the plant where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Note: Although the catalog contains a wide variety of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can, however, add plants from the Encyclopedia to the current catalog. For more information, see Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog on page 217.

Moving a Plant You can move a plant easily by just clicking and dragging it.

Editing the 2D Appearance of a Plant By default, plants are represented by a circle in 2D plan view. At the center of the circle is a smaller circle that represents the trunk.

You can choose from three 2D plant styles. You can also change the diameter of the trunk in 2D, or hide the trunk altogether. To edit the style of a plant in 2D: 1.

Select the plant whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Plants dialog, select the Basic tab.

4.

To change the style of the circle shown in 2D plan view, click the style you want in the Type area.

To move a plant: 1.

Select the plant you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the plant’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the plant.

4.

When the plant is where you want it, release your mouse button.

204

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Changing the Age of a Plant 5.

6.

To change the size of the trunk in 2D plan view, edit the value in the Trunk Diameter edit box. To hide the trunk from 2D view, select No from the Show trunk in plan? drop box. Click OK.

Changing the Age of a Plant The age of a plant determines its size at planting time. You can increase or decrease the age of a plant by making a change on the plant’s Plant Info property page. To change the age of a plant: 1.

Click on the plant whose planting age you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.

4.

Move the Planting Age slider left or right until the desired planting age is displayed. Planting age is measured in years.

5.

Click OK.

Forcing a Custom Plant Size

the plant’s size changes in both 2D and 3D regardless of the Planting Age setting on the Plant Info page. Note: If you just want to see plants at a different maturity level (i.e. change their age), you should change their planting age instead. See Changing the Age of a Plant on page 205. You can also apply an overall age change to your landscape. See Seeing Plant Growth Over Time on page 206. To change the size of a plant: 1.

Select the plant whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Plants dialog, select the Size tab.

4.

Set the Size from encyclopedia option to No.

5.

To change the width of the plant, enter a value in the Width edit box.

6.

To change the height of the plant in 3D view, edit the value in the Height edit box.

7.

Click OK.

The size of a plant is determined by properties in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can specify a custom height and width for a plant on the plant’s Size property page. Note that if you do this, however,

User’s Guide

205

30

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Deleting a Plant

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, change the date. Select a month by clicking the arrows on the month bar at the top of the calendar. Select a day by clicking a number on the calendar.

3.

Click OK. The plants in your drawing are updated according to the time of year you specified.

You can delete a plant in a couple of easy steps. To delete a plant: 1.

Select the plant.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Seeing Plant Growth Over Time Once you have inserted plants in your landscape plan, you can see how they will look any specified number of years down the road using the Plant Growth Over Time feature. To see plant growth over time: 1.

Select Tools > Gardening > Plant Growth Over Time.

2.

Enter the number of years to add to your landscape.

3.

Click OK.

Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants The Plant Seasonal Change feature updates the appearance of the plants in your drawing to reflect a particular season. Generally the change applies to flowering plants and trees that have a certain bloom time. You specify the season by adjusting the time of year on the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog. To apply seasonal changes to your plants: 1.

206

Select Tools > Gardening > Plant Seasonal Change.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Note: Keep in mind that seasonal changes may have different results depending on the plant’s properties in the Encyclopedia. Things to consider are the climate of the region the plant is in, and the plant’s world origin.

Using the Plant Encyclopedia

Using the Plant Encyclopedia The Plant Encyclopedia contains comprehensive information on over 7500 different varieties of plants. The Encyclopedia has many uses related to the selection and care of plants. You can view information about any plant, select plants based on certain criteria, research potential diseases, and learn how to care for your plants. To access the Plant Encyclopedia, select Tools > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia. You can also access the Plant Encyclopedia by clicking the Encyclopedia button on a plant’s Encyclopedia property page. Plant Photo

Usage Window

Plant Info

Profile View

Season Color Diagram

Plant Height

Overhead View

Plant Width

Plant List

Search Edit Field

Select Button

Scroll through the list and select the plant you want to view

Type in the first few letters of the plant you are looking for

Selects the current plant for placement in the current catalog when adding plants to the catalog

Latin/Common Button

Switches between Common and Latin plant names

User’s Guide

207

30

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

The Encyclopedia Main Page The Encyclopedia’s main page contains a comprehensive plant list that you can scroll through and select plants from. The page also displays a photo and two previews of a selected plant, as well as basic information about the plant and its appropriate growing environment.

options to view a brief description of the usage in the Plant Usage catalog.

Selecting a Plant to View By default, the plant list contains all 7500 plant species. If you have used the Plant Filter to filter out certain plant types, the list is smaller. (For more information about the Plant Filter, see Filtering the Plant List on page 216). To select a plant in the plant list, use the scrollbar beside the plant list to scroll through the list of plants, then click on the plant you want to view. By default, common plant names are listed in the plant list. You can switch to Latin names by clicking the Latin button. If you know the name of the plant you are looking for, you can locate it more quickly by typing the first few letters of the plant’s name in the Search Edit field above the plant list. The list of plants will move to the closest match as you type.

Search edit field Scrollbar

Soil/Zone/Lifetime. The window below the Usage window indicates Soil Preference (alkaline, acidic, heavy, etc.), Zone (ranging from 1 for Sub-Arctic to 10 for Sub-Tropical), and Lifetime (the life span of the plant in years). Each of the icons/items in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon/item, a small pop-up window appears displaying a brief description of the item. For example, if you hover your cursor over the soil preference icon, the window will display the preferred soil type that the icon indicates.

Plant Type and Needs. The window to the right of the Usage window indicates the following: Plant Type Temperature Preference Lighting Preference Water Requirements Complexity of Care

Viewing Plant Information The Encyclopedia’s main page displays images and basic information about the currently selected plant. Usage. This window lists all the possible ways you can use the plant. Click one of the usage

208

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Growth

Each of the icons in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon, a small pop-

The Encyclopedia Main Page up window appears displaying a brief description of the icon.

plant will look like in 3D. The profile view is shown in the lower right corner of the main page.

Season Color Diagram. This circle gives you an idea of what you can expect from the chosen plant throughout the year. The outer circle shows the months in which the plant blooms, and the color of its flowers. Fruits are also indicated in this circle, showing the period when they ripen, and the color of their fruit. The inner circle indicates when the plant has foliage (including autumn leaves), and the color of its leaves.

Note: The profile view shows the plant’s total height. If the plant is a vegetable, this includes the underground part. If the plant is a water plant, the underwater part is included. The width of bushes and flowers can be affected by how they are pruned. The plant will reach optimum size at maturity and under favorable conditions.

Plant Views The main page has two views: overhead and profile. The overhead view shows you a textured view of the plant from above.

The profile view gives you an idea of the plant’s height and spread, and shows you what your

User’s Guide

209

30

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Plant Care Calendar The Plant Care Calendar page shows the required monthly care (planting, watering, fertilizing, etc.) for the currently selected plant.

210

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Plant Care Calendar To see detailed information about each plant care task, click on the icon. A Care dialog appears displaying helpful animations and tips on how to complete a given task. Click Animate to play the animation, and Stop to stop it. Clicking the tools icon in the top right corner of the dialog opens a dialog showing the tools you will need to complete the task.

User’s Guide

211

30

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

World Map Page The World Map page displays a world map that indicates the region of the world where the currently selected plant originates. Right-click on a highlighted region to see details about the climate and growing conditions most favorable for plants indigenous to the region.

212

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Notebook Page

Notebook Page You can use the Notebook page to enter and view notes about the currently selected plant. To select a plant, scroll through the list and click on it, or use the Search Edit field above the plant list to enter the first few letters of the plant name and find a quick match. Click in the box on the right side of the page and type your note. When you move to another page in the Encyclopedia, your text is saved automatically.

User’s Guide

213

30

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Picture Page The Picture page contains a collage of thumbnail images of all the available plants in the plant list. You can browse through the images manually or by using the arrows at the top of the page. To view a large picture of a selected plant, click the Full Size button at the top of the page. Click the Thumbnails button to return to the thumbnails.

214

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Diseases Page

Diseases Page The Diseases page lists the possible diseases that may affect a plant. By default, the disease list contains the diseases that can affect the currently selected plant. If you want to view a comprehensive list of diseases for all plants, click All in the bottom right corner of the page. When you select a disease in the disease list, you will see a picture of the disease, details of its symptoms in the Symptoms windows, and care information in the Control window.

If you want to search in reverse to find all plants affected by a specific disease, click the Filter button at the bottom of the page. This opens the main Encyclopedia page. To restore your plant list, return to the Diseases page and click the All button.

User’s Guide

215

30

Chapter 30 Trees, Shrubs & Plants

Filtering the Plant List

originate. For example, if you wanted to find plants for an Asian-themed water garden, you would click on the Asian region of the map to exclude any plants that aren’t indigenous to Asia.

The Encyclopedia’s Plant Filter lets you filter out unwanted plants from your plant list by specifying various criteria.

The Notebook page lets you filter plants by notes that you’ve entered previously on this page. For example, you could enter the note “Front Yard” for all plants that you want to use in your front yard. When you are ready to lay out the front yard of your landscape plan you can go back to the Plant Filter and limit your plant list to only the plants you’ve pre-chosen for your front yard.

To use the Plant Filter: 1.

Select the Plant Filter tab on the left side of the Encyclopedia window.

The Picture page lets you limit your plant list by the part of the plant shown in its photo (leaf, bark, fruit, etc.). The filter option available on the Diseases page is different, because it affects the disease list, not the plant list. To use this filter, click on the image that represents the part of the plant affected or type of infestation, then select the Encyclopedia tab on the left side of the window to switch to the regular Diseases page. For example, if you are considering planting lilies or daffodils in your garden, and want to know what type of diseases these bulb plants may encounter, click the Bulb image on the Diseases page (in Plant Filter mode), then go into Encyclopedia mode and select the Diseases page.

Plant Filter Tab

3. 2.

Each Encyclopedia page has different filtering options. Click on the tabs along the top of the Encyclopedia window to select the page you want. The main Encyclopedia page lets you select the Plant Type, Watering Needs, Lighting Preference, Soil Preference, Zone, Color (for flower, leaf, autumn leaf, and fruit), Height and Blooming Season. The Plant Care Calendar page lets you select the Complexity of Care required, Speed of Growth (for both height and spread), Life Expectancy and Usage. The World Map page lets you select the region of the world where the plants

216

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Select the filter criteria. Each icon and scale represents a specific plant criterion. As soon as you click on an icon or move a slider, filtering begins. To deselect an icon, click on it again. Note: If some of the icons disappear, it is because no such plant is selectable within the current criteria. For example, if you select minimal water, the climber plant type icon will disappear because there are no climbing plants that will accept minimal watering. If you select more than one icon within a single group, then all plants with any of the checked properties will be selected. For example, selecting maximum light and medium light will exclude all plants that

Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog flourish under minimal light (shade) conditions. If icons/sliders of more than one type are checked/moved, then plants that satisfy all the chosen criteria will be selected. For example, if you click on the deciduous tree icon in the Type box, the full sun icon in the Lighting Preference box, and the white square on the Color box, then only hardwood trees that flourish in full sunlight, require minimal watering, and produce white flowers will be selected. 4.

The total number of plants available — based on the filters you have applied — is indicated on the leaf in the upper right corner of the window. If at any time you want to restore the complete list of plants, click Reset.

9.

In the Name edit box, specify a name for your plant (disable Auto Name if you want to type in the name yourself).

10. Specify the remaining properties (Quantity or Behavior) if desired, then click OK in the Plants dialog. Note that the settings on the Appearance page have no effect on the plant’s appearance. The appearance of a plant is determined by settings in the Encyclopedia. 11. Click OK in the Catalog Manager dialog. The plant is added to your catalog.

Adding a Plant from the Encyclopedia to the Catalog Although the catalog contains a vast array of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant Encyclopedia. You can add any plant from the Plant Encyclopedia to any catalog by following the steps below. To add a plant from the encyclopedia to the current catalog: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select Plants from the Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select or create the group you want to add the plant to.

4.

Select Catalog > Add Element.

5.

In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.

6.

Click the Encyclopedia button to launch the Plant Encyclopedia.

7.

On the Encyclopedia’s main page, select the desired plant in the plant list.

8.

Click Select. Notice that the Plant Info page of the Plants dialog is now full with the selected plant’s information.

User’s Guide

217

30

Chapter

Exterior Furniture The 3D Home Architect® Design Suite catalog includes a great selection of exterior furniture so you can relax, eat and entertain outdoors. Furniture types include patio tables, patio chairs, picnic tables, loungers and benches. All it takes is one click to insert any piece of furniture.

Exterior Furniture

219

Chapter 31 Exterior Furniture

Inserting Exterior Furniture Inserting exterior furniture is easy — just point and click. To insert exterior furniture:

Editing the Size of Exterior Furniture You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior furniture.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture, or click the Exterior Furniture button on the Landscape toolbar.

To edit the size of exterior furniture:

2.

In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

1.

1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions.

4.

Click OK.

Moving Exterior Furniture You can move exterior furniture in plan view by simply clicking and dragging it. To move exterior furniture: 1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Exterior Furniture

Applying Different Colors or Finishes to Exterior Furniture

You can rotate exterior furniture by clicking and dragging it.

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a color, fabric or finish to any exterior furnishing element.

To rotate exterior furniture:

To apply materials to exterior furniture:

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

1.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the furnishing element is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

220

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Deleting Exterior Furniture 3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. You can find an assortment of colors in the Paint category.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the element. For example, you can apply a specific color to a tabletop, and a different color to the legs of the table.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Exterior Furniture You can delete any piece of exterior furniture in a couple of easy steps. To delete exterior furniture: 1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

User’s Guide

221

31

Chapter

Exterior Structures 3D Home Architect® Design Suite offers an excellent selection of exterior structures to make your outdoor living space more functional. These include play gyms, swings, sandboxes, trampolines, tennis and volleyball courts, detached garages, sheds, gazebos, arbors, garden boxes, greenhouses, pools and hot tubs. If you are creating a landscape plan and do not have a model in your project, you can insert a house template to create your landscape plan around. All structures are inserted with a single mouse click and can be easily moved, rotated and edited.

Exterior Structures

223

Chapter 32 Exterior Structures

Inserting Exterior Structures Inserting exterior structures is easy — just point and click. To insert an exterior structure: 1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures, or click the Exterior Structures button on the Landscape toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the structure you want to insert.

3.

Position the structure where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

This can interfere with the selection of other elements near the house. If you have inserted elements around the house, such as plants, and want to select them, you may want to use the View Filter to make the house template nonselectable for ease of editing your landscape plan. Another thing to note is that the house template’s exterior walls are not visible in 2D. You only see the roof line. If you want to insert things like fills up against the exterior walls of the house, you will need to either draw them in 3D, or draw them in 2D and then move them into place in 3D.

Moving Exterior Structures You can move exterior structures in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them.

Right-click and select Finish.

To move an exterior structure: 1.

Select the element you want to move.

A Note About House Templates

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

A house template is basically the exterior shell of a finished home. If you are creating a landscape plan and your project does not contain a model, you can insert a house template to serve as the focal point of your plan.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Although a house template looks like a real house, it can’t be edited like a real model can. It is considered a single-click element, so clicking on any part of the template selects the entire house.

You can rotate exterior structures by clicking and dragging them.

It is important to note that when you select the house template, the invisible bounding box is always square or rectangular, and does not necessarily follow the shape of the house outline.

1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Bounding Box

224

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Rotating Exterior Structures

To rotate an exterior structure:

Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure

Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior structures.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Some structures can have different materials applied to individual parts. For example, the roof of a shed can be different from the shed’s walls.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

To edit the size of an exterior structure: 1.

Select the structure.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions.

Deleting an Exterior Structure You can delete an exterior structure in a couple of easy steps. To delete an exterior structure:

4.

1.

Select the structure.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Click OK.

Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures You can change the look of an exterior structure by applying different colors or materials to it. To apply different colors or materials to an exterior structure: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the structure is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

User’s Guide

225

32

Chapter

Landscape Lighting Outdoor lighting can beautify any landscape and offers security and visibility at night. Lighting can also play an important part when you create exterior 3DTrueView™ renderings. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite offers both light posts and path lights to enhance the exterior design of your home. You can even turn them on and off! Outdoor lighting is inserted directly on the terrain. Just point and click!

Landscape Lighting

227

Chapter 33 Landscape Lighting

Inserting Landscape Lighting

element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions.

Inserting outdoor light posts and path lights is easy — just point and click. To insert a landscape light fixture: 1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Landscape Lighting, or click the Landscape Lighting button on the Landscape toolbar.

2.

In the catalog, select the light you want to insert.

3.

Position the light where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Landscape Light Fixture You can move outdoor light fixtures in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them. To move a landscape light fixture: 1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of a Landscape Light Fixture You can edit the overall height, width and depth of light fixtures. To edit the size of a landscape light fixture: 1.

Select the light fixture.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the

228

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

4.

Click OK.

Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source A light source is usually a type of light bulb. You can edit a light fixture’s light source to achieve a different lighting effect. To edit a light fixture’s light source: 1.

Select the light fixture whose properties you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Turning a Light On or Off 3.

Select the Lights tab.

Selecting Middle positions the light in the center of the fixture, and selecting Minimum or Maximum positions it on the left or right side. If you select Custom you can enter a specific value in the adjacent edit box which is relative to the center position. For example, entering -3 moves the light source 3” left from the center. Changing the Y value moves the light source forward or backward. Selecting Minimum brings the light source all the way forward, and selecting Maximum moves it to the back of the fixture. Changing the Z value moves the light source up or down. Selecting Minimum positions the light source at the bottom of the fixture, while selecting Maximum positions it at the top of the fixture. 7.

4.

To replace the currently selected light source with another type, click Edit, then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog. To add a light source to the fixture, click Add, then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog.

Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

Turning a Light On or Off By default, lights are on when you insert them. You can virtually turn a light off by disabling its light source. To turn a light on or off: 1.

Select the light fixture you want to turn on or off.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Lights tab.

eye icon

5.

To delete a light source from the light fixture, click Delete.

6.

To edit the position of the light source in relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y and Z coordinates in the Light Position area. Coordinates are measured from the bottom center of the fixture. The small red box in the preview window indicates the current position of the light source. Changing the X value moves the light source left or right.

User’s Guide

229

33

Chapter 33 Landscape Lighting 4.

To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon next to the light source name.

5.

Click OK.

Changing the Look of a Landscape Light Fixture You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to different parts of a light fixture. To change the look of a light fixture: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the light fixture is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the material to. For some fixtures, materials are applied separately to the individual parts of the fixture.

5.

When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Landscape Light Fixture You can delete an outdoor light fixture in a couple of easy steps. To delete a light fixture: 1.

Select the light fixture.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

230

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Exterior Accessories It’s always those small touches that really pull a design together. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite makes adding decorative accents and accessories a breeze - just point and click to insert a vast array of items, including fireplaces, fountains, wind chimes, decorative columns, corner accents, garden borders, weather vanes, door mats, patio umbrellas, trellises, bird baths, mailboxes, cars and planters.

Exterior Accessories

231

Chapter 34 Exterior Accessories

Inserting Exterior Accessories

4.

Inserting exterior accessories is easy — just point and click. Accessories are inserted at a logical height, but you can edit their elevation after insertion if you want.

Raising or Lowering an Exterior Accessory

To insert an exterior accessory: 1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories, or click the Exterior Accessories button on the Landscape toolbar.

When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

You can raise or lower an outdoor element using the Elevate tool. To change the elevation of an exterior accessory: 1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element.

2.

In the catalog, select the accessory you want to insert.

3.

Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.

3.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the ground.

4.

Click OK.

Moving Exterior Accessories

Editing the Size of an Exterior Accessory

You can move exterior accessories in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them.

You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior accessories.

To move an exterior accessory:

To edit the size of an exterior accessory:

1.

Select the element you want to move.

1.

Select the element.

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Exterior Accessories You can rotate exterior accessories by clicking and dragging them. To rotate an exterior accessory: 1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

232

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory element scales uniformly when you change one of its dimensions.

right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Exterior Accessory You can delete an exterior accessory in a couple of easy steps. To delete an exterior accessory:

4.

1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Click OK.

Changing the Look of an Exterior Accessory You can change the look of an exterior accessory by applying different colors or materials to it. To apply different colors or materials to an exterior accessory: 1.

Display your model in 3D, and make sure the accessory is visible in the view.

2.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

3.

In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply.

4.

Click on the component you want to apply the color or material to. Some accessories can have different materials applied to their individual parts.

5.

When you are finished applying materials,

User’s Guide

233

34

Chapter

Irrigation You can insert pop-up sprinklers in your landscape plan with a single mouse click. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line.

Irrigation

235

Chapter 35 Irrigation

Inserting Irrigation The catalog contains a wide selection of pop-up sprinklers with varying ranges of spray. You insert a sprinkler by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line.

3.

Click and drag to rotate the sprinkler, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Height of a Sprinkler All sprinklers in the catalog are 3” tall. You can edit the height of a sprinkler if you want. To edit the height of a sprinkler:

To insert pop-up sprinklers:

1.

Select the sprinkler.

1.

Select Insert > Landscape > Irrigation, or click the Irrigation button on the Landscape toolbar.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

2.

3.

In the catalog, select the sprinkler you want to insert.

On the Basic page, edit the value in the Height edit box.

4.

Click OK.

3.

4.

Position the sprinkler where you want it, then click to insert it. You can continue inserting more sprinklers if you want.

Editing a Sprinkler’s Spray Coverage

Right-click and select Finish.

To edit a sprinkler’s spray properties:

You can edit the distance covered by a sprinkler’s spray.

1.

Select the sprinkler.

Moving Sprinklers

2.

You can move a sprinkler by simply clicking and dragging it.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the size values on the Basic property page. For most sprinklers you would edit the Width and Depth values. The Adjustable sprinkler in the catalog lets you specify a custom radius and included angle for the spray.

4.

Click OK.

To move a sprinkler: 1.

Select the sprinkler.

2.

Hover your pointer over the sprinkler’s square grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

Deleting a Sprinkler

4.

When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

You can delete a sprinkler in a couple of easy steps.

Rotating Sprinklers You can rotate a sprinkler (and its spray) by simply clicking and dragging its rotation handle. To rotate a sprinkler: 1.

Select the sprinkler.

2.

Hover your pointer over the sprinkler’s triangular grab handle.

236

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To delete a sprinkler: 1.

Select the sprinkler.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Part 9

Drawing & Editing Tools Drawing Aids

page 239

Measurement

page 243

Commander

page 247

Editing Your Design

page 253

Chapter

Drawing Aids 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe offers a variety of powerful drawing tools that help you insert elements easily and precisely where you want them in your drawing. If you want you can display a drawing grid in your drawing area, as well as set up a snap grid so that your cursor snaps to the grid when you are inserting elements. The Object Snap feature automatically snaps your pointer to existing objects, and the Angle Snap snaps your pointer to specified angles. The Collision Control feature prevents you from inserting elements where they do not fit. You can set up drawing aids in your program settings, and toggle them on and off using the buttons on the Status bar.

239

Chapter 36 Drawing Aids

Setting Up a Drawing Grid A drawing grid is simply a set of horizontal and vertical lines that can help you orient objects to one another. By default, the spacing between grid lines is 1’, but you can change this if you want. Note that the drawing grid is a visual aid only, and will not be included in printouts.

want. If you enable the Match Grid option, the invisible snap grid becomes the same size as the drawing grid. This will make it seem like you are snapping to the drawing grid while drawing. To set up a snap grid: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

If you want the snap grid to be the same size as the drawing grid, check the Match Grid check box in the Grid Snap area.

4.

To specify a custom distance between vertical grid lines, enter a value in the X Spacing edit box.

5.

To specify a custom distance between horizontal grid lines, enter a value in the Y Spacing edit box.

6.

If you want to turn the grid snap on, check the Enable (F4) check box.

7.

Click OK.

To set up a drawing grid: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Grid area, specify the desired distance between vertical grid lines in the X Spacing edit box.

4.

Specify the desired distance between horizontal grid lines in the Y Spacing edit box.

5.

By default, the grid is 150’ x 150’, which is the default size of the terrain. To change the overall size of the grid, enter the desired width in the X Limit edit box, and the desired height in the Y Limit edit box.

6.

If you want to turn the grid on, check the Enable (F7) check box.

7.

Click OK.

Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off

Turning the Grid Snap On and Off You can toggle the grid snap on and off in one of two ways: • •

Press F4 on your keyboard Click the GRIDSNAP button on the Status bar

You can toggle the drawing grid on and off in one of two ways: • •

Press F7 on your keyboard Click the GRID button on the Status bar

Using the Grid Snap The Grid Snap feature snaps your pointer to an invisible grid when inserting elements. By default, the spacing between the grid lines in the invisible grid is 1”, but you can change this if you

240

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Using the Object Snap The Object Snap feature makes elements that you are currently inserting automatically snap to existing elements in your drawing. For example, if you are drawing a wall and hover your pointer near an existing wall, your pointer will snap to the existing wall, making it easy to create a wall layout with cleanly intersecting walls. You can set the pixel search distance for the object snap, which determines how close your pointer

Using Ortho needs to be to an element for it to snap to the element. By default, the Object Snap is enabled, but you can turn it off whenever you want. There are three ways to turn the Object Snap on or off. To turn the Object Snap on or off: • •

•

Press F5 on your keyboard Click the OBJSNAP button on the Status bar

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Enable (F5) check box in the Object Snap area

To set the pixel search distance: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

4.

In the Object Snap area, type the desired number of pixels in the Pixel Search Distance edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values. Click OK.

•

Using Angle Snap When the Angle Snap feature is turned on, your cursor snaps to specific angles when rotating an element. If you set your snap angle to 10º, for example, your cursor will snap at 10º intervals as you rotate the element. By default, the Angle Snap is on. You can turn the Angle Snap on and off using one of three methods. To turn the Angle Snap on or off: • •

Press F6 on your keyboard Click the ANGLESNAP button on the Status bar

•

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Angle Snap (F6) check box

To change the snap angle: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Ortho / Angle Snap area, type the desired snap angle in the Snap Angle edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values.

4.

Click OK.

Using Ortho The Ortho feature restricts your cursor movement to 90-degree angles when you are inserting elements. This can be especially helpful when drawing elements like walls. By default, Ortho is enabled. You can toggle it on and off using one of three methods. To turn Ortho on or off: • •

Press F8 on your keyboard Click the ORTHO button on the Status bar

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Ortho (F8) check box

Disabling/Enabling Collision Control The program’s intelligent Collision Control feature prevents objects from being inserted where they do not fit. By default, Collision Control is on, but you can turn it off whenever you like using one of three methods.

User’s Guide

241

36

Chapter 36 Drawing Aids To turn Collision Control on or off: • •

Press F9 on your keyboard Click the COLLISION button on the Status bar

•

Select Settings > Program Settings, then on the Drawing Aids page, check or uncheck the Enable Collision Control (F9) check box

Note: Collision Control affects building elements on the current building location only. It does not affect landscape elements.

242

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Measurement You can change the unit of measure used in a drawing, or select a different level of precision for your measurements. Once you’ve drawn something, you can measure it using the Measure tool. You can also use the Area/Perimeter tool to instantly calculate the area of a room or building.

243

Chapter 37 Measurement

Changing the Unit of Measure The units of measure used in your project are determined by a template, which by default is either a feet/inches template or millimeters template. Once you’ve opened a new project, you can change the units of measure and levels of precision used in that project by making selections on the Units of Measure page of the Program Settings dialog.

Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs If you have chosen to work in Metric units, you can choose to suppress units for length/distance, volume, and area measurements shown in dialogs. For example, 1200 mm would appear as simply 1200. To suppress units: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Units of Measure tab.

3.

With Metric Units selected, enable the Suppress metric units from dialogs check box.

To set your units of measure:

4.

Click OK.

1.

Measuring Distances

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Units of Measure tab.

3.

Select either Imperial Units or Metric Units, then select the desired units to use. Measure

Units Available

Imperial

Feet-Inches Inches

Metric

Millimeters Centimeters Meters

4.

Select a level of precision for each unit of measure. For example, selecting #’-# #/16” sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when working in feet and inches.

5.

Once you’ve set your units of measure, click OK.

244

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Use the Measure tool to measure the distance between any two points in your 2D plan. To use the Measure tool: 1.

Select Tools > Measure.

2.

Click your first point on the screen.

3.

Move your cursor in the direction you want to measure. A ruler is displayed that stretches as you move your cursor.

4.

Click your second point on the screen. The distance is shown on the ruler as well as on the Status bar at the bottom of the screen.

5.

Once you have measured your first distance, you can keep selecting points to measure

Measuring Area and Perimeter additional distances from the last point selected. A running total is displayed on the Status bar.

6.

4.

When you are done viewing the area calculations, click OK.

When you have finished measuring, rightclick and select Finish.

Measuring Area and Perimeter The Area/Perimeter Calculator displays the area (e.g. square footage) and perimeter length of each location in your model. It also displays the total area and total perimeter (of all locations). You can use the calculator at any given point in time. The values in the calculator update automatically as your model increases or decreases in size. Note the calculations are taken from the exterior side of the building’s walls. To measure area: 1.

Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > Area/ Perimeter.

2.

To turn the grid lines off, uncheck the Show Grid check box.

3.

To print the calculations, click Print.

User’s Guide

245

37

Chapter

Commander For very precise control when inserting or editing elements, 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe offers a helpful tool called the Commander, which lets you view or enter exact values for distance, direction and angles. It is especially handy for users with some CAD experience. This chapter tells you how to turn the Commander on, and how to use it.

247

Chapter 38 Commander

Displaying the Commander The Commander is a multi-functional tool that lets you enter precise values when inserting or editing elements. Even if you don’t need a high level of precision, you may want the Commander displayed so you can see lengths and angles as you draw or edit elements.

To display the Commander: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Workspace tab.

3.

Check the Commander check box.

4.

Click OK.

The Commander is displayed just below the drawing area, above the toolbar area. Initially the Commander will look grayed out because it is inactive. It will become active when you insert or edit elements.

Using the Commander The Commander can be a very useful tool when inserting or editing elements. Using the Commander you can: • • • • • •

Specify the insertion height of an element before it is inserted Select a precise insertion point for an element Specify a precise length and direction for elements like walls and railings Specify a precise distance and direction when stretching or moving an element Specify a precise angle when rotating an element Specify a precise radius/included angle when curving a wall, deck or opening

Even if you don’t want to enter precise values, you can still use the Commander to view measurements as you draw and edit elements. The values in the Commander are linked to your cursor movement and update as you proceed through a command.

248

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

The Commander becomes instantly active when inserting elements. It is most useful for things like walls and railings, because it lets you enter a precise length for the element. The Commander also becomes active when you are moving, stretching or rotating elements. If you have started moving, stretching or rotating an element using your mouse, the Commander displays the move distance or rotation angle as you move your mouse. If you want to be able the enter values in the Commander when moving, stretching or rotating an element, you need to first select an appropriate editing tool from the rightclick menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such as Move, Stretch, Lengthen, or Rotate.

Displaying the Coordinate Icon The Coordinate Icon marks the current point from which an action will be performed. In other words, it identifies the current reference point when using the Commander. By default, this icon is turned off. If you plan to use the Commander while working, you should turn on the Coordinate Icon. To display the Coordinate Icon: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Drawing Aids tab.

3.

In the Visual Aids area, check the Show Coordinate Icon check box.

4.

Click OK.

Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before You Insert It If you have the Commander turned on, it will display a Base Height edit box as soon as an insertion tool becomes active.

The value shown in the Base Height edit box is the height at which the element will insert in your drawing. You can change the insertion height

Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements before selecting an insertion point for the element by typing a value in the Base Height edit box and pressing ENTER. If the element is a building element, the height is measured from the floor level of the current building location to the element’s insertion point. If the element is a landscape element, the distance is measured from the terrain to the element’s insertion point. Most elements have their insertion point at the bottom of the element. Exceptions are windows and wall openings, in which the insertion point is located at the top of the element. In the case of windows and wall openings, the edit box reads “Head Height”.

Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements To use the Commander, you must first specify a reference point, or base point, from which values can be measured. If you are drawing a wall, for example, the first point you click on the screen is considered the reference point. The Commander then becomes active, and you can enter a Distance and Direction (or X and Y values) for the wall. If you want to use the Commander to edit an element (e.g. move or rotate it), you must select a point from which to measure the move distance/ direction, or rotation angle. Most often you would select one of the element’s grab handles, which are the small blue squares that appear on the major points of an element when you select the element. There are two ways to select a reference point once you’ve activated a tool: • •

Entering Values in the Commander The Commander is intelligent and changes depending on the tool you are using. For example, if you are drawing walls, the Commander’s edit boxes become Distance, Direction, and Z. If you are curving walls, however, the edit boxes change to Radius and Included Angle. You can move easily from one edit box to the next using your Tab key. Pressing ENTER after typing a value completes the current action. When entering values in the Commander, especially when inserting or moving elements, it is important to be aware of the current coordinate system in the Commander. The Commander offers two coordinate systems: Polar and Cartesian. The system you select determines how values are entered in the Commander when you are specifying points or distances. Note that you can switch between the Polar and Cartesian coordinate system once you have selected a reference point to draw from or move from. You do this by making a selection from the coordinate system drop box on the left side of the Commander. Note: If moving, stretching or rotating elements, and you want to enter values in the Commander, you need to first select an appropriate editing tool from the right-click menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such as Move, Stretch, Lengthen or Rotate.

Click the point in your drawing. Enter coordinates, or X, Y and Z values, in the Commander. (See Defining Points in the Cartesian Coordinate System on page 250.)

Note that even if you choose to click the point in your drawing, you can see the coordinates of your cursor in the Commander as you move your mouse. By default, coordinates are read from the last point selected in the drawing area. This point is marked by the Coordinate Icon (if enabled).

User’s Guide

249

38

Chapter 38 Commander

Direction and Angle of Rotation Direction in a drawing is specified in degrees of an angle. The angle is calculated counterclockwise from the positive X axis.

The Four Primary Drawing Directions

landscape element, the Z value is measured from the terrain. Remember that the coordinates are measured from the current reference point, which is marked by the Coordinate Icon. (See Entering Values in the Commander on page 249.) In the Cartesian system, you can enter both positive and negative values for any of the coordinates.

Specifying Distance and Direction in the Polar Coordinate System The Polar coordinate system becomes active once you have selected a reference point to draw from, or start a move from. In the Polar coordinate system, you specify a distance and direction (angle) when drawing or moving an element. Although the four primary drawing directions are the ones you will probably be working with the most, any angle is possible. If you disable Ortho and Angle Snap, and move an element randomly in your drawing area, there is no restriction on angles at all. Even if Ortho and Angle Snap are enabled, you can enter any angle you want in the Commander.

Defining Points in the Cartesian Coordinate System Initially when you start an insertion or editing command, the coordinate system is set to Cartesian. This lets you specify a precise reference point to draw or move from by entering X, Y and Z coordinate values in the Commander.

X. Enter an X coordinate to specify a horizontal (left/right) distance in 2D plan view. Y. Enter a Y coordinate to specify a vertical (up/ down) distance in 2D plan view. Z. Enter a Z coordinate to indicate elevation, or height. If the element is a building element, the Z value is measured from the floor level of the current building location. If the element is a

250

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Distance. Enter a positive value to specify the length of the element, or the move distance. Direction. Enter the direction you want the element to run, or the direction in which you want to move an element. For information about how direction is specified, see Direction and Angle of Rotation on page 250. Z. Enter the distance you want to move the element vertically. You can enter a positive or negative value to move the element up or down. If the element is a building element, the Z value is measured from the floor level of the current building location. If the element is a landscape element, the Z value is measured from the terrain.

Using the Commander When Rotating Elements When you select the Rotate tool from the rightclick menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu, then select a base point for the rotation, the Commander displays a Rotation Angle edit box.

Using the Commander When Curving Elements To specify the desired angle of rotation for the element, type the angle in the Rotation Angle edit box and press ENTER. For information on how angles are measured, see Direction and Angle of Rotation on page 250.

Using the Commander When Curving Elements When curving an element such as a wall or floor opening, you can use the Commander to specify a precise curve angle.

Radius. The distance from the element (in its uncurved state) to the center point of the curve.

Radius

Included Angle. The angle formed between two radius lines extending from the center of the circle implied by the curve out to the endpoints of the arc. The larger the angle, the rounder and larger the curve.

Included Angle

It is not necessary to enter both the Radius and Included Angle values. If you enter one, the program automatically supplies the other. Also, if you enter a value and nothing happens after you press ENTER, then the value is not valid in relation to the dimensions of your element.

User’s Guide

251

38

Chapter

Editing Your Design When you double-click after inserting an element or select Finish from the right-click menu, you automatically go into Selection Mode, meaning you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them. Most elements can be moved, rotated, copied and deleted. Some elements have additional editing commands available. For example, you can lengthen, break and curve walls. All elements have a property sheet where you can change the size or appearance of the element. To access a menu of editing commands for a selected element, just right-click in the drawing area or select Edit > Modify Elements. Certain functions can be performed without selecting any commands at all. For example, you can move and rotate most elements by simply clicking and dragging your mouse. This chapter describes how to select elements, and use general editing commands like Move, Rotate, Elevate, Duplicate and Delete. It also describes how to access and edit element properties. For information about editing a specific type of element, see the chapter about that element.

253

Chapter 39 Editing Your Design

Undoing the Previous Action The Undo tool cancels your most recent action. You can undo as many actions as you have taken since your last save. To undo an action: • • •

Select Edit > Undo, or Click the Undo button on the Standard toolbar, or Press Ctrl+Z

Tip: You can use the Redo tool to reapply an action you have canceled using the Undo tool.

Redoing an Undo The Redo tool reapplies a tool that you have reversed using Undo. Redo will only work directly following an Undo. To redo a task: • • •

Select Edit > Redo, or Click the Redo button on the Standard toolbar, or Press Ctrl+Y

Accessing Edit Commands When you have an element selected, you can access a menu of edit commands by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify Elements. Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical commands are Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two types of elements are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only commands that are common to both element types are available. Certain functions can be performed without selecting any commands at all. For example, you can move and rotate most elements by simply clicking and dragging your mouse.

Moving Elements When you select an element, you are automatically in Drag and Drop mode. If the element is a singular, one-click object, like a

254

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

cabinet or plant, you can move the element by simply clicking and dragging it. If you want to move an area-drawn element, such as a roof, you need to select the Move Whole Element tool before clicking and dragging Otherwise, doing a straight drag-and-drop will only stretch it. If you click and drag a wall, all walls attached to it move with it. If you have your Commander turned on and would like to be able to enter precise values for the move, you need to select the Move tool instead of doing a straight drag-and-drop. Note: Elements associated with walls, such as doors and windows, can only be moved within the wall they are in. You cannot move them to another wall.

Doing a Straight Drag-and-Drop The straight drag-and-drop method is ideal for singular, one-click elements like cabinets and plants. To move an element using drag-and-drop: 1.

Select the element you want to move. You are now in Drag and Drop mode.

2.

Hover your pointer over the element’s center grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the element.

4.

When the element is where you want it, release the mouse button.

Using the Move Tool Use the Move tool when you want to be able to specify a precise distance and direction for the move in the Commander. To move an element using the Move tool: 1.

Select the element you want to move.

2.

Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.

3.

Select a base point for the move. The move distance and direction will be measured from this point.

Raising or Lowering an Element 4.

Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to move the element. Select the point you want to move the element to, or enter a distance and direction in the Commander.

Raising or Lowering an Element Most elements can be raised or lowered using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. Some elements, such as roofs, do not provide access to the Elevate tool. In the case of a roof, you can raise or lower it by changing the Support Height variable in its properties. Many block elements (like furniture and plants) also have a Distance above current location or terrain variable in their properties that you can use to raise or lower the element. Walls have an Extension Below Base variable, and columns have a Base Offset variable in their properties that you can edit. To raise or lower an element using the Elevate tool: 1.

Select the element you want to raise or lower.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the element.

3.

4.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the element above the floor. If the element is a landscaping element, the value you specify is relative to the terrain. The distance you enter is the distance from the floor or terrain to the insertion point of the element. For most elements, the insertion point is at the base of the element. For windows and wall openings, however, the insertion point is at the top of the element. Therefore, if you are raising or lowering a window or wall opening, specify the desired distance from the floor to the top of the window or opening. Click OK.

To raise or lower a block element by editing its properties: 1.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Behavior tab. If there is no Behavior tab, you will need to use the Elevate tool to raise or lower the element.

4.

Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain edit box.

5.

Click OK.

Rotating Elements in 2D Plan View Singular, one-click elements like cabinets and furniture can be rotated on the spot by simply clicking and dragging them while in Rotation mode. Railings can be rotated by clicking and dragging their end points. For most other elements such as walls, floors, ceilings or roofs, you need to use the Rotate tool. You also need to use the Rotate tool if you want to be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander, or you want to rotate the element about a point other than the center point of the element.

Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation If you see a triangular grab handle on an element when it is selected, it can be rotated by simply clicking and dragging it. Using this method, the element is rotated about its center point. Rotation handle

. . .

Center

90°

180°

. 270°

If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate in increments of whatever angle is set for the

Select the element you want to raise or lower. User’s Guide

255

39

Chapter 39 Editing Your Design Angle Snap. If the Angle Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments of 1º.

through the point at 180°. You can rotate fullcircle around this baseline.

To rotate an element by clicking and dragging: 1.

Select the element you want to rotate.

2.

Hover your pointer over the triangular grab handle to display the Rotate cursor. If you do not see the triangular grab handle, the element can only be rotated with the Rotate tool.

.

Click and drag to rotate the element.

4.

When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Using the Rotate Tool

270° rotation Tip: If you want to align an element with another element that may be lying at an odd angle, select a base point on the other element, then line up your rotation line with that element. 4.

Using the Rotate tool you can rotate an element about any selected base point. You should also use the Rotate tool if you want to be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander. If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate in increments of whatever angle is set for the Angle Snap. If you are using the Commander, you can override the Angle Snap by entering the desired angle in the Commander. If the Angle Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments of 1º. To rotate an element using the Rotate tool: 1.

Select the element to rotate.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Select a base point for the rotation. The base point can be any point on the element (e.g. center point or corner point), or any point in the drawing area. The point you pick establishes an automatic baseline that runs

256

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

.

Base Point

Tip: If the square grab handle is in close proximity to the triangular grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to distinguish between the two grab handles. 3.

Baseline

Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to rotate the element. The element will rotate from the defined base point in the direction you move the mouse. If the Commander is turned on, you can view the angle of rotation as you rotate, or enter a precise angle. Positive angle values are read in a counter-clockwise direction, while negative values are read in a clockwise direction.

Changing an Element’s Orientation Symbol elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them in your drawing. For example, tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit the orientation of most symbol elements. For example, you may want to flip an air register so that you can insert it on the ceiling in your basement. To change an element’s orientation: 1.

Select the element.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Copying Elements on the Same Location 3.

On the Basic property page, click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element.

2.

Select the elements you want to copy.

3.

Right-click and select Duplicate to Locations.

(Y, Z) axes: Rotates the element front to back, and vice versa.

4.

Select the target location(s) you want to copy the elements to.

(X, Z) axes: Rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D.

5.

Click OK.

(X, Y) axes: Rotates the element left or right in 2D plan view.

Copying Elements on the Same Location The Duplicate tool creates a copy of a selected element that you can then position where you like on the current location. To duplicate an element: 1.

Select the element to copy.

2.

Right-click and select Duplicate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Duplicate.

3.

4.

Select a base point for the copy movement. Typically you would select one of the element's grab handles, but you can click anywhere in the drawing. The base point is simply a reference point used to define the move distance.

Note: The location you are copying to must exist in the Building Locations dialog. For more information see Defining Building Locations on page 18.

Arraying Elements When you array elements, you create multiple copies of an element at the same time. You can create an array in a single row or column, or a layout of rows and columns. You can also control the spacing between elements in the array, and the array's rotation angle. Columns

Rows

Select the point you are copying the element to. You can do this by moving your mouse and then clicking to insert the copy, or by typing a distance and direction in the Commander.

Sample array of posts

Copying Elements to Other Locations The Duplicate to Locations tool lets you copy existing elements to other locations. This is useful if the elements you have already drawn will have the same layout on another location. For example, you can copy the exterior walls on the Ground Floor to the Second Floor and instantly create another story.

To array an element:

To copy elements to other locations:

1.

Select the element you want to array.

1.

2.

Right-click and select Array, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Array.

Make sure the location you want to copy elements FROM is current.

User’s Guide

257

39

Chapter 39 Editing Your Design 3.

In the Number of Rows box, type the number of horizontal rows you want or use the arrows to select a value.

4.

In the Number of Columns box, type the number of vertical columns you want.

5.

In the Distance Between Rows box, type the spacing you want between rows. This determines the distance between elements appearing in columns (vertical spacing).

6.

In the Distance Between Columns box, type the spacing you want between columns. This determines the distance between elements appearing in rows (horizontal spacing).

Editing the Size and Composition of an Element You can edit the physical make-up of an element as well as its dimensions by accessing the element’s Basic property page. Some elements have additional property pages that control its composition. For example, cabinets have Leaf and Details property pages.

Note: If you are working in Imperial, make sure you include the feet symbol (e.g. 4’) if the value is in feet. Otherwise, the value is taken as inches. 7.

In the Array Rotation Angle box, type the degree of rotation for the array.

8.

Click OK. The array is created.

Note: The Array tool is only available for certain elements.

Deleting Elements You can delete an element from your drawing in two quick steps. To delete an element: 1.

Select the element.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

258

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

When you edit the properties of elements that exist in your drawing, only selected elements are changed. Other occurrences of the element in your drawing remain unchanged. You can, however, select and edit multiple elements at the same time provided they share the same properties. To edit the properties of an inserted element: 1.

Select the element you want to edit. To select multiple elements, use Shift + click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Adjust the properties as desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the element graphic, and vice versa, if one exists.

4.

Click OK. The selected elements are updated in the drawing.

Changing an Element’s Material or Color Note: Editing the properties of an element in your drawing has no effect on the element’s property definition in the catalog it came from. If you want to edit an element in a catalog, see Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 335. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that element in your drawing.

To use the Materials Paintbrush: 1.

Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click the Materials Paintbrush button on any tabbed toolbar.

2.

In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. There is an incredible selection to choose from, including Wood, Brick, Marble, Concrete, Steel, Carpet, Tile, Roofing and Fabric. If you want to apply a solid color select something from the Paint category.

3.

In 3D view, click on the element part that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Changing an Element’s Material or Color When you view your design in Rendered or Patterned mode, elements are displayed using materials that are defined in the elements’ properties. A material can be a texture, such as brick, or a color. Materials also have a pattern assigned to them, which is what you see when you view in Patterned view. You can select a different material for each of an element’s components. Note: You can’t change the way an element looks in 2D plan view. There are two ways to change an element’s material settings: using the Materials Paintbrush, or through the element’s Appearance property page. The Materials Paintbrush is best used in 3D view. It lets you select a material or color in the catalog, then apply it to parts of an element. For example, if you want your table legs to be blue, you can select the Blue Paint material, then click on of the table’s legs. All table legs will update automatically. When you use the Materials Paintbrush on an element, the settings on the element’s Appearance property page update to match the selections you made with the Materials Paintbrush.

To change an element’s material through the Appearance property page: 1.

Select the element you want to edit. To select multiple elements, use Shift + click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Select the Appearance tab.

If you choose to edit an element’s material through its Appearance property page, you can select different materials for each of the element’s parts, rather than just a selected part. It doesn’t matter if you’re in a 2D view or 3D view.

User’s Guide

259

39

Chapter 39 Editing Your Design 4.

In the Components pane, select the component whose material you want to change.

12. When all your materials are defined, click OK.

5.

In the Material area, click the Select button.

Note: When you edit the material of an element in your drawing, the element’s material definition in the catalog does not change. The change only applies to the selected element. If you want to change the element’s properties in the catalog, see Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog on page 335.

6.

In the Materials dialog, select the group containing the desired material. If you want to choose a solid color, select the Paint group.

7.

Select the material you want to use. The swatches in the preview windows update automatically. If you want to edit the material, click on one of the swatches to access the Edit Materials dialog. For information about editing materials, see Editing Material Properties on page 349.

8.

Click OK to return to the Appearance page.

9.

If you want to rotate the material on the element, enter an angle in the Rotation edit box, or use the arrows to scroll through a list of angles. This rotates the material in a clockwise direction.

10. To shift the material on the element (left, right, up or down), use the Position arrows. 11. Select another component in the Components pane and select a material for that component.

260

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Part 10

Power Tools Project Trace Image

page 263

Photo Boards

page 267

Text & Dimensions

page 273

Project Estimate

page 285

3DTrueView™

page 289

Chapter

Project Trace Image Using the Project Trace Image tool you can import a BMP, JPG or TGA file into your drawing space. You can then trace the image using elements from the catalog, creating a true 3D Home Architect® Design Suite model. This is the perfect tool to use if you have sketched out ideas in a drawing program or scanned a floor plan that you have permission to use, and want to recreate the plan in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite. You can resize the image if you need to before tracing, and delete it once you’re done tracing. Most floor plans are copyrighted, so make sure you have permission to copy them.

263

Chapter 40 Project Trace Image

Importing an Image to Trace You can import a BMP, JPG or TGA image, such as a scanned floor plan, and trace it using elements from the catalog, creating a true 3D Home Architect® Design Suite model. To import an image to trace: 1.

In 2D plan view, select File > Import > Project Trace Image.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the file type you are importing from the File type drop box. You can import BMP, JPG or TGA files.

3.

Locate the file to import, then click Open.

4.

5.

If you want to reverse the image (i.e. flip it left to right), enable the Flip Horizontal check box. If you want to flip the image vertically (so it is upside down), enable the Flip Vertical check box. To change the scale of the image, enter the dimensions in the Length and Height edit boxes. Typically you would use the overall dimensions shown on the floor plan. For example, if the house is 70’ long, enter 70’ in the Length edit box. Keeping the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box enabled ensures that the image scales uniformly when one of the dimensions is changed. This prevents the image from becoming distorted.

6.

Click OK. A bounding box is attached to your cursor.

7.

Position the box in your drawing area, then click to insert it. The image is displayed.

264

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Matching the Floor Plan’s Drawing Scale If the floor plan is not the right size, you can scale it up or down to match the plan’s drawing scale. Having a correct drawing scale is important for tracing purposes so elements can be created at the correct size. To resize a project trace image: 1.

Select the trace image.

2.

Right-click and select Resize Image, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Resize Image.

3.

Find a wall with a known length, then select a point at each end of the wall.

4.

In the Resize Image dialog, enter the distance between the two points as shown on the floor plan, then click OK. The image is scaled instantly.

Tracing the Imported Floor Plan Tracing an imported image is easy — just use the Insert tools described earlier in this User’s Guide. •

•

To trace foundation walls, see Creating a Basement or Crawlspace Foundation on page 44. To trace ground floor exterior walls, see

Drawing the Ground Floor Exterior Walls • • • • •

on page 54. To trace interior walls, see Drawing Interior Walls on page 57. To insert doors, see Inserting Doors on page 62. To insert windows, see Inserting Windows on page 66. To insert wall openings, see Inserting Wall Openings on page 70. To insert stairs, see Inserting Stairs and Ramps on page 82.

Deleting a Project Trace Image • •

To insert cabinets, appliances and other elements, see chapters 14-20. To insert plants, see Inserting Plants on page 204.

Deleting a Project Trace Image Once you’re done tracing a floor plan, you can delete the trace image from your drawing, leaving just your 3D Home Architect® Design Suite model on the screen. To delete a project trace image: 1.

Select the trace image.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If you prefer you can just hide the project trace image from view instead of deleting it. See Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images on page 37.

User’s Guide

265

40

Chapter

Photo Boards 3D Home Architect® Design Suite lets you import digital photographs or scanned images into your work space. The image is oriented vertically in 3D view, much like a billboard. You could, for example, import a picture of your backyard, so when you look out the window, it feels like you’re home. A photo board can be stationary or set to rotate with the camera so it’s always facing you. You can also control the height and width of the photo board. The handy Photo Board Wizard steps you through the process quickly and easily.

267

Chapter 41 Photo Boards

Importing a Photo Board

4.

A photo board is simply a digital image that is oriented vertically in your 3D workspace. You can import any image you want — your family, pets, neighbor’s house — the only limit is your imagination. The handy Photo Board Wizard does it all in a few quick steps.

Click the Select button, then select the image you want to import. You can import BMP, JPG and TGA files. The image is displayed in the preview window.

5.

Define the size of the image by entering values in the Height and Width edit boxes. Generally you should specify a size that is as close to reality as possible. For example, if the image is of a person who is six feet tall, you should enter a value close to 6’ in the Height edit box.

6.

Click Next.

7.

Specify whether you want the photo board to be stationary or active. If Stationary is selected, the board will always remain oriented the same way, regardless of changes in your camera angle. If Billboard is selected, the photo board will rotate toward the camera so it will always face you in 3D.

To import a photo board: 1.

2.

3.

268

Select File > Import > Photo Board Wizard.

Click Next.

Type a name for your photo board.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog 8.

Click Next.

Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog The catalog contains a collection of photo boards containing pictures of animals. If you have saved your imported photo board to the catalog, it is also displayed with the existing photo boards in the catalog. To insert a photo board from the catalog:

9.

Click Finish. The photo board is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.

10. Position the photo board where you want it, then click to insert it.

1.

Select Insert > Photo Board.

2.

In the catalog panel, select the photo board you want to insert.

3.

Position the photo board where you want it, then click to insert it.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Photo Board You can move a photo board easily by just clicking and dragging it. To move a photo board:

11. Right-click and select Finish.

1.

Select the photo board.

Adding an Imported Photo Board to Your Catalog

2.

Hover your pointer over the board to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the board.

4.

When the board is where you want it, release your mouse button.

You can save a photo board that you have imported using the Photo Board Wizard to your catalog so you can insert it again in any project. To save your photo board to the current catalog:

Rotating a Photo Board in 2D Plan View

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to a catalog cursor.

You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a photo board about a selected point in 2D plan view.

2.

Click on the photo board in your drawing.

3.

Click Yes to save the photo board. The photo board is added to the current catalog.

To rotate a photo board: 1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate the photo board around.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the photo board, then release your mouse button.

User’s Guide

269

41

Chapter 41 Photo Boards

Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board You can raise or lower a photo board using the Elevate tool on the right-click menu.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

Edit the Height or Width in the Properties area. If Maintain Aspect Ratio is checked, the height will automatically change if you edit the width, and vice versa. This ensures the image doesn’t get distorted.

4.

Click OK.

To raise or lower a photo board: 1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is the current elevation of the photo board.

3.

4.

In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the photo board above the terrain. Click OK.

Tip: You can also change a photo board’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the photo board’s Behavior property page.

Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa You can choose whether a photo board is stationary or rotating after it has been inserted. A stationary board keeps the same orientation regardless of changes in the camera angle. A rotating board always rotates towards the camera. To change a photo board’s type: 1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Type area, click Stationary for a stationary photo board, or Billboard for a rotating photo board.

4.

Click OK.

Deleting a Photo Board You can delete a photo board in a couple of easy steps. To delete a photo board: 1.

Select the photo board.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, rightclick and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images You may find that you want to make portions of your photo board image transparent for a more realistic effect. If the image is of a person, for example, you may want to make the background in the image transparent so that when you insert the photo board in your drawing, you see just the person in your 3D view. To create transparency in your photo board image, you need to use a graphic editing program such as Microsoft® Paint to apply a magenta color to those portions you want to make transparent. Magenta background

Editing the Size of a Photo Board You can edit the height and width of a photo board after it has been inserted. To edit the size of a photo board:

The RGB color settings for magenta are as follows:

1.

Red: 255 Green: 0 Blue: 255

270

Select the photo board. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images Once you have finished editing the image in the graphic editing program, you can re-import the image into 3D Home Architect® Design Suite using the Photo Board Wizard.

Photo board with no transparency

Photo board with transparency

User’s Guide

271

41

Chapter

Text & Dimensions Using text tools you can add text to any area of your drawing. You may want to add a title to the plan, or label rooms or specific elements. You can use whatever fonts and colors you want. Dimensions are used to convey precise measurements. You can dimension the exterior of your design instantly, and quickly insert interior dimensions with a few simple mouse clicks. This chapter describes all text and dimension tools.

273

Chapter 42 Text & Dimensions

Adding Text to Your Drawing

6.

Click OK. The text is attached to your cursor.

7.

Position the text where you want it, then click to insert it.

You can add text of varying size, color and font to your drawings. Text can be moved and rotated after it has been inserted, just like most other elements.

Moving Text

To add text to your drawing:

You can move text by simply clicking and dragging it.

1.

Select Tools > Text > Add Text, or click the Add Text button on the Notation toolbar.

To move text: 1.

Select the text you want to move.

2.

Position your pointer over the blue grab handle to display the Move cursor.

3.

Click and drag to move the text, then release your mouse button.

Rotating Text You can change the angle of text using the Rotate tool. To rotate text: 1.

Select the text you want to rotate.

2.

Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.

2.

In the Text dialog, type the text you want to add. If you want to import a text (*.txt) file, click Import, then select the file to import.

3.

Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around — typically the blue grab handle.

3.

To select a style for the text, click the Text Style button and select or create a text style in the Text Styles dialog.

4.

Move your mouse to rotate the text in the desired direction.

4.

By default, text is left justified. For multi-line text, this means that text lines will line up on the left, and be ragged on the right. If you want to change the justification of the text, click the appropriate button in the bottom left corner of the dialog.

5.

When the text is at the desired rotation, click to set the position.

Left Justified

Right Justified Centered

5.

274

If you want to automatically return to the Text dialog after you have inserted the current text, enable the Multiple text insert check box. This is ideal when you want to insert different pieces of text in your drawing without having to select the Add Text tool again. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing Text Content You can edit the content of a text element by accessing its properties. To edit text: 1.

Select the text you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Text dialog, edit the text in the text window.

4.

Click OK.

Changing the Style of Text

Changing the Style of Text Text style settings include font, font style, size, and color. You can select a different text style for selected text, or edit individual text style properties. To change the style of text:

Note: Text styles that are edited or added through inserted text are saved with the current project only. If you want to save them in the text styles library file, so that they can be made available in other projects, see Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File on page 363.

Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text

1.

Select the text whose style you want to change.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

You can change the way multiple lines of text are aligned.

3.

In the Text dialog, click Text Style.

To change the justification of text: 1.

Select the text you want to edit.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Text dialog, click the appropriate justification button below the editing window. Left Justified

Right Justified Centered

4. 4.

In the Text Styles dialog, select a new text style, or edit the individual properties of the current text style. You can also create a new text style by clicking the Add Item button.

Click OK.

Deleting Text You can delete selected text from your drawing in a couple of easy steps. To delete text:

Font. A set of text characters in a specific style and size.

1.

Select the text you want to remove. You can select multiple entries using Shift+click.

Font Style. The style of text. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Text Height. The size of text. Text Color. The color of text. Click the swatch to access the Color dialog and select a color. 5.

Click OK in the Text Styles dialog.

6.

Click OK in the Text dialog. The text is changed automatically.

Adding Text with a Leader You can insert text with an arrow attached to it that points to a particular element or area in your drawing. The leader has two segments and can be oriented in any fashion.

User’s Guide

275

42

Chapter 42 Text & Dimensions To add a text with leader: 1.

Select Tools > Text > Add Text with Leader, or click the Add Text with Leader button on the Notation toolbar.

Changing the Leader Arrow Style The leader arrow style is determined by the current dimension style, which by default is the Standard dimension style. You can change the style of the leader arrow by editing the properties of the dimension style, or by selecting a dimension style with the desired arrow style setting. To change the style of a leader arrow:

2.

In the Leader Text dialog, type the text you want to appear with the leader, then click OK.

3.

In the drawing area, select the point where you want the arrowhead to appear.

4.

Move your pointer to stretch the leader, then select the middle point of the leader.

5.

Select a third point for the leader. The text is inserted. 2

1.

Click on the text with leader to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click the Edit button. (Alternatively, if you have imported a dimension style with the desired arrow style setting, just select it in the dimension style list.)

4.

In the Edit Dimension Styles dialog, enable the Leaders radio button on the Lines and arrows page.

5.

Select the desired arrow style in the Arrow type area. You can change the dimensions of the arrow in the parameters window.

6.

Click OK in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog.

7.

Click OK in the Dimension Styles dialog.

3

1

Moving and Stretching a Leader You can move or stretch a leader by clicking and dragging its grab handles. To move/stretch a leader: 1.

Click on the text with leader to select it. Grab handles appear on the leader.

2.

Click and drag a grab handle to move the handle, then release your mouse button.

276

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Moving Leader Text

Moving Leader Text If you have inserted text with a leader, you can move the text independently of the leader. To move leader text: 1.

Click on the text with leader to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Move Text, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Text.

3.

Click and drag the text to move it, then release your mouse button.

Editing Leader Text If you have inserted text with a leader, you can change the text to whatever you want.

measurements of your floor plan. You can control the style of these dimensions, and move and stretch them if you need to.

Setting the Current Dimension Style When you add dimensions to your drawing, they use the current dimension style, which by default is the Standard dimension style. To view the properties of the current style, or select a different style to use, you need to access the Dimension Styles library for the current drawing. To set the current dimension style: 1.

Select Settings > Dimension Styles.

2.

Select the style you want to use. To view or edit the properties of the style, click Edit. See Dimension Style Properties on page 282 for more information.

To edit leader text: 1.

Click on the text with leader to select it.

2.

Right-click and select Edit Text, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Edit Text.

3.

In the Leader Text dialog, edit the text as desired, then click OK.

Deleting Text with a Leader You can delete text with a leader in a couple of easy steps. To delete a leader with text: 1.

Click on any part of the leader or text. The entire leader with text is selected.

3.

Click Set Current to set the selected style as current.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

4.

Click OK.

Dimensioning 3D Home Architect® Design Suite automatically displays on-screen dimensions as you draw, making it easy to draw walls at correct lengths, and insert elements like doors and windows precisely where you want them. These dimensions are drawing aids only that disappear once you have inserted the element. Using 3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s selection of Dimension tools, you can add fixed dimensions to your drawing to convey the precise User’s Guide

277

42

Chapter 42 Text & Dimensions

Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions

To specify exterior dimension settings: 1.

Select Settings > Auto Dimension Settings.

2.

In the Auto Dimension Settings dialog, specify your settings on the Auto Exterior page. They are described below.

The Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions tool automatically dimensions the exterior walls of your home. By default, three dimension strings are created: one for openings, one for wall segments, and an overall dimension for each side of the model.

Openings Walls Overall

Include Dimension String for: Overall. The outermost dimension string that dimensions the overall length of each exterior wall. Note: You can control which dimension strings are created, as well as how walls and wall elements are dimensioned. You must specify these settings before the dimensions are created. See Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings on page 278. To create automatic exterior dimensions: 1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions, or click the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar.

Projections. String that dimensions all projecting points along an exterior wall. If a wall has no projections, this string will be identical to the overall dimension string.

Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings Before using the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions tool to create automatic exterior wall dimensions, it is a good idea to specify the settings for the exterior dimensions. These settings control how the walls and wall elements (doors, windows, openings, etc.) are dimensioned.

278

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Openings: String that dimensions all major projections and all openings in the exterior walls, including door and window openings. Openings

Creating Auto Interior Dimensions can be dimensioned on center, or to the outside edges (see the Openings area of the dialog).

walls to be dimensioned on center, or to the walls’ outside edges.

Creating Auto Interior Dimensions The Auto Interior Dimensions tool automatically dimensions interior walls in your model.

Interior Walls: String that dimensions to all major projections and each interior wall that projects into the exterior wall. Interior walls can be dimensioned on center, or to the walls’ outside edges (this is specified in the Interior Walls area of the dialog).

To create automatic interior wall dimensions, you draw a base line through your model. Dimensions are created for any walls along that line (running in the same direction as the line). Before creating automatic interior dimensions, you may want to specify the interior dimension setting, which determines exactly how the walls are dimensioned. See Specifying Interior Dimension Settings on page 280. To create automatic interior dimensions:

Dimension Line Distances

1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Auto Interior Dimensions, or click the Auto Interior Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar.

2.

Select a start point for the base line that is outside of the model.

Dim Line Spacing: The spacing between successive dimension lines (when two or more strings are used). Dimension Offset: The distance between the first dimension string and the walls. Openings If you are including a dimension string for openings, you can specify whether you want the openings to be dimensioned on center, or to the edges of the openings. Extension Lines Extension lines extend from the dimension line toward the walls being dimensioned. In situations where dimension points are not parallel with each other, you can specify whether you want the extension lines to extend all the way to the dimension points, or whether you want them to line up with the shortest dimension point. Interior Walls If you are including the Interior Walls dimension string, you can specify whether you want the User’s Guide

279

42

Chapter 42 Text & Dimensions 3.

Select an end point for the base line that is outside of the model. Dimensions are created along that line.

2.

In the Auto Dimension Settings dialog, select the Auto Interior tab.

3.

Select the desired dimension option.

4.

Click OK. You can now proceed with creating auto interior dimensions.

2

1

Creating Linear Dimensions A linear dimension is a horizontal or vertical dimension with extension lines going vertically (for a horizontal linear dimension) or horizontally (for a vertical linear dimension) to the origins of the extension lines, which define the endpoint of the dimension.

4.

Right-click and select Finish.

Specifying Interior Dimension Settings If you are using the Auto Interior Dimensions tool to create automatic interior wall dimensions, you can specify how you want the walls dimensioned before creating the dimensions. By default, walls are dimensioned on center. If you prefer you can dimension walls to one side or both sides. To specify the auto interior dimension setting: 1.

280

Select Settings > Auto Dimension Settings.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

This tool is ideal for creating interior dimensions, or dimensions on a landscape plan.

Creating Aligned Dimensions To create linear dimensions: 1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Linear Dimensions, or click the Linear Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar.

2.

Click a point in your drawing to begin the dimension line.

3.

Move your mouse (you do not have to hold the mouse button down) to a second point and click. A dimension line including offsets, arrows and a numerical value is added to your drawing.

4.

Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch your extension lines. When the extension lines are the desired length, click to finish the dimension.

Creating Aligned Dimensions An aligned dimension is similar to a linear dimension, except it tilts to the same angle as the element you are dimensioning, making it the ideal choice for elements that are not horizontal or vertical.

arrows and a numerical value is added to your drawing. 4.

Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch your extension lines. When the extension lines are the desired length, click to finish the dimension.

Moving a Dimension Line You can move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line tool. When you move a dimension line, the extension lines stretch to accommodate the move. To move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line tool: 1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Right-click and select Move Dimension Line, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Dimension Line.

3.

Click any point to serve as the base point for the move.

4.

Move your mouse in the direction you want to move the dimension line.

5.

Click to finish the move.

Stretching Dimensions You can make a dimension longer or shorter, or stretch either of its extension lines. When you stretch the length of a dimension, the dimension value updates automatically to reflect the new length. To adjust the length of a dimension: 1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Click on one of the lower extension grab handles, then drag the dimension to stretch it. Note that it is possible to stretch the extension line at the same time.

To create aligned dimensions: 1.

Select Tools > Dimensions > Aligned Dimensions, or click the Aligned Dimensions button on the Notation toolbar.

2.

Click a point in your drawing to begin the dimension line.

3.

Move your mouse (you do not have to hold the mouse button down) to a second point and click. A dimension line including offsets,

Grab handle

3.

Release your mouse button.

User’s Guide

281

42

Chapter 42 Text & Dimensions To adjust the length of extension lines: 1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Click the grab handle at the end of the extension line, then drag to stretch the extension line.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Changing the Style of a Dimension You can change a dimension’s line, arrow and text style by applying a different dimension style to it, or by editing dimension style properties. To change the style of a dimension: 1. 2.

Select the dimension. You can select multiple dimensions using Shift+click. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File on page 367.

Deleting a Dimension You can delete a dimension in a couple of easy steps. To delete a dimension: 1.

Select the dimension.

2.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Dimension Style Properties You can control a dimension’s line, arrow and text style properties.

Anatomy of a Dimension Dimension Line

Text Arrow, Tick or Dot

Extension Line

Lines and Arrows 3.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, select the style you want to apply to the dimension. To create a new dimension style, click the Add Item button, then type a name for the style and press ENTER. To edit the properties of the currently selected dimension style, click Edit, then make your changes in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog. See Dimension Style Properties on page 282.

4.

With the desired style selected, click Set Current.

5.

Click OK.

Note: Dimension styles that are edited or added through inserted dimensions are saved with the current project only. If you want to save them in the dimension styles library, so they can be made available in other projects, see Saving

282

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Arrow Type You can specify an arrow type for dimensions and leaders (leaders are used with the Text with Leader tool). Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your arrow type.

Dimension Style Properties The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Extension Offset, Dimension Offset, etc.) vary depending on the arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window.

Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension line's angle.

Dimension Text

Distance: Distance between the text and the dimension line when placing text above the dimension line.

Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the dimension line.

Horizontal Text Position This is the position of the dimension text relative to the ends of the dimension line. Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension line. Distance from first end: Places the text a specific distance from the first end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box.

Units The units (e.g. feet and inches) and precision used to display the dimension value. Override system units: Uses the unit of measure specified in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog instead of the unit of measure specified in the program settings.

Distance from the second end: Places the text a specific distance from the second end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box.

Line Styles You can select a different line style for the dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line style determines the line type and color.

Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters or Inches. Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the choices are number of decimal places you can use.

Text Style Refers to the font, font style, text height and color of the dimension text. Click Text Style to select a style.

Vertical Text Position This is the vertical position of the dimension text relative to the dimension line. Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the dimension line.

To assign a different line style to a dimension component, select the component in the left pane, then select the desired line style in the right pane. For information about creating custom line styles, see the Linestyles chapter on page 355. User’s Guide

283

42

Chapter

Project Estimate 3D Home Architect® Design Suite keeps track of all the materials you use to build your home as you design it. You can generate a project estimate with a single mouse click. The resulting estimate is displayed in a detailed spreadsheet that can be saved and printed. You can even choose what locations you want included in the estimate. Sample unit prices are provided for your convenience, but you can specify custom pricing directly from your suppliers. The grand total is calculated for you automatically, making estimating a breeze!

285

Chapter 43 Project Estimate

Generating a Project Estimate You can view an accurate project estimate at any time during a design session. The estimate includes a list of materials, the quantities used, and pricing. The estimate is always up-to-date and reflects your project in its current state.

To turn grid lines off: 1.

To filter locations from the estimate: 1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, click the Filter Report button beside the report form drop box.

2.

To omit a location and its elements from the project estimate, click the location’s filter icon. You can omit landscaping elements from the report by filtering the terrain out.

3.

Click OK. The estimate is updated.

To generate a project estimate: 1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select View > Show Grid.

Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > Generate Project Estimate.

By default, the estimate is shown in Microsoft® Excel XLS spreadsheet format. You can switch it to a standard column report format, which can be saved as a TXT file. If you want you can remove the grid lines from the display. Materials are grouped by location, and there is a terrain category for landscaping materials. You can choose to omit selected locations from the estimate if you want.

To print the estimate: 1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select File > Print, or click the Print button to the left of the report form drop box.

2.

In the Print dialog, select the printer you want to use, then click Print.

The estimate can be printed and saved. To switch to a standard column report format: 1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select Standard Report Form from the report form drop box.

To save the estimate: 1.

In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select File > Save and Close, or click the Save and Close button at the bottom of the dialog.

Note: By default, the estimate is saved in the same directory where the project is saved.

286

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Opening a Saved Estimate To save using a different file name or save location: 1.

Click the Browse button next to the Report File edit box at the bottom of the Generate Project Estimate dialog.

2.

In the Report Filename dialog, select the location where you want to save the estimate.

3.

In the File name edit box, type the name you want to save under.

4.

Click Save. The estimate is saved under the specified name and location.

To open the estimate in the associated editor: 1.

Select File > Open with Associated Editor. If you haven’t saved the estimate yet, it is saved for you. The estimate is then opened in the associated editor. For estimates in the XLS format, the estimate opens in Microsoft® Excel. For estimates in the Standard Report (TXT) format, the estimate opens in a text editor such as Notepad.

To close the Generate Project Estimate dialog: 1.

Editing Material Pricing Most elements have a default unit price set for them in their properties. These prices are used in the project estimate. If you have already created your design, you can edit the prices of inserted elements by selecting them in the drawing, then editing their properties. Alternatively you can generate and save a project estimate, then edit the pricing in Microsoft® Excel or Notepad, depending on the report format you choose. If you edit the price of any element in the catalog, the price change will affect all new insertions of the element. To edit the price of an inserted element: 1.

Select the element in your drawing. You can select multiple elements of the same type using Shift+click.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

4.

Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.

5.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

Select File > Exit, or click the Close button in the top right corner of the dialog.

Opening a Saved Estimate Once you have saved an estimate, you can open it any time in its associated editor (Microsoft® Excel or Notepad). You can then edit and print the estimate if you want. To open a saved estimate: 1.

Select Tools > Calculate/Estimate > View Project Estimate.

2.

Click the Browse button, then locate the file to open.

3.

Click Open. XLS files open in Microsoft® Excel, and TXT files open in a text editor such as Notepad.

User’s Guide

287

43

Chapter 43 Project Estimate To edit material pricing in the catalog: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click and element in the catalog and select Catalog Manager.

2.

From the Element drop box, select the element type you want to edit.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group containing the element you want to edit.

4.

In the Select an Element window, select the element to edit.

5.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties.

6.

In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

7.

Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.

8.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

9.

Click OK.

288

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

3DTrueView™ 3D Home Architect® Design Suite incorporates powerful 3DTrueView™ rendering technology. 3DTrueView™ rendering adds light and shadow to a textured 3D view to achieve stunning, photo-realistic images of both the interior and exterior of your home. These images can be printed directly from the screen. You can also choose to save the rendered image to a bitmap (BMP) or JPG file that you can then open in most graphic editing applications. Creating a 3DTrueView™ rendering involves nothing more than a single mouse click. Just sit back and watch your design come to life!

289

Chapter 44 3DTrueView™

How 3DTrueView™ Rendering Works

Setting the Viewpoint for the Scene

A rendered view is a photo realistic view that includes light and shadows. When you render a 3D scene, the program performs a series of lighting calculations to determine the lighting in a scene. These are also called radiosity calculations. Once a final result is met, the scene is ray traced, or rendered. Ray tracing works by tracing the path taken by a ray of light through the scene, and calculating the ray’s reflection, refraction, or absorption whenever it intersects an element in the scene.

When you create a 3DTrueView™ rendering, your model is captured at the angle currently shown on the screen. In most cases, the best type of view for 3DTrueView™ rendering is a Perspective view, because it is the most realistic. For information about 3D viewing, see 2D and 3D Viewing on page 27. Specific topics you might want to look at:

Material properties define how light reflects off a surface. Direct light and ambient light levels define the light that is reflected. Direct light is light that is emitted from light fixtures. It has a specific color, intensity and direction. Ambient light can be thought of as a general level of light that is everywhere in the scene. Every light in a scene contributes to the overall ambient light in a scene. The first part of the radiosity process involves finding those element surfaces that are visible to direct light and calculating how much light is transferred to each element. Some elements will receive more light than others depending on their surface properties, and different surfaces will reflect different amounts of light. Still, each element will absorb some of the light, so the total amount reflected back into the scene will be less than that emitted by the light fixtures. The next part of the process involves finding the element that reflects the most light, and repeating the process. The element is considered a secondary light source, so we need to calculate how much of its light is transferred to other elements in the scene. The process is repeated, one step at a time, until the amount of light remaining in the scene is negligible in comparison to the light originally emitted by the light fixtures. We then say that the radiosity calculations have converged to a solution, and that’s when ray tracing begins.

290

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

• • • •

Viewing in 3D on page 29 Changing Your Viewpoint on page 322 Selecting a Preset Camera Angle on page 324 Changing the Viewing Field Angle on page 325

Setting the Scene Even though creating a 3DTrueView™ rendering involves nothing more than a mouse click, there are a few things you should consider beforehand. Note: It doesn’t matter what display mode (wireframe, patterned, etc.) you’re currently in. 3DTrueView™ renderings will always be textured.

Exterior Shots If you want to do an exterior shot, the most important factor to consider is sunlight. This is determined by your global position and time of day. By adjusting these settings, you control how much sunlight is in the scene, and from what angle it shines. See Defining Your Location and Time of Day on page 291.

Night Shots To create a night shot, you need to first set your background to a night scene. See Selecting a Background for 3D Views on page 327. Once your background is set, all you need to do is set the time to a time of day when there is no sun. If you do want to create a night shot, you will probably want to insert some exterior lighting in your design. See Inserting Landscape Lighting on page 228.

Defining Your Location and Time of Day

Interior Shots

a city if needed. Just click the Add City or Edit City button. You will need to know the longitude, latitude and time zone of the city. You can save new or edited cities to the city template for use in other projects if you want.

When creating interior shots, light comes from light fixtures that you have inserted in the room, and can also come through the windows if it is daytime. You can turn lights on and off as well as change their light bulbs for different light intensity and effect. For information about interior light fixtures, see Interior Lighting on page 127. To speed up the rendering process, you may want to turn off daylight temporarily so that only light from light fixtures is considered in the calculation. This is ideal when a room has small or covered windows, or no windows at all. See Turning Daylight Off on page 294.

Defining Your Location and Time of Day You can define where your model is located in the world, as well as set the time of day. This determines how much daylight there will be in the scene.

4.

To set the month and day, select a month by clicking the arrows on the month bar at the top of the calendar, then click a number on the calendar.

5.

To set the time of day, enter a time in the Time edit box, or use the slider to select a time. Enable either the am or fm radio button. Clicking Set Current Time reads the current time set in your computer system and defaults to the next smallest 5-minute increment of time. For example, 12:04 becomes 12:00.

6.

To keep track of changes in time due to daylight savings, enable the Daylight Saving check box.

7.

To set the angle from True North, enter a value in the Angle from True North edit box. This is the “geographic” North, as opposed to the “magnetic” North which you see on a compass. The value you specify determines where North is on your screen, and affects the angle of the sun for daylight rendering. The number in degrees that you enter is in relation to the 90° perpendicular orientation of your drawing. A value of 1º makes the top of the screen North. A value of 90º makes the top of the screen East, and the left side of the screen North.

To define your location and time of day: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Global Settings tab.

3.

Select a country and city from the appropriate drop boxes. You can add or edit

For more information, see “Specifying the Angle of True North” in the Online Help (enter the keywords “true north”).

User’s Guide

291

44

Chapter 44 3DTrueView™ It is assumed that information regarding building orientation to True North can be taken from, or calculated from, a surveyor's certificate. However, True North can be calculated from a Magnetic North reading taken at your building site. For more information, see “Calculating True North from Magnetic North” in the Online Help (enter the keywords “true north”). 8.

saved to a BMP or JPG file for later access. For more information see Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File on page 295. To create a 3DTrueView rendering: 1.

Make sure you have set the 3D scene exactly how you want it.

2.

Select View > 3DTrueView > Render 3DTrueView, or click the Render 3DTrueView button on the 3DTrueView toolbar. The solution begins. Before the rendered view is generated, the program goes through a process of calculating light in the scene. These are called radiosity calculations. Basically, it determines how much light is given off by the sun or by lighting fixtures, and how much light is reflected off the surface of elements. The view is updated at regular intervals during these calculations. A dialog appears on the screen that shows you the progression of the radiosity calculations.

Click OK.

To save new or edited cities: 1.

On the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog, click the Save button below the city list.

2.

In the Save As dialog, select the timezone.cty file in the program’s templates folder.

3.

Click Save.

4.

Click Yes to replace the original city template.

To load a saved city template into other projects: 1.

On the Global Settings page of the Program Settings dialog, click the Load button below the city list.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the timezone.cty file in the program’s Templates folder.

3.

Click Open. The city list is updated automatically.

Creating a 3DTrueView™ Rendering Creating a photo realistic 3DTrueView™ rendering involves only a simple menu selection or mouse click. Rendered views are displayed instantly on the screen once they’ve been calculated. If you enable the Render to File option in your render options, the image will also be

292

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

If you click Stop during the solution stage, radiosity calculations will stop, and the scene will be instantly rendered. This may be fine if the process seems to be taking a long time, but you may not get the result you want. 3.

Once the radiosity calculations are complete, rendering begins. Please wait while the image is generated.

Once the rendering is complete, it fills your current view window. The Rendering 3DTrueView dialog tells you that the image is complete.

Adjusting the Rendering Quality

4.

At this point you can print the view if you want.

To change the refresh rate during radiosity calculations:

When you are finished viewing the 3DTrueView™ rendering, click Close in the Rendering 3DTrueView dialog. The view returns to its original, pre-rendered state.

1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

If you selected the Render to File option before rendering, the image is saved in the same directory your project is located in. For more information, see Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File on page 295.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

Edit the value in the Change Display Every _ Steps edit box. Fewer steps increase the frequency of visual updates, but can increase rendering time.

4.

Click OK.

Adjusting the Rendering Quality By default, the quality level chosen for 3DTrueView™ renderings is Level 1 - Lowest (fastest). You can select an increased quality level before rendering if you want. Note that the higher level of quality you choose, the longer the rendering process takes. To adjust the rendering quality: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

Select the quality level you want from the Quality Level drop box.

4.

Click OK.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Rendered Image The program's "virtual camera" works in a manner similar to actual point-and-shoot cameras. It automatically calculates the correct "exposure" for the lighting situation and produces a view with infinite depth of field (i.e. everything is in focus). However if, in exceptional circumstances, you want to brighten or darken a rendering, you can use the Image Brightness option to manually override the automatic exposure. Brightness can be increased or decreased. To adjust image brightness: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

Specify the amount you want to increase or decrease the brightness in the Image Brightness edit box, or use the arrow buttons to scroll up or down. A positive value increases the brightness, while a negative values decreases it.

4.

Click OK.

Changing the Refresh Rate During Lighting Calculations As the program performs lighting calculations, the view updates at regular intervals to reflect calculations up to that point. You can change the interval at which the view refreshes by increasing or decreasing the number of steps between visual updates.

User’s Guide

293

44

Chapter 44 3DTrueView™

Turning Daylight Off

4.

By default, daylight is included in radiosity calculations, even for indoor scenes (light can come through a window). You can turn daylight off if you want. This basically omits daylight from the lighting calculations, and can speed up rendering.

Creating a Fog Effect

Note: The Enable Daylight option should always remain on for exterior shots, even if it is a night shot. If you want to create a night shot, change your time of day instead. See Defining Your Location and Time of Day on page 291.

To create a fog effect in your rendering, you need to turn on the Fog option in your rendering settings before rendering the view. To create a fog effect: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

In the Effects area, check the Enable check box.

To turn daylight off: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

Click OK.

4.

Enable the Fog radio button.

5.

In the Density edit box, specify the desired thickness of the fog. The higher the percentage, the thicker the fog. Click OK.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

Uncheck the Enable Daylight check box.

6.

4.

Click OK.

Creating a Smoke Effect

Using Antialiasing to Reduce Jagged Edges Antialiasing blends pixels in areas where two colors or two materials meet to reduce artifacts (or “stair steps”) and produce a more natural look to the scene. By default, antialiasing is disabled to increase rendering speed. You can select varying levels of antialiasing. To use antialiasing:

To create a smoke effect in your rendering, you need to turn on the Smoke option in your rendering settings before rendering the view. To create a smoke effect: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

In the Effects area, check the Enable check box.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

4.

Enable the Smoke radio button.

5.

3.

Use the up arrows key next to the Antialiasing check box to increase the level of antialiasing. The higher the level, the cleaner the image, but the longer the rendering process takes. The highest level is 4.

In the Density edit box, specify the desired thickness of the smoke. The higher the percentage, the thicker the smoke.

6.

Click OK.

1.

294

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures

Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures

Specular. Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny.

To adjust the color or intensity of light coming from a light fixture, you can add light bulbs, change a light bulb to a different type, adjust the intensity of the light, select a different color for the light, or turn a light off completely.

Emissive. The amount of light given off by a material. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it appears. Transparency. The degree to which a material is pervious to light.

See the following topics:

Color Bleed. The degree to which different colors blend where they meet.

Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source on page 129

Turning a Light On or Off on page 130

Editing the Surface Properties of Materials Different materials have different finishes. Surface finishes include Dull, Low Gloss, Semi Gloss, High Gloss, Liquid, Fully Reflective, Partially Reflective, Shiny, Fully Transparent, Partially Transparent, and Varnished. The finish determines how much a material reflects, emits and absorbs light. These factors can affect the lighting in a rendered scene. To edit the surface properties of an element’s materials: 1.

Select the element in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3. 4.

Click OK in the Edit Materials dialog.

9.

Click OK in the Materials dialog.

10. Click OK in the properties dialog.

Saving a 3DTrueView™ Rendering to a File Rendered views are displayed instantly on the screen once they’ve been calculated. If you want the image to be saved to a file, you need to turn on the Render to File option in your render settings before creating the rendering. The image will be saved to a BMP or JPG file that you can open in most graphic editing applications. To save a 3DTrueView rendering to a file: 1.

In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

On the Appearance page, click the Select button, or click the Texture swatch to access the Materials dialog.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

In the Image Output area, enable the Render to File check box.

4.

By default, rendered images are saved in the same directory your projects are stored in. By default, this would be the following directory:

5.

In the Materials dialog, click the Rendered swatch to bring up the Edit Materials dialog.

6.

To change the surface finish of the material (dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the drop box in the Surface Properties area. If you want to specify a custom surface finish, select Custom in the list, then click the Advanced button.

7.

8.

If creating a custom finish, specify its properties. These are described below.

C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents\Design Suite Deluxe 6\Projects To select a different location to save your rendered image in, click the Browse button next to the current output folder path. In the Open dialog, User’s Guide

295

44

Chapter 44 3DTrueView™ navigate to the folder where you want to store rendered images. By default, the file has the same name as your project for easy identification. To specify a custom name, enter the name in the File Name edit box. You can select either BMP or JPG as your file format from the Files of type drop box. 5.

Click OK.

If you want to create and save more 3DTrueView™ renderings within the same project, you need to specify a different output name for each new image before creating the rendering. To create and save an additional 3DTrueView rendering: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

In the Image Output area, make sure Render to File is checked.

4.

Click the Browse button next to the current output folder path.

5.

In the Open dialog, enter a name in the File name edit box that is different from any other images that you have saved. You can select either BMP or JPG as your file format from the Files of type drop box.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Specifying the Output Size of Rendered Images By default, 3DTrueView™ images fill the view window they are created from. If you enabled the Render to File option in your rendering settings, the image is also saved at that size. You can select another output size if you want. To specify an output size for rendered images: 1.

Select View > 3DTrueView > 3DTrueView Options, or click the 3DTrueView Options button on the 3DTrueView toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Rendering tab.

3.

In the Image Output area, select the desired size from the Size drop box. The default selection is Current View Size, which saves the image at the size currently shown on the screen. Pre-defined sizes include 640 x 480, 800 x 600, and 1024 x 768. Selecting the Custom option lets you define a custom size by entering values in the Width and Height edit boxes.

4.

Click OK.

Creating Multiple 3DTrueView™ Renderings in the Same Project If you enable the Render to File option before creating a rendering, the image is saved to a BMP or JPG file in your projects directory. The file has the same name as your project. If you create another 3DTrueView™ rendering in the same project, the file from the previous rendering is overwritten.

296

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

The next 3DTrueView™ rendering you create will be saved to the new file name.

Part 11

Managing Files Opening, Saving & Printing

page 299

Exporting Files

page 305

Chapter

Opening, Saving & Printing Once you have started and saved a project, you can work on it whenever you like. You can open a saved project by selecting the Open a Saved Project button in the startup dialog, or by selecting Open on the File menu if the program is already running. Once you have opened a project, you can edit, save, print and export it, as well as save it as a template for future projects. You can have more than one project open at a time. If you have more than one project open, you can switch between projects using the Window menu. As you edit your drawing, the changes you make are stored temporarily in your computer’s memory until you save them. The Save function saves the current project under its current name. You can use Save As to save a project under a different name, and Save All to save all currently open projects. You can also use the Save As tool to save a drawing as a template for use in future projects.

299

Chapter 45 Opening, Saving & Printing

Opening a Saved Project You can open a saved project (*.bld file) directly from the startup dialog that appears when you start the program. Just click Open a Saved Project, then select the project to open. If the program is already running, you can open a saved project using the Open tool. To open a saved project if the program is already running:

Files\3D Home Architect\Design Suite Deluxe 6\Samples). 3.

Select the project to open, then click Open.

Changing the Number of Files in the Recently Used File List By default, a maximum of four projects are listed in the recently used file list near the bottom of the File menu. You can increase or decrease this number if you want.

1.

Select File > Open, or click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.

To change the number of files in the recently used file list:

2.

In the Open dialog, navigate to the location where you saved the project.

1.

3.

Select the project to open, then click Open.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

Type the maximum number of files to display in the Recently used file list edit box, or use the arrows to select a number. You can list a maximum of 9 files.

Note: You can open drawings from version 5.0 or later of 3D Home Design Suite Professional, 3D Home Architect®, or 3D Home Landscape Designer. Tip: If the project you want to open is one that your recently worked on, it may be listed in the recently used file list near the bottom of the File menu. Just select it to open it.

Viewing Sample Plans The program ships with a number of sample projects that you can use to see what the program can do, and get design ideas. You can also use a sample project as a template for your own design project. Sample projects are available for selection in the startup dialog when you launch the program. Just click View Sample Plans and select one from the list.

Repairing Damaged Projects Occasionally a drawing may become damaged, usually when drawing walls. The Repair Project tool scans the project for elements that have caused damage, and either fixes or removes them. To repair a damaged project: 1.

Select File > Repair Project.

If the recovery is successful, the following dialog box appears:

If the program is already running, you can open a sample project using the Open tool. To open a sample plan if the program is already running: 1.

Select File > Open, or click the Open button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

In the Open dialog, navigate to the location where you installed the program, then select the Samples directory (e.g. C:\Program

300

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

If the recovery is not successful, a dialog appears telling you why it was not successful.

Saving Projects

Saving Projects The program as three save functions: Save, Save As and Save All. They are located on the File menu. •

•

•

To save the current project under the current name, or to save the current project for the first time, select File > Save, or click the Save button on the Standard toolbar. If you are saving for the first time, you are prompted for a file name. To save the current project under a different name (i.e. create a copy of it), select File > Save As, then specify a name in the Save As dialog. To save all currently open projects, select File > Save All, or click the Save All button on the Standard toolbar.

Setting the Automatic Save The Automatic Save option prompts you to save your project at regular intervals. This is a great way to make sure you save your changes regularly and avoid any loss should a power failure or system error occur. By default, the Automatic Save is enabled.

Note: When you are prompted to save your project, you can choose not to save at that time by clicking Cancel in the prompt dialog. If you want to disable the automatic save prompt, you can click Disable in the dialog. Note: Disabling the Automatic Save applies to the current project only. The Automatic Save is turned on by default for all new projects.

Specifying a Default Save Directory By default, new (unsaved) projects are saved in the following directory unless you specify otherwise: C:\Documents and Settings\\My Documents\Design Suite Deluxe 6\Projects You can specify a different default save directory if you want. To specify the default save directory: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Projects Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default save directory, then click OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

To set the Automatic Save: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

Enable the Automatic Save every check box.

4.

In the edit box, specify the save interval in minutes, or use the arrows to select a value.

5.

Click OK.

Saving a Project as a Template By default, every new project you start is based on a template. A template determines what settings new projects will have, such as the unit of measure, and building location settings. You can even include building elements in a template if you want. You can create a template out of any drawing by simply saving it in your Templates directory. To

User’s Guide

301

45

Chapter 45 Opening, Saving & Printing use the template in new drawings you need to select the template in your Startup options.

To select a default project template: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the Startup area, make sure the Startup using Project Template radio button is enabled.

4.

Click the Browse button next to the current template name.

5.

In the Open dialog, select the template you want to use from the Templates directory, then click Open. In the Program Settings dialog, click OK.

To create a template: 1.

Unless you have already created the drawing you want to use as a template, start a new project (File > New).

2.

Specify the settings you want to save with the template, such as your building locations and program settings. Note that any elements in your drawing will be saved as well, so unless you want these elements to appear in new projects, you should delete the elements from your drawing.

3.

Select File > Save As.

4.

In the Save As dialog, navigate to the program’s Templates folder (e.g. C:\Program Files\3D Home Architect\Design Suite Deluxe 6\Templates).

6.

5.

In the File name edit box, type a name for the template.

Disabling the Use of Templates

6.

Click Save.

Selecting a Default Project Template By default, new projects are based on a default template that ships with the program. If you chose to work in Imperial units during program installation, new projects will be based on the 1-Blank Project (ft & in).bld template, which is a blank drawing with measurements set to feet and inches. If you chose to work in Metric, new projects will be based on the template, which has its unit of measure set to millimeters. Each template contains three default building locations: Foundation, Ground Floor and Second Floor. You can select a different template to use as the default template when starting new drawings. You can use one of the templates that ships with the program, or one that you have created yourself.

Note: You need to start a new drawing to put the new template into effect.

By default, new projects are based on a template that determines the unit of measure used. Templates also have a few pre-defined settings, such as a set of default building locations. If you prefer you can start new projects without using a template. If you choose to do this, new projects will be blank with no pre-defined settings. To disable the use of templates: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the Startup area, enable the Do not use Project Template radio button.

4.

Click OK.

Setting the Path to the Templates Directory By default, the Templates directory is located in the 3D Home Architect Design Suite Deluxe 6 program group. If you have moved your Templates directory, or have chosen to store your

302

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files templates in a different directory, you should reset the path to the template directory in your program settings. The path you set determines the default directory shown when you browse for templates in your Startup options on the General page of the Program Settings dialog. To set the path to your templates directory: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Closing Projects Projects remain open until you close them or exit the program. You can close the active project without exiting the program. If you have more than one drawing open, make sure the drawing you want to close is the active one. To close a drawing: 1.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

Select File > Close, or click the Close button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Templates Directory to select it.

In the dialog, click Yes or No when you are asked to save changes.

3.

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory containing your templates, then click OK.

If you haven’t named the project yet and you clicked Yes in the previous step, specify a name for the project in the Save As dialog, then click Save.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files Certain functions of the program create temporary files which are stored in a directory on your computer system. By default, the path to the temporary directory is as follows:

Printing Drawings The program uses the standard Windows Print routine with a few added features for your printing convenience. To print a drawing: 1.

Select File > Print, or click the Print button on the Standard toolbar.

2.

In the Print dialog, specify your print settings.

C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Temp You can specify a different directory to store your temporary files in if you want. To set a different temporary files directory: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Temporary Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default temporary files directory, then click OK.

User’s Guide

303

45

Chapter 45 Opening, Saving & Printing Printer. Select a printer from the drop box. Click Properties to specify general printer properties.

The Fit To Page option scales the drawing to fit the selected paper size. Note that this is the default setting for 3D views, since 3D views are not affected by changes in scale (unless they are elevation views).

Print Area. The All option prints the extents of your drawing, which is the portion of your drawing that currently contains elements. As you add new elements, the extents update automatically. The Currently Displayed option prints exactly what you see on the screen in the current view. If only part of your drawing is currently visible, only that part will appear in the printout.

Placement on Paper. If you select Lower left, the image is printed in the lower left corner of the paper. If you select Center on paper, the image is centered on the paper. Graphics. Choose from three levels of print quality (150, 300 or 600 dpi). A higher resolution (600 dpi) produces graphic images that are sharper and show finer detail, while a lower resolution (150 dpi) permits faster printing and shows less detail.

Copies. Select the number of copies to print from the Number of copies drop box. Scale. The Print to Scale option prints the current view according to its defined scale in the view properties, regardless of the paper size. The scale is the ratio of drawing units to real-world units. A scale of 1:1 (12" = 1'- 0") creates a view that is the same scale as the view in the main drawing window. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0") creates a smaller-scale view. Note that if you change the scale, the model does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when you print the drawing. However, things like text and dimensions will scale on the screen because they are specified in real-world units, whereas the model on your screen is created using units that are only proportional to real-world units. Regardless of a view’s scale, things like text and dimensions will always print out at the size that was assigned to them at the time of insertion. For example, if you inserted text that had a 1/2” text height setting, the text will be 1/2” on paper, regardless of the view scale or what the text looks like on the screen. To see a view’s defined scale, select Edit > View Properties, or right-click in the drawing area and select View Properties, or right-click on a view’s tab below the drawing area and select View Properties. Note that the Print to Scale option will not work with most 3D views (unless they are elevation views), since 3D views cannot be scaled.

304

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

3.

Click OK.

Using Print Setup The program uses the standard Windows Print Setup for printer and paper selection. To select a printer and paper for output: 1.

Select File > Print Setup.

2.

Choose the options you want.

3.

Click OK.

Chapter

Exporting Files You can export your drawing to a variety of file formats including DXF, 3DS, WRL, BMP, JPG and TGA.

305

Chapter 46 Exporting Files

Exporting Your Model

5.

Click Save. The Export View dialog appears:

6.

From the Color drop box, select the desired color setting. Choose from Grayscale, 256 Color, High Color (16-bit), High Color (24-bit) or True Color (32-bit).

7.

From the Size drop box, select the desired output size. By default, Current View is selected, which saves the image at the size currently shown on the screen. You can choose from a list of preset sizes, or select Custom and enter the desired values in the Width and Height edit boxes.

8.

Click Save. The view is exported.

The Export 3D Model tool lets you export your drawing to three file formats: • • •

AutoCAD Basic DXF (*.dxf) Autodesk 3D Studio (*.3ds) VRML (*.wrl)

To export your model: 1.

Select File > Export > 3D Model.

2.

In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as type drop box and select the file format you want to export to.

3.

Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file.

4.

In the File name edit box, type a file name.

5.

Click Save. A dialog appears confirming the model has been exported successfully.

6.

Click OK.

Exporting the Current View The Export 2D Image tool lets you export the current view to a BMP, JPG or TGA file. To export a view: 1.

Select File > Export > 2D Image.

2.

In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as type drop box and select the file format you want to export to.

3.

Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file.

4.

In the File name edit box, type a file name.

306

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Part 12

Customization Screen Settings

page 309

Managing View Windows

page 315

Custom Viewing

page 321

Catalogs & Elements

page 333

Materials, Colors & Patterns

page 347

Line Styles

page 355

Text & Dimension Styles

page 361

Light Sources

page 369

Wizard Configurations

page 375

Chapter

Screen Settings 3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s screen environment is totally customizable, so you can create a work environment that is both functional and comfortable according to your personal needs. This chapter describes how to display, hide and move screen components, change the color of the drawing area and toolbar areas, and improve graphics display.

309

Chapter 47 Screen Settings

Displaying/Hiding Toolbars There are 12 toolbars available for display. (By default, not all of them are displayed.) You can hide or show individual toolbars by setting your workspace options. When you display a toolbar, it is displayed in one of the toolbar areas which are located directly above and below the drawing area. Note that if you hide a toolbar that is displayed in a tab, the tab is hidden from view as well. To hide or show toolbars: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Check the toolbars that you want to display, and uncheck those that you do not want to display.

3.

Click OK.

Tip: If a toolbar is currently floating freely on the screen, you can hide it by clicking the close button on its title bar, or right-clicking its title bar and selecting Hide.

Displaying Toolbars in Tabbed Format You can display any toolbar in tabbed format, meaning a tab will be added to the row of toolbar tabs below the menu bar. To display a toolbar in a tab: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Enable the check box of the toolbar you want to display in a tab.

3.

Enable the toolbar’s Tabbed check box.

4.

Click OK.

Displaying Toolbars in a Nontabbed Format By default, the Building, Interiors, Landscape and Terrain toolbars are displayed in tabs below the menu bar. You can change any tabbed toolbar to be displayed as a non-tabbed, free-standing toolbar.

310

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To display toolbars in non-tabbed format: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Make sure the check box of the toolbar you want to display is enabled.

3.

Disable the toolbar’s Tabbed check box.

4.

Click OK.

Changing the Background Color of Toolbars You can change the general background color of individual toolbars by changing your workspace options. This applies to both tabbed and freestanding toolbars. To change the background color of toolbars: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Click the Color box next to the toolbar you want to change.

3.

In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color, then click OK.

4.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas The program has two toolbar areas: one directly above the drawing area, and one directly below the drawing area. By default, the background color of these areas is dark blue. You can change this color in your workspace options. To change the color of toolbar areas: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars.

2.

Click the colored box next to the Toolbar Areas option.

3.

In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color for your toolbar areas, then click OK to return to the Program Settings dialog.

4.

Click OK.

Moving Toolbars You can drag any non-tabbed toolbar to any location on the screen. At window edges, the toolbar will automatically dock itself according to

Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel the location. For example, if you drag it to the right edge of the screen, it will assume a vertical orientation.

To resize the catalog panel if it is docked: 1.

If you drag it into the drawing window, it will float freely. You can then move it by dragging it by its title bar.

Position your pointer over the panel's left outside edge. (If you have moved the catalog panel to the left side of the screen, position your pointer over the right edge.) Watch for the Resize cursor to appear.

To move a toolbar: 1.

Click and hold your mouse button over the left grip end of the toolbar (or its title bar if it is currently in the drawing area). Resize cursor Toolbar Grip End

2.

Drag the toolbar to the desired location.

3.

Release the mouse button.

Displaying/Hiding the Catalog Panel By default, the catalog panel is displayed on the right side of the screen, as it is an essential component of the program. You can hide the catalog panel from view if you want. To display or hide the catalog panel: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars. Or, select Settings > Program Settings (or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar) and select the Workspace tab in the Program Settings dialog.

2.

In the Tool Display area, check or uncheck the Catalog Panel check box.

3.

Click OK.

2.

Click and drag the edge of the panel to stretch it in the desired direction.

3.

Release your mouse button.

To resize the catalog panel if it is free-floating: 1.

Position your pointer over one of the panel’s corners.

2.

Click and drag to stretch the panel.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Moving the Catalog Panel If the catalog panel is docked on one side of the screen, you can move it by clicking and dragging its outside edge. If you move a panel to the side of the screen, it will automatically dock itself to the edge of the screen. Otherwise, the panel is displayed in a free-floating window. If the panel is free-floating, you can move it by clicking and dragging its title bar.

Resizing the Catalog Panel When the catalog panel is docked at one side of your screen, you can make it narrower or wider by simply clicking and dragging its edges. If you have moved the catalog panel away from the edge, so it is free-floating, you can resize it by clicking and dragging its corners.

User’s Guide

311

47

Chapter 47 Screen Settings To move the catalog panel when it is docked: 1.

Position your pointer over the panel’s outside edge (the edge that is at the side of the screen). Watch for the Move cursor.

Move cursor 2.

Click and drag the panel to move it.

3.

Release your mouse button.

To move the catalog panel when it is free-floating: 1.

Position your pointer over the panel’s title bar.

2.

Click and drag the panel to move it.

3.

Release your mouse button.

Changing the Background Color of the Drawing Window By default, the color of the main drawing window is white. You can select a different color if you like. Note, however, that selecting a different background color can make some elements difficult to see depending on their color settings. To change the background color of the drawing window: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars. Or, select Settings > Program Settings (or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar) and select the Workspace tab in the Program Settings dialog.

2.

Click the colored box next to the Background option.

3.

In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color for your drawing area, then click OK to return to the Program Settings dialog.

4.

Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar

Hardware Acceleration

The Status bar can be toggled on and off as needed.

The Hardware Acceleration option controls how your screen responds during a work session. By default, hardware acceleration is enabled.

To display/hide the Status bar: 1.

Select Settings > Toolbars. Or select Settings > Program Settings and select the Workspace tab in the Program Settings dialog.

2.

In the Tool Display area, select or clear the Status Bar check box.

3.

Click OK.

Hardware acceleration increases the speed of your graphics display. When hardware acceleration is enabled, your computer takes advantage of any installed graphics card that supports hardware acceleration. If no card exists, and the Hardware Acceleration option is still enabled, your computer automatically defaults to slower software acceleration, which uses the Windows implementation of OpenGL. For detailed information about OpenGL, see the OpenGL topic in the online help. In most cases, it is best to enable the Hardware Acceleration option. However, problems sometimes arise with graphics cards on which hardware acceleration is poorly implemented. If you are experiencing display-related problems like scrambled line patterns, see the next topic, Improving Graphics Display.

312

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Improving Graphics Display To enable or disable hardware acceleration: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the Graphics area, check or uncheck the Hardware Acceleration check box.

4.

Click OK.

Improving Graphics Display The type of graphics card you have can affect the way the program’s graphics are displayed on the screen. If the display seems unstable or contains some graphic artifacts (e.g. large pixels), here are some tips on how you may be able to improve the display: 1.

Disable pre-selection. Pre-selection highlights elements when you hover your pointer over them, and displays tooltips. See Disabling Pre-Selection on page 23.

2.

Lower your screen resolution (to 1024 x 768, for example). To access this setting, rightclick your Windows desktop and select Properties. In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings tab.

3.

Lower your color setting in Windows. For example, if your colors are set to True Color (32 bit), change the setting to High Color (16 bit). To access this setting, right-click your Windows desktop and select Properties. In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings tab.

4.

If the above three methods fail to improve the graphics display, disable Hardware Acceleration in your Program Settings. See Hardware Acceleration on page 312.

User’s Guide

313

47

Chapter

Managing View Windows By default, your project has one view window called Standard. You can create additional view windows using the View Manager. Each view window can have different view settings. For example, you may want to keep the wireframe 2D plan view in the Standard view window, and create a new view window containing a 3D view of the model. When you create new view windows, you can switch between open view windows using the Window menu. You can also turn your view tabs on, which will display a row of tabs below the drawing area. This provides instant point-and-click access to all your view windows. You can display multiple view windows at the same time using the Tile Open Views and Cascade Open Views tools. View windows can be moved, resized and closed to create the exact arrangement you want. This chapter describes all the functions of the View Manager, how to navigate between view windows, and arrange view windows.

315

Chapter 48 Managing View Windows

Using the View Manager

Creating New View Windows

The View Manager contains a listing of view windows and lets you open, close, create, and edit views.

By default, your project contains one view window called Standard. You can use the View Manager to create new view windows and specify different view settings for each window. For example, you may want to create a view window dedicated to 3D viewing only.

By default, your project contains one view window called Standard. The scale of the view in this window is 1:48, or 1/4” = 1’-0”. Using the New View tool you can create new view windows. Each window can have different view settings. For example, you may want to display a wireframe, 2D plan view in the Standard view window, and create a new view window containing a 3D view of your model. Using the Window menu or view tabs you can switch between view windows as needed to see different views of your design. This can eliminate the need to constantly change the current view settings to see a particular view of your design. You can even display two or more view windows at the same time. You can edit the name and scale of views listed in the View Manager.

Views are stored in groups for easy organization and navigation. You can add view windows to the default group, or create your own groups if you want. For example, you might want to create a group for 3D views only, then add a set of 3D view windows to that group. To create a new group in the View Manager: 1.

Select View > View Manager.

2.

Click the Add Group button, or rightclick in the View Manager’s view window and select Add Group. A group is added to the list.

3.

Right-click the new group and select Rename.

4.

Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.

To access the View Manager: 1.

Select View > View Manager.

To rename a group in the View Manager: 1.

Right-click the group and select Rename.

2.

Type the new name, then press ENTER.

To delete a group in the View Manager: 1.

Make sure the group contains no views.

2.

Select the group and click the Delete button, or right-click the group and select Delete.

To create a new view in the View Manager: 1.

Select the group you want to add the view to.

2.

Click the New View button, or rightclick and select New View.

3.

In the View Properties dialog, type a name for the view window, then select a print scale for the view. The scale is the ratio of units on paper to realworld units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'-

316

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Turning View Tabs On 0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one foot of your model. This would be a rather large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however, would result in a smaller-scale view when the drawing is printed because every foot is represented by only one inch on paper. 4.

Click OK. The view is added to the View Manager, and becomes the current view window.

5.

Click OK in the View Manager dialog.

6.

Switching Between View Windows When you create a new view in the View Manager, the view appears in the program’s Window menu.

A new view window is created, and becomes the current view window.

Also, if you have turned your view tabs on, a view tab is created for the new view.

Select the desired view settings for the new view window.

To make a view window the current view window, simply select it from the Window menu, or select the view’s corresponding view tab below the drawing area.

Turning View Tabs On When you turn your view tabs on, a row of tabs are displayed below the drawing area. Each tab represents an open view in the View Manager.

If you have not created any new views in the View Manager, only the Standard view tab is displayed. To turn view tabs on: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the Workspace tab.

3.

In the Tool Display area, check the View Tabs check box.

4.

Click OK.

Tiling View Windows By default, only one maximized view window is displayed at a time. Using the Tile Open Views tool you can instantly tile all open view windows in the drawing area. This is a great way to see different views of your design while you are working on it. When you make a change in one view window, the design updates automatically in all other view windows. To tile all open view windows: 1.

Select Window > Tile Open Views.

Cascading View Windows By default, only one maximized view window is displayed at a time. Using the Cascade Open Views tool you can instantly display all open view windows in a stacked format, with the current view window on top. Once the view windows are cascaded you can move and resize each one if you want. To cascade all open view windows: 1.

Select View > Cascade Open Views.

User’s Guide

317

48

Chapter 48 Managing View Windows

Returning to a Maximized View If you have tiled or cascaded your open view windows, you can return to a maximized view (where only one view window is visible) by maximizing one of the open view windows.

To close a view window from within the window itself: 1.

Click the Close button in the top right corner of the view window. Application window controls View window controls

To maximize a view window: 1.

Click the Maximize button in the view window you want to maximize.

Close To close a view window using the View Manager:

Restoring the Previous Arrangement of View Windows If you tiled, cascaded or arranged your view windows, then maximized one of them, you can use the Restore Down button to return to the view window arrangement that was displayed before you used the Maximize button.

1.

Select View > View Manager.

2.

Select the view you want to close.

3.

Click Close View.

Opening View Windows that You Have Closed If you have closed a view window either through the View Manager or by clicking a view window’s Close button, you can open it again using the View Manager’s Open View button.

To restore the previous arrangement of view windows:

To open a view window:

1.

1.

Select View > View Manager.

2.

Select the view you want to open.

3.

Click Open View. The view window becomes the current view window. It appears on the Window menu as well as on a view tab if you have view tabs turned on.

Click the Restore Down button in the top right corner of the current view window. Application window controls View window controls Restore Down

Closing View Windows By default, the Standard view window is open when you start a project. Also, every time you create a new view window in the View Manager, that window is automatically opened for you. You can close individual view windows using the View Manager’s Close View button, or by clicking the view window’s Close button.

318

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Renaming a View Window You can edit the name of a view window as it appears in the View Manager, in the program’s title bar, and on the view tabs. You can do this in the View Manager, or by accessing the view window’s properties. To rename a view window when it is the current view window: 1.

Select View > View Properties, or right-click in the view window and select View Properties.

2.

In the View Properties dialog, type the new name in the Name edit box.

Editing the Print Scale of a View 3.

Click OK.

To rename a view window in the View Manager: 1.

Select View > View Manager.

2.

Right-click the view you want to rename, then select Rename. Or, select the view to rename and click the Properties button.

3.

Type the new name and press ENTER.

4.

Click OK.

To edit a view window’s print scale when it is the current view window: 1.

Select View > View Properties, or right-click in the view window and select View Properties.

2.

In the View Properties dialog, select the desired scale from the Scale drop box.

3.

Click OK.

To edit a view window’s print scale in the View Manager:

Editing the Print Scale of a View

1.

Select View > View Manager.

You can edit the print scale of a view by accessing the view’s properties.

2.

Select the view to edit and click the Properties button.

3.

In the View Properties dialog, select the desired scale from the Scale drop box.

4.

Click OK.

A view’s print scale is the ratio of units on paper to real-world units. If the scale is set to 1:1 (12" = 1'- 0"), twelve inches on paper will represent one foot of your model. This would be a rather large printout. A scale of 1:12 (1" = 1'- 0"), however, would result in a smaller-scale view when the drawing is printed because every foot is represented by only one inch on paper. Note that if you change the print scale, your 2D plan does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when you print the drawing. The scale you specify in a view window’s properties has a direct link to the Print to Scale option in the Print dialog. Changing the print scale has no effect in 3D views, neither on the screen nor in printouts, unless it is an elevation view. This is because a model being viewed in 3D does not have concrete measurements like a flat, 2D view has.

Deleting View Windows You can delete a view window by removing it from the View Manager. To delete a view window: 1.

Select View > View Manager.

2.

Select the view to delete.

3.

Click the Delete button, or right-click and select Delete.

4.

Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the view.

Things like text and dimensions will scale on the screen when you change the scale because they are specified in real-world units, whereas the model on your screen is created using units that are only proportional to real-world units. Regardless of a view’s scale, things like text and dimensions will always print out at the size that was assigned to them at the time of insertion. For example, if you inserted text that had a 1/2” text height setting, the text will be 1/2” on paper, regardless of the view scale or what the text looks like on the screen. User’s Guide

319

48

Chapter

Custom Viewing You can create your own custom 3D views and edit existing 3D views to suit your needs. For example, you can change the angle of the view, or the camera height. While in 3D view you can use a variety of navigation tools to walk through or fly around your house. 3D Home Architect® Design Suite also lets you view instant elevations of your design, and create custom elevations to suit your presentation needs. You can also draw a cut line through your model to create an interesting cross-section view of your model’s interior.

321

Chapter 49 Custom Viewing

Creating New 3D Views You can create a new 3D view by placing a new camera in your 2D plan view. Once you’ve inserted the camera, you specify the camera angle and viewing field angle by rotating and clicking your mouse. To create a new 3D view: 1.

While in 2D plan view, select View > 3D Model View > Place New Camera, or click the 3D Model View button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Place New Camera. A camera is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.

2.

Click to insert the camera where you want it.

3.

Move your cursor in the direction you want to view. Moving the cursor back and forth changes the camera angle.

4.

Once you have the desired direction and angle in place, click to select a location for the target.

Once you’ve defined the position and angle of your camera, the 3D view is instantly displayed. The view will appear on your 3D Model View menu and toolbar flyouts for easy access. (By default, the first view you create is called Camera1).

Changing a 3D View The position of the camera determines the point you are viewing your design from while in 3D view. By moving your camera you can change your viewpoint. See Changing Your Viewpoint on page 322. If you are currently in a 3D view, you can use navigation tools such as Walk Around and Slide to move the camera dynamically. You can find these topics later in this chapter, starting on page 326. You can also change what you’re focused on in a 3D view by moving the target. You can do this by displaying your cameras in 2D plan view and dragging the target icon to a new spot. See Changing the Target of Your View on page 323.

322

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

You can also change your camera height (page 323), target height (page 323) and viewing field angle (page 325).

Turning Cameras On and Off Every 3D view is controlled by a virtual “camera”. The Cameras On/Off function displays a camera icon on the screen. This gives you an idea of where you are viewing from. If you click on a camera, the target and viewing field angle become highlighted. This lets you know what the camera is focused on, and how much of your design is included in the view. When you have your cameras turned on, you can move cameras and their targets. You can also view the 3D view associated with a camera using the Look Through tool on a camera’s right-click menu. To turn cameras on: • •

Select View > Viewing Aids > Cameras On/ Off, or Click the Viewing Aids button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Cameras On/Off

In 2D plan view, all cameras for all 3D views are visible. (By default there are two: one for the 3D Perspective, and one for the 3D Overview.) You may need to zoom out to see them.

Changing Your Viewpoint Moving a camera changes the angle you are viewing from in 3D. You can change the position of a camera by turning your cameras on, then moving the camera in 2D plan view. When you switch back to 3D view, the view will be changed accordingly. To change your viewpoint for a 3D view: 1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Turn your cameras on. (See Turning Cameras On and Off on page 322.) By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The

Changing the Camera Height camera for the 3D Overview is located towards the right side of the model. 3.

Click on the camera you want to move.

4.

Hover your pointer over the camera’s blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move Camera.

5.

Click and drag the camera to move it where you want it.

By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The camera for the 3D Overview is located towards the right side of the model. 3.

Click on the camera whose target you want to move. The target is usually inside or near your model. It is marked with a blue grab handle.

4.

Hover your pointer over the target’s grab handle to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move Target.

5.

Click and drag the target to move it where you want it.

Changing the Camera Height The height of your camera determines the height you are viewing your model from. A positive camera height lets you look down on your model, while a negative camera height lets you look up at your model. A camera height of 0 would be like standing on the ground and looking at your model. The default camera height in the 3D Perspective view is 5’-6”. In the 3D Overview, the camera height is set to approximately 32’.

Changing the Target Height Raising or lowering your target can increase or decrease the steepness of the angle you are viewing from when looking through the camera. To change the target height: 1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties.

To change the camera height: 1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties.

2.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, type the height you want in the Camera Height edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values.

In the Camera Properties dialog, type the height you want in the Target Height edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

Changing the Target of Your View The target of a 3D view is the area you are focused on, or looking towards. You can change the position of a target by turning your cameras on, then moving the target in 2D plan view. When you switch back to 3D view, the view be changed accordingly.

Viewing in Perspective Mode When a 3D view is set to a perspective view mode, objects in the scene that are far away appear as if they are smaller; objects closer seem larger. This creates a more realistic view of the model than parallel mode because distance plays

To change the target of a 3D view: 1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Turn your cameras on. (See Turning Cameras On and Off on page 322.) User’s Guide

323

49

Chapter 49 Custom Viewing a part in the view. By default, the 3D Perspective view has its view mode set to perspective mode.

If the current 3D view is in parallel mode, you can change the view mode to perspective mode if you want. To change to a perspective view mode: 1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, enable the Perspective radio button.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

If you want to change the distance you are viewing from, you need to change the view angle in the camera properties, or move your camera.

Viewing in Parallel Mode When a 3D view is set to a parallel view mode, the view is set from a common angle, and distance is eliminated from the view. This provides an instant, close-up view of your design.

324

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

By default, the 3D Overview has its view mode set to parallel mode.

If the current 3D view is in perspective mode, you can change the view mode to parallel mode if you want. To change to a parallel view mode: 1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, enable the Parallel radio button.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

You can change the angle you are viewing from by selecting a preset camera angle in the Camera Properties dialog, or by moving the camera.

Selecting a Preset Camera Angle A convenient and effective way to quickly view your drawing from a number of different angles is to use the Preset Cameras in your camera properties.

Changing the Viewing Field Angle The nine preset camera angles show your drawing: • • •

program enlarges the image to fill the screen at smaller view angles, creating a close-up view.

looking down at an angle from above the four corners looking straight on from the four sides looking straight down from directly above (90°)

To select a preset Camera angle: 1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, click on one of the buttons in the Preset Cameras area.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

Interior with 45º View Angle

Note: You can change your viewing angle to any angle you want by moving the camera or using one of the dynamic navigation tools.

Changing the Viewing Field Angle The viewing field can only be changed in the 3D Perspective view, or views with their view mode set to Perspective. The viewing field refers to your field of vision. It works like a camera lens: higher values produce a wide-angle view; lower values produce a close-up view. Sometimes changing the viewing field angle makes it seem like you are zooming in or out. This is because for wide-angle views, the program needs to shrink the image to provide enough screen space to contain the view. Conversely, the

Interior with 120º View Angle

To change the viewing field angle: 1.

With the 3D view displayed, right-click in the drawing window and select Camera Properties.

2.

In the Camera Properties dialog, type the desired angle in the View Angle edit box, or use the slider to increase or decrease the angle.

3.

Click Apply to see the change.

4.

If the view is acceptable, click OK.

User’s Guide

325

49

Chapter 49 Custom Viewing

Walking Around in 3D View When you are in a 3D view, you can use the Walk Around tool to walk around your model, or even go right inside it. You can walk forward, backward, left or right. To walk around in 3D view: 1.

2.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Walk Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Walk Around, or click the Walk Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

• •

Drag to the right to rotate the model in a clockwise direction. Drag to the left to rotate the model in a counterclockwise direction.

Note: Model direction is the opposite of camera direction. For example, if the model appears to be moving clockwise, the camera is actually moving counterclockwise.

Sliding in a 3D View In a 3D view, the Slide tool moves both the camera and target at the same time.

Click and drag in the direction you want to move.

To slide in a 3D view:

•

1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Slide, or right-click in the drawing area and select Slide, or click the Slide button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2.

Once Slide is selected, you can do the following:

To move forward, click and drag upward. • To move backward, click and drag downward. • To walk left or right, click and drag left or right. If you click and drag up to the left, your path of motion will curve upward to the left, and so forth.

• •

Flying Around Your 3D Model

•

In a 3D view, the Fly Around tool revolves the camera around the target. •

To fly around your model:

Drag right to move your model view to the left. Drag left to move your model view to the right. Drag up (toward the top of the screen) to move your model view down (toward the bottom of the screen). Drag down to move your model view up.

1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Fly Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Fly Around, or click the Fly Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

Note: Model direction is the opposite of camera and target direction. For example, if the model appears to be moving to the right, the camera and target are actually moving to the left.

2.

Use your mouse button to orbit the camera. Your options are described below.

Spinning the View Using the Look Around Tool

•

In a 3D view, the Look Around tool revolves the target around the camera.

•

•

326

Click and hold the mouse button to slowly rotate the camera around the target on a level plane. Drag toward the top of the screen to make your model tilt downward like a boat coming off a wave. Drag toward the bottom of the screen to make your model tilt up like a boat riding onto a wave.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

To spin the view: 1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Look Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Look Around, or click the Look Around button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

Resetting the Camera in a 3D View 2.

Once Look Around is selected, you can do the following (presuming that your target is located inside or near the model): •

•

•

•

Drag right to move the target in a counterclockwise direction. Your model orbits around you in a clockwise direction. Drag left to move the target in a clockwise direction. Your model orbits around you in a counterclockwise direction. Drag up to lower the height and shorten the distance of the target. Your view becomes high-angle, and your model moves toward the top of the screen. Drag down to raise the height and lengthen the distance of the target. Your view becomes low-angle, and your model moves toward the bottom of the screen.

Note: Be careful when using the Look Around tool. It is very easy to lose sight of your model since the camera's "eye" is fixed in one direction only. It does not move to follow the orbiting target. Therefore, your field of vision is limited, and your model can quickly get above, below or behind you.

Selecting a Background for 3D Views By default, a sky image is displayed behind your model when you are in a 3D view. You can select a different image to display, including custom bitmaps that you have imported, or switch to a night scene. To select a background for the view: 1.

Select Settings > Background Settings, or click the Background Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Background Settings dialog, select either the Day Scene or Night Scene radio button. You would want to switch to a night scene if you are doing a nighttime 3DTrueView™ rendering of your model.

3.

Click on the current preview to access the Materials dialog.

Resetting the Camera in a 3D View If you have moved your camera, either by dragging it in 2D plan view or using a navigation tool like Walk Around or Slide, you can use the Reset Camera tool to move the camera back into its original position. Note that this tool is only available when the current view is a 3D view. To reset the camera to its original position: 1.

Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Reset Camera, or click the Reset Camera button on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

User’s Guide

327

49

Chapter 49 Custom Viewing 4.

In the Materials dialog, select a background from the Materials list. To add a material to the list (if you have your own bitmap, for example), see Customizing the Materials Library on page 348.

5.

Click OK in the Materials dialog.

6.

Click OK in the Background Settings dialog.

Viewing Elevations Elevations are 2D views that show a particular side of your house (front, rear, left or right) as if you were looking at it face on. While in an elevation view you can zoom in and out as well as change the display type.

target arrow that identifies the view direction of the elevation.

Back Elevation Mark

By default, four marks are displayed, one for each of the default elevations on the Elevation View menu. If you have created a custom elevation, a mark is displayed for that elevation as well. To turn elevation marks on or off: • •

Select View > Viewing Aids > Elevation Marks On/Off, or Click the Viewing Aids button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Elevation Marks On/Off

The marks are located at the extents of your drawing, so you may need to zoom out to see them. Sample Elevation

To view an elevation: 1.

Select View > Elevation View, or click the Elevation View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

From the flyout, select the elevation you want to view (Front, Back, Right or Left).

Tip: If you have your elevation marks turned on in your 2D plan view, you can switch to an elevation view by selecting an elevation mark, right-clicking it, then selecting View Elevation.

Turning Elevation Marks On and Off You can use the Elevation Marks On/Off tool to display elevation marks in your 2D plan view. An elevation mark contains the label given to the elevation in the elevation’s properties, as well as a

328

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

If you select and right-click an elevation mark, you can access a number of editing tools such as Properties, Move and Move Target. Selecting View Elevation displays the elevation associated with that mark.

Moving Elevation Marks By default, elevation marks are centered with your model, which means the model is centered on the screen when you view the resulting elevation view. If you move an elevation mark in your 2D plan view, the model may be moved left or right when you display the elevation view. Moving a mark closer to or farther away from the model has no effect on the resulting elevation view. To move an elevation mark: 1.

Select the elevation mark in 2D plan view.

2.

Hover your pointer over the mark’s blue grab handle to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move.

Changing the Target of an Elevation 3.

Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it.

4.

Right-click and select View Elevation to see the resulting elevation.

Changing the Target of an Elevation By default, elevation marks point straight at your model. The result is a completely face-on view when you display the resulting elevation view. If you rotate an elevation mark, you change the target of the elevation. This focuses the view on a different part of your design when you display the elevation view.

2.

To edit the name of the elevation as it appears on the Elevation View menu, edit the name in the Name edit box.

3.

To edit the text that appears on the elevation mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box.

4.

To apply a different text style to the elevation mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text Styles dialog. You can also edit the current text style if you want.

5.

Click OK.

Deleting an Elevation

To change the target of an elevation:

You can delete an elevation from the Elevation View menu by deleting its corresponding elevation mark in 2D plan view.

1.

Make sure your elevation marks are turned on.

To delete an elevation:

2.

In 2D plan view, select the mark whose target you want to change.

3.

Right-click and select Move Target.

4.

Click and drag to rotate the mark so it is pointing in a different direction.

5.

Right-click and select View Elevation to see the result.

Editing Elevation Properties You can edit the name of an elevation as it appears on the Elevation View menu, as well as edit the name and text style of an elevation mark.

1.

Make sure your elevation marks are turned on.

2.

In 2D plan view, select the mark to delete.

3.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete.

Creating a Custom Elevation You can create a custom elevation by inserting an elevation mark in your 2D plan view. Once you’ve inserted the mark, which represents your viewpoint, you can rotate it using your mouse to define the view direction. To create a custom elevation:

To edit elevation properties:

1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

1.

2.

Turn your elevation marks on. This is not necessary, but we recommend it so that you can see where other elevation marks are located. The default elevation marks are located at the extents of the terrain, so you may need to zoom out to see them.

3.

Select View > Elevation View > Create New Elevation, or click the Elevation View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar and select Create New Elevation. An elevation mark is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.

If the elevation view is currently displayed, right-click and select Elevation Properties. If you are currently in 2D plan view, select the elevation mark, then right-click and select Properties.

User’s Guide

329

49

Chapter 49 Custom Viewing 4.

Click to insert the new elevation mark. This represents your viewpoint, so naturally you would select a point in front of the model side you want to look at in your elevation.

5.

Move your cursor to rotate the arrow on the elevation mark and define the view direction. Once it is pointing in the desired direction (usually towards your model), click to finish.

4.

Move your cursor in the direction you want to view. The more you move away from the section line, the deeper your view becomes. Once the bounding box is the desired distance and direction from the section line, click to finish.

Once you’ve positioned the elevation mark, the resulting elevation is instantly displayed. It is also added to the Elevation View menu and toolbar flyout for easy access. (By default, the first view you create is called Elevation1.) Tip: You can change the name of the elevation as well as edit the elevation mark properties by editing the Elevation Properties.

Creating a Section View You can cut through any portion of your model to create a section view. Section views are a great way to see the interior features of your model that you are not able to see from the outside.

Once you’ve defined the section mark, the resulting section view is instantly displayed. It is also added to the Section View menu and toolbar flyouts for easy access. (By default, the first view you create is called Section1.)

Viewing Section Views If you have created section views, you can display them at any time using the Section View menu or toolbar. To view a section view: 1.

Select View > Section View, or click the Section View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar.

2.

From the flyout, select the section you want to view.

Sample Section

To create a section view, you draw a section line through your model in 2D plan view, then click to define the view direction and depth. To create a section view: 1.

Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2.

Select View > Section View > Create New Section, or click the Section View button on the Advanced View Control toolbar and select Create New Section.

3.

Select two points to draw a line that cuts through your model. This is the line you will be viewing from.

330

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Tip: If you have your section marks turned on in your 2D plan view, you can switch to a section view by selecting a section mark, right-clicking it, then selecting View Section.

Turning Section Marks On and Off

Turning Section Marks On and Off When you create a section, a section mark is displayed in the 2D plan view. The section mark contains markers at each end of the section line which indicate the direction of the section view. You can turn section marks on and off using the Section Marks On/Off tool. To turn section marks on or off: • •

Select View > Viewing Aids > Section Marks On/Off, or Click the Viewing Aids button on the Basic View Control or Advanced View Control toolbar and select Section Marks On/Off

Editing a Section View

display the Stretch cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Stretch. 4.

Click and drag to make the bounding box smaller or bigger. The bigger the box, the deeper the view.

5.

Right-click and select View Section to see the result.

Editing Section Properties You can edit the name of a section as it appears on the Section View menu, as well as edit the name and text style of a section mark. To edit section properties: 1.

If the section view is currently displayed, right-click and select Section Properties. If you are currently in 2D plan view, select the section mark, then right-click and select Properties.

2.

To edit the name of the section as it appears on the Section View menu, edit the name in the Name edit box.

3.

To edit the text that appears on the section mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box.

4.

To apply a different text style to the section mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text Styles dialog. You can also edit the current text style if you want.

5.

Click OK.

You can edit a section view by moving the section mark associated with the section view, or by stretching the bounding box attached to the section line. By moving a section mark you are changing your viewpoint. By stretching the bounding box, you are changing the depth of the view. To change your viewpoint by moving the section mark: 1.

In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on.

2.

Click on the section mark.

3.

Hover your pointer over the blue grab handle on the section line to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and select Move.

4.

Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it.

5.

Right-click and select View Section to see the result.

To change the depth of the section view: 1.

In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on.

Deleting a Section View

2.

Click on the section mark.

3.

Hover your pointer over the blue grab handle on the bounding box line to

You can delete a section from the Section View menu by deleting its corresponding section mark in 2D plan view.

User’s Guide

331

49

Chapter 49 Custom Viewing To delete a section: 1.

Make sure your section marks are turned on.

2.

In 2D plan view, select the mark to delete.

3.

Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete.

332

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Catalogs & Elements 3D Home Architect® Design Suite’s Catalog Manager lets you add, edit and delete elements to suit your needs. You can also create new, custom catalogs that contain a specific selection of elements. You can open any catalog you want during a work session to gain access to the elements you want. Another great feature is Save Element to Catalog, which lets you save an element that you have edited in your drawing to the current catalog.

333

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements

Using the Catalog Manager The program’s Catalog Manager provides full control of new and existing catalogs.

To view a listing of a particular element type: 1.

Select the element from the Element drop box.

To view the properties of an element: 1.

Select the element in the Select an Element window.

2.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties.

Adding a Group to a Catalog All elements are organized by group. For example, walls are grouped under Exterior Walls, Interior Walls, or Foundation Walls. This helps you locate specific element types quickly. You can add groups to any catalog using the Add Group tool. Using the Catalog Manager you can:

To add a group to the current catalog:

•

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

Select Catalog > Add Group, or right-click in the Select a Type window and select Add Group.

4.

Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.

5.

Select File > Save Catalog.

• • • • •

View the contents and properties of any catalog Add groups and elements to a catalog Delete groups and elements from a catalog Edit elements in a catalog Import elements into a catalog from another catalog Create and save new catalogs

To access the Catalog Manager: 1.

334

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Renaming a Group in a Catalog

Renaming a Group in a Catalog You can change the name of any group in a catalog using the Rename Group tool. To rename a group: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

To edit an element in a catalog: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group containing the element you want to edit.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

4.

In the Select an Element window, select the element to edit.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to rename.

5.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties.

4.

Select Catalog > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group.

6.

Edit the properties as desired. See Working with Property Pages on page 339 for more

5.

Type the new name and press ENTER.

6.

Select File > Save Catalog.

Deleting a Group in a Catalog

information. 7.

Click OK to return to the Catalog Manager.

8.

Select File > Save Catalog.

You can delete a group in a catalog provided it contains no elements.

Note: Editing elements in a catalog has no effect on elements already inserted in your drawing. It only affects future insertions of the element.

To delete a group in a catalog:

To add a new element to a catalog:

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to delete. Note that the group can only be deleted if it contains no elements.

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to add the element to.

4.

Select Catalog > Delete Group, or right-click and select Delete Group.

4.

Select Catalog > Add Element.

5.

Select File > Save Catalog.

Elements like furniture, appliances and accessories can be defined based on a set of general parameters, or by importing a 3D

Adding and Editing Elements in a Catalog Every element has a number of different properties that determine its size, geometry and appearance. You can edit these properties to suit your needs. If you want you can create a new element instead of editing an existing one. Note: You can’t edit elements in the catalog panel. You need to use the Catalog Manager.

User’s Guide

335

50

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements Studio file. If this is the case, you will see a dialog similar to the following:

Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog If you have edited the properties of an inserted element, you can save that element (and its custom properties) to the current catalog. To add an edited element from your drawing into the current catalog:

To define the element by specifying size properties, select the Use a Parametric Template radio button, select the specific element type you want to create (chair, table, etc.), then click OK. To import a 3D Studio file, select the Import geometry from file radio button, click OK, then select the desired 3D Studio file. Some elements, like electronics, will prompt you directly for a 3D Studio file because they do not have a parametric template. For more information, see Importing 3D Studio Files on page 336. 5.

Define the element's properties. (See Working with Property Pages on page 339.) Note that if the Auto Name check box is enabled, the element will be automatically named for you. For example, if you are creating a wall and select Masonry for the wall type, and specify a width of 6”, the name automatically becomes 6” Masonry Wall. For more information about automatic name generation, see Using Automatic Name Generation on page 339.) If you want to give the element a different name, disable the Auto Name check box and type the desired name in the Name edit box.

6.

Click OK. The element is added to the catalog.

7.

Select File > Save Catalog.

336

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to a catalog cursor.

2.

Select the element in your drawing.

3.

Click Yes to save the element. The element is added to the current catalog.

Importing 3D Studio Files Many sites on the Internet offer free downloading of elements in 3D Studio (*.3ds) format. You can easily convert these files for use in 3D Home Architect® Design Suite. To import a 3D Studio file: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box (e.g. Furniture).

3.

In the Select a Type window, select the group you want to add the element to.

Importing 3D Studio Files 4.

Select Catalog > Add Element. In the Define Element dialog, select the Import geometry from file radio button.

5.

Click OK.

6.

In the Open dialog, select the 3D Studio file, then click Open.

a specific group, click Select, then select the desired group.

8.

Click OK in the Material Group(s) dialog.

9.

When you import a 3D Studio block, there is usually no way of knowing what units the designer intended for the block. In the Block Import Options dialog, select the unit of measure in the Convert File From drop box that will result in a logical Resultant Width, Depth and Height. Selecting Custom lets you specify a custom scale in the Custom Scale edit box. The scale is the multiplication factor of the units used for objects in the block. For example, if you're converting a file that you assume was created in feet and inches, the scale is 25.4.

10. Once logical dimensions are displayed, click OK in the Block Import Options dialog. 11. In the properties dialog, enter a name for the element in the Name edit box. Since 3D Home Architect® Design Suite can only import 3D Studio files, the only selection in the Create Components From drop box is Materials, since 3DS objects are essentially an assembly of materials. 7.

By default, the imported object’s materials will be stored in a new group in your materials library. If you want to store them in

User’s Guide

337

50

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements 12. Define the element’s properties. The element will already have size properties assigned to it that are taken from the 3D Studio file, but you can change these. You may need to edit the orientation of the element so that it inserts correctly in the drawing. 13. If you want to select a different 3D Studio file to apply to your new element, click the Select button in the Imported Element area of the properties dialog. Repeat steps 7-10. 14. Click OK. The new element is added to the catalog. 15. Select File > Save Catalog.

box. The larger the number, the less simplified the element will become. 7.

Click OK to return to the properties dialog.

8.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

9.

Select File > Save Catalog.

Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed You can hide certain parts of an element from view by changing its display properties. This applies only to some block elements like furniture and appliances.

Simplifying an Element

To control what parts of an element are displayed:

If an element looks too complex in the preview window, you can simplify it by reducing the number of polygons used to display it. This applies only to some block elements like furniture and appliances.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Locate the element in the catalog.

3.

Select Catalog > Element Properties.

4.

In the property dialog, click Display.

5.

To display or hide a component from view in 2D and/or 3D view, select it in the list, then click the appropriate eye icon.

To simplify an imported element: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Locate the element in the catalog.

3.

Select Catalog > Element Properties.

4.

In the property dialog, click Simplify.

Component is displayed Component is not displayed 5.

6.

338

To simplify the element, slide the ruler to the left. The Number of vertices in object and Percentage of simplification values update accordingly. To put a limit on how much simplification can take place, enter a value in the Min number of vertices per component edit 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

6.

Click OK to return to the properties dialog.

7.

Click OK in the properties dialog.

8.

Select File > Save Catalog.

Working with Property Pages

Working with Property Pages

Using Automatic Name Generation

When you access an element’s property pages, a multi-tabbed dialog is displayed. The tabs and properties vary depending on the element. The most common property pages are Basic, Appearance, Quantity and Behavior. The name, notes and hyperlinks properties are common to all property pages.

Names of elements are based on pre-defined formulas. The name 8" Concrete Wall is made up of three variables:

8” Concrete Wall Width

Type

Element

Each variable is separated by a space. These variables and spaces are defined in the name's formula. If you add or change an element, and select Auto Name, the element's name updates automatically in the catalog. For example, if you create a concrete wall, and define a width of 10", the name automatically becomes 10" Concrete Wall. Automatic name generation: Sample Properties Dialog

A preview of the element is shown in the preview window. By default, the image is displayed in a 3D rendered view. You can switch between 3D and 2D as well as select a different display mode by right-clicking in the preview window and making a selection from the menu.

•

Saves typing a name every time you add or edit an element • Ensures consistency in catalogs • Prevents duplicate entries if you forget to change a name To use automatic name generation when adding or editing an element, enable the Auto Name check box next to the Name edit box in the element’s properties dialog. Note: If Auto Name is not selected, you can type any name you want in the Name edit box.

Editing the Name Generation Formula When the image is in a 3D view, you can rotate it around by clicking and dragging with your mouse.

When you add or edit a catalog element, you can modify the formula used to generate the element's name if you are using automatic name generation. Formulas are made up of variables (like Element Class and Element Type) and separators (spaces, symbols or characters). Editing an element’s name generation formula sets the formula for any new elements you create of that type. For example, if you edit the name generation formula for an 8” Brick Wall, any new walls you add to the catalog will use the new formula if you use automatic name generation. User’s Guide

339

50

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements To modify the formula used for an element's automatic name generation:

11. In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

Basic Page

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

Select the element to edit.

4.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties.

5.

Click the Options button to the right of the Auto Name check box. The Automatic Name Generation dialog for that element type is displayed. The right pane (titled Used Variables and Separators) displays the current formula.

Most elements have a Basic property page, although the properties on this page will vary according to the element type. Generally there is a Type section, where you can select the specific element type, as well as a Properties section, where you can specify the dimensions of the element.

Sample Basic Page

Note: You can find detailed descriptions of size properties for specific element types in their respective chapters. 6.

To remove a component from the formula, select it and click Remove.

7.

To add a component to the formula, select the desired variable or separator in the Available Variables or Available Separators window and click Add.

8.

To move a component in the formula, select the component and click Move Up or Move Down.

9.

When you have finished modifying the formula, click OK to close the Automatic Name Generation dialog.

10. Click OK to close the element's properties dialog.

340

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Changing an Element’s Orientation Symbol elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them in your drawing. For example, tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit the orientation of most symbol elements. For example, you may want to flip an air register so that you can insert it on the ceiling in your basement.

Appearance Page To change an element’s orientation:

To change an element’s material:

1.

1.

In the Components pane, select the component whose material you want to change.

2.

In the Material area, click the Select button.

3.

In the Materials dialog, select the group containing the desired material. If you want to choose a solid color, select the Paint group.

4.

Select the material you want to use. The swatches in the preview windows update automatically. If you want to edit the material, click on one of the swatches to access the Edit Materials dialog. For information about editing materials, see Editing Material Properties on page 349.

5.

Click OK to return to the Appearance page.

6.

If you want to rotate the material on the element, enter an angle in the Rotation edit box, or use the arrows to scroll through a list of angles. This rotates the material in a clockwise direction.

7.

To shift the material on the element (left, right, up or down), use the Position arrows.

8.

Select another component in the Components pane and select a material for that component.

On the Basic property page, click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element. (Y, Z) axes: Rotates the element front to back, and vice versa. (X, Z) axes: Rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D. (X, Y) axes: Rotates the element left or right in 2D plan view.

Appearance Page The Appearance properties page is common to most elements. It provides control over the materials applied to elements, which come into play when you view your model in Rendered or Patterned mode. A material can be a texture, such as brick, or a color. This is what you see in Rendered mode. Materials also have a pattern assigned to them, which is what you see when you view in Patterned mode. The contents of the Components window varies depending on the element. It contains a listing of the individual components that make up the element, so you can apply a different material to each component.

Sample Appearance Page

User’s Guide

341

50

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements 9.

When all your materials are defined, click OK.

Quantity Page The Quantity properties page is common to most elements. It contains information that helps identify the element as a material, such as the manufacturer and price. Some of the information on this page is used in the project estimate.

Behavior Page The Behavior property page is available for symbol elements like cabinets, furniture and lights.

Sample Behavior Page

Sample Quantity Page

Manuf: The Manufacturer of the product. Supplier: The company or store who will be supplying the product. Price: The unit price of the product. Division: A construction division identification. In North America, CSI divisions are used. Part No.: Part Number. A series of numbers that identifies the product. Alt Code: Alternate Code. An extra identification code that is used to link an element in the program’s catalog to the databases of other applications, such as Timberline.

Usually this page contains a Distance above current location or terrain option which lets you control the height at which the element is inserted relative to the floor or terrain. The value entered is the distance from the floor or terrain to the insertion point of the element. (For most elements except windows and wall openings, the insertion point is at the bottom of the element.) Some elements have a defined Insertion Point, which is the point on the element that is attached to the cursor when you are inserting the element. Some elements also have a defined Snap Edge, which determines which edge of the element will snap to the wall if you position it near a wall. To edit an element’s insertion height: 1.

Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain edit box.

To edit an element’s insertion point: 1.

342

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Edit the values in the X Axis, Y Axis and Z Axis edit boxes, or use the sliders beside these edit boxes.

Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties An X value moves the insertion point left or right. A Y value moves the insertion point forwards or backwards. A Z value moves the insertion point up or down on the element. To edit an element’s snap edge: 1.

Click on the desired snap edge graphic in the Snap Edge area.

Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties

To add a hyperlink to an element’s properties: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

Select the element to edit.

4.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties.

5.

In the bottom left corner of the dialog, click the Add Hyperlinks button.

6.

In the Hyperlinks dialog, specify a name for the hyperlink in the Name edit box (e.g. Broderbund Web Site).

7.

In the Link to edit box, type the web address (e.g. http://www.broderbund.com) or path to the file you are linking to. If you are linking to a file, you can click Browse to search through the directories on your computer. Once you’ve located the file in the Open dialog, click Open. The path to the file is automatically displayed in the Link to edit box.

8.

Click Add to add the link to the hyperlink window.

9.

To view the link, select it in the hyperlink window, then click Go to.

The Notes function in the properties dialog lets you enter a note about the element. This additional information can be anything you want. To add a note to an element’s properties: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

Select the element to edit.

4.

Select Catalog > Element Properties, or right-click and select Properties.

5.

In the bottom left corner of the dialog, click the Add Notes button.

6.

Enter your note in the Notes dialog.

7.

Click OK.

Adding Hyperlinks to an Element’s Properties The Hyperlinks function in the properties dialog lets you create a link to an external file (e.g. Word document) or Web address.

10. To delete a hyperlink, select it in the hyperlink window, then click Delete. 11. Click OK.

User’s Guide

343

50

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements Note: You can create a link to another

Catalogs directory, which is where you should store all catalogs.

®

Broderbund Home Design (*.bld) file. However, if that file uses the same catalog as the current drawing, you cannot access the catalog in the linked file.

Creating a New Catalog If you plan to edit or add elements in the Master Catalog, you may want to create a new catalog instead of editing the existing one. That way, the custom elements you create are distinguishable from the defaults and are stored in one place. When you create a new catalog, you specify a name and where you want to store the catalog. When you close the Catalog Manager, the new catalog will become the current catalog in the catalog panel.

5.

From the Type drop box, select the unit of measure you would like to use for elements in the catalog.

6.

From the Precision drop box, select the level of precision you would like to use for measurements. For example, selecting #’-# #/16” sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when working in feet and inches.

7.

In the Name edit box, type your name.

8.

In the Company edit box, type the name of your company, if applicable.

9.

Click OK. A new, blank catalog is created.

To create a new catalog: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the Catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select File > New Catalog.

10. Select File > Save Catalog. 3.

In the Create a new catalog dialog, type a name (without extension) in the File Name box.

4.

Click the Browse button next to the Location edit box and select the directory where you want to store the new catalog. The default is the program's

344

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

11. You can now add groups and elements to the catalog, or import elements from another catalog (see Importing Elements into Catalogs on page 345). Remember to save the catalog after you make changes to it.

Creating a Copy of a Catalog

Creating a Copy of a Catalog

3.

You can save a catalog under a different name, which essentially creates a copy of it.

From the Element drop box, select the appropriate element type.

4.

Click Expand to expand the Catalog Manager dialog.

To create a copy of a catalog under a different name:

5.

On the right side of the dialog, click the Browse button, then select the catalog you want to import elements from.

6.

In the right-hand window, select an element to import, then click Import Item. If you want to import all elements listed, just click Import All. The element is imported into the current catalog. Note that the group that the element belongs to is also imported into the current catalog.

7.

When you are done importing elements, click Collapse to return to the regular view in the Catalog Manager.

8.

Select File > Save Catalog.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Make sure the catalog you want to save is the current catalog.

3.

Select File > Save Catalog As.

4.

In the File name edit box, type the name you want to save under (without extension).

5.

Click Save.

Note: The newly saved catalog becomes the current catalog.

Importing Elements into Catalogs Using the Catalog Manager you can import elements from another catalog into the current catalog. This feature is often used when you are creating new catalogs. Note: If you want to import a 3D Studio file, see Importing 3D Studio Files on page 336. To import elements into a catalog: 1.

2.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager. Make sure the catalog you want to import elements into is the currently open catalog.

User’s Guide

345

50

Chapter 50 Catalogs & Elements

Deleting Elements from a Catalog

Closing a Catalog

You can delete any element from a catalog.

You can use the Close Catalog tool to close the current catalog in the catalog panel or the Catalog Manager dialog. Note that this leaves the catalog window blank until you open another catalog.

To delete an element from a catalog: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select the appropriate element type from the Element drop box.

3.

Select the element you want to delete.

4.

Select Catalog > Delete Element, or right-click and select Delete Element.

5.

Select File > Save Catalog.

Opening a Catalog

To close the catalog in the catalog panel: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Close Catalog.

To close a catalog in the Catalog Manager: 1.

Select File > Close Catalog.

Viewing Catalog Properties You can view the properties of the current catalog (file name, location, etc.) using the Catalog Properties tool.

You can use the Open Catalog tool to open any catalog and make it the current catalog in the catalog panel. The Open Catalog tool is also available in the Catalog Manager. To open a catalog for display in the Catalog panel: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Open Catalog.

2.

In the Open dialog, locate the catalog you want to open.

3.

Click Open. The catalog you opened becomes the active catalog. Note that when you open a catalog, only one element type is displayed. The type displayed depends on the last Insert tool selected.

To open a catalog in the Catalog Manager:

To view the properties of the catalog currently in the catalog panel:

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

Select File > Open Catalog.

To view catalog properties within the catalog Manager:

3.

In the Open dialog, locate the catalog you want to open.

1.

4.

Click Open. The catalog you opened becomes the active catalog in the Catalog Manager.

5.

Click OK. The catalog is now the current catalog in the catalog panel.

346

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Properties.

Select File > Catalog Properties.

Chapter

Materials, Colors & Patterns Every element has a material assigned to it in the element's property pages. Materials determine what textures, colors and patterns are used to display elements in 3D view. You can edit and create materials on the fly. All materials are stored in a materials library, called materials.mlb. You can create new material libraries containing a specific selection of materials, and load those custom libraries in other projects. This chapter tells you how to customize materials and work with material libraries. If you want to edit the material, color or pattern of an inserted element, see Changing an Element’s Material or Color on page 259.

347

Chapter 51 Materials, Colors & Patterns

Things You Should Know About Editing Materials

You can add new materials to the library, as well as edit and delete existing materials.

When you add or edit a material through the Catalog Manager, the custom material is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing elements in the catalog. If you add or edit a material when editing an element that has been inserted in your drawing, however, the customized material is only available in the current project when editing the properties of inserted elements. The materials library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the materials library in the catalog is separate from the materials library in the current drawing. The reason that there is a project-specific materials library is so that any materials used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized materials. If you want materials that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific materials library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom materials to the external materials library file (materials.mlb), then import the custom materials from the library file into the other materials library.

If you customize the catalog materials library (through the Catalog Manager), your change is saved with the catalog. If you customize the project-specific materials library (by editing an inserted element), your change is saved in the current project only. To access the catalog materials library: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Materials. The Materials dialog appears.

Customizing the Materials Library The materials library contains a vast array of materials that you can apply to elements. Even so, you may find that you want to customize it at some point in time. In the materials library, materials are listed in groups (Concrete, Brick, Wood, etc.) so you can organize and find them easily. You can add, rename and delete groups as needed.

To access the project-specific materials library: 1.

Select an element in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties.

3.

In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.

4.

Click the Select button. The Materials dialog appears.

To add a group to the materials library: 1.

348

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Select Material > Add Group, or right-click in the Group window and select Add Group.

Editing Material Properties 2.

Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.

To rename a group in the materials library:

2.

Select Material > Edit Material, or right-click and select Edit Material.

3.

Edit the material properties in the Edit Materials dialog. See Editing Material Properties on page 349. Click OK.

1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Material > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group.

4.

3.

Type the new name, then press ENTER.

To delete a material from the materials library:

To delete a group from the materials library: 1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Material > Delete Group, or rightclick and select Delete Group.

Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains materials. To add a new material to the materials library: 1.

In the Group window, select or create the group you want to add the material to.

2.

Select Material > Add Material, or right-click in the Material window and select Add Material.

1.

Select the material in the Material window.

2.

Select Material > Delete Material, or rightclick and select Delete Material.

To save changes to the catalog materials library: 1.

Once you’ve made your changes in the Materials dialog, click OK.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog.

Editing Material Properties When you are adding or editing a material in the materials library, you need to specify the material’s properties. A material has two main types of properties: Rendered and Patterned. Rendered properties determine what texture or color is used to display an element in the Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode. Patterned properties determine what pattern is used to display an element in Patterned mode. To edit the properties of a material:

3. 4.

1.

Select the material to edit in the materials list.

2.

Select Material > Edit Material, or click one of the preview swatches.

In the Material Name edit box, type a name for the new material. Specify the material properties. See Editing

Material Properties on page 349. 5.

Click OK. The material is added to the library.

To edit a material in the materials library: 1.

Select the material in the Material window.

User’s Guide

349

51

Chapter 51 Materials, Colors & Patterns To edit Rendered properties: 1.

versa. This prevents distortion. If you want to specify different values for each, you need to open the Maintain Aspect Ratio lock by clicking on it.

In the Edit Materials dialog, select the Rendered tab.

Maintain Aspect Ratio

2.

If you want to display an element in a solid color in 3D rendered or rendered outline view, enable the Use Solid Color radio button. Click the Select button, then select the color you want to use in the Color dialog.

3.

If you want to display an element with a texture applied to it in 3D rendered or rendered outline view, enable the Use Texture radio button. Click the Select button, then select the texture you want to use. A wide selection of textures can be found in the program’s Textures directory. You can use BMP, JPG, TGA and PNG files. If want to use textures from outside sources, see Using Textures from Outside Sources on page 351 for guidelines.

4.

5.

350

If you want to change the scale of the texture, enter new values in the Tile Height and Tile Width edit boxes. Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap tile. The program uses tiled rendering to display images, meaning images are generated in pieces (tiles) vertically and horizontally. Changing the tile height of a brick material, for example, would make the bricks look taller. Changing the tile width would make the bricks look wider. By default, the Tile Height and Tile Width have the Maintain Aspect Ratio lock closed. When the lock is closed, the Tile Width changes to match the Tile Height, and vice 3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

6.

To repeat the bitmap tile horizontally, enable the Tile Horizontally check box.

7.

To repeat the bitmap tile vertically, enable the Tile Vertically check box.

8.

To change the surface finish of the material (dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the drop box in the Surface Properties area. This setting will take effect when you create a 3DTrueView. If you want to specify a custom surface finish, select Custom in the list, then click the Advanced button.

9.

If creating a custom finish, specify its properties. These are described below. Specular. Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny. Emissive. The amount of light given off by a material. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it appears. Transparency. The degree to which a material is pervious to light. Color Bleed. The degree to which different colors blend where they meet. To return to the basic view, click the Basic button at the bottom of the dialog.

Using Textures from Outside Sources To edit Patterned properties: 1.

In the Edit Materials dialog, select the Patterned tab.

uniform throughout. However, cropping can have an undesirable result if the texture is something like a tree.

Saving Customized Materials to a Materials Library File If you have added or edited materials in either the catalog materials library or project-specific materials library, you can save the custom materials to the external materials library file (materials.mlb). You can then import the customized materials from the library file into any materials library, whether that be the catalog materials library or project-specific materials library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. 2.

To select a different pattern to use in 3D patterned views, select the pattern in the Pattern list.

3.

To edit the scale of the pattern, edit the value in the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles the original scale, while a value of .5 halves the original scale.

4.

To specify more options, click the Advanced button. To edit a pattern, see Customizing the Patterns Library on page 353.

You can save materials to the default materials library, or create a new library to save them in. To save customized materials to a materials library file: 1.

In the Materials dialog, select File > Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the library you want to export materials to, then click Open. The main materials library is called materials.mlb.

Using Textures from Outside Sources

Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box.

When changing a material’s texture assignment, you can use textures from outside sources provided they are appropriately sized and not too large. As a rule, the texture’s dimensions should be a multiple of 2: 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, etc. If the dimensions are not multiples of 2, the texture will be cropped (from the top and right side) to the next smallest size. For some textures, this will make it look like the texture is cut off. For example, if your texture is 500 x 500, it will be cropped down to 256 x 256, since 500 is not a multiple of 2. If the texture were 512 x 512, however, it would not be cropped. Cropping is not that important if the texture is a grid pattern (such as brick), since such a texture is

3.

In the left pane, select the customized material, then click Export Item. The material (and the group it is under) is added to the materials library file. If you wanted

User’s Guide

351

51

Chapter 51 Materials, Colors & Patterns you could also click Export All to instantly export the entire materials list to the library file. 4.

Click OK.

If you want to import the customized materials into your catalog materials library or projectspecific materials library, see the next topic, Importing Materials from a Materials Library File.

Importing Materials from a Materials Library File If you have saved customized materials to the materials library file, you can import the materials into your catalog materials library or any project-specific materials library. To import materials from a library file: 1.

In the Materials dialog, select File > Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the materials library (e.g. materials.mlb) that you want to import materials from, then click Open.

3.

In the right pane, select the material to import, then click Import Item. Or, just click Import All to import the entire list.

4.

Click OK.

352

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory By default, textures are located in the program’s Textures directory. If you move your textures directory to another location on your system, or would like to link to another Textures directory (such as one from an older version of the program), you will need to specify the location of the Textures directory so that textures appear properly in the program. To specify the location of your Textures directory: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Textures Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the folder containing your textures, then click OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Note: If you set your path to the Textures directory of an older 3D Home Design program, the catalog in version 6 will have no textures in it until you switch the path back to the Textures directory of version 6. To alleviate this problem you can copy your old textures into your new Textures directory and leave the path set to the new Textures directory. You will then be able to open drawings from an older version and have all your textures applied, as well as leave the textures in the catalog intact.

Customizing the Patterns Library

Customizing the Patterns Library The patterns library contains an excellent selection of pre-defined patterns that you can apply to materials. You can edit patterns to suit your needs.

No. of Lines. The number of lines that will repeat in the pattern. Usually, this will be 1 or 2, but it could be more depending on the complexity of the pattern. Edit Line. The line you are currently editing. Definition. Generally, the segment lengths and spaces in the line's pattern. A single value (other than 0) creates a solid line. (See Example 2 on page 353.) For dashed patterns, segments and spaces can be different lengths, but spaces must be preceded by a negative sign to indicate they are spaces. For example, a definition of 20,-5,10,-5 (in Metric) creates the following pattern: 20 mm dash, 5 mm space, 10 mm dash, 5 mm space. (See Example 1 on page 353.) X Origin. The point on the X axis the line passes through. Y Origin. The point on the Y axis the line passes through.

To access the patterns library:

Angle. The angle of the line in degrees.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

Offset. The spacing between lines as the line is repeated (offset) parallel to the original throughout the pattern.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Patterns. The Patterns dialog appears.

Shift. The distance each offset line is shifted (left or right) from the origin of the previous line. This creates a staggered effect. (See Example 3 on page 354.)

Note: You can also access the patterns library when editing the Patterned properties of a material, by clicking the pattern swatch in the Edit Materials dialog.

Example 1 (single line pattern) No. of Lines: 1

To edit a pattern:

Line Definition: 20,-5,10,-5

1.

Select the pattern in the list.

Angle: 45°

2.

To edit the scale of a pattern, enter a value in the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles the original scale, while a value of .5 halves the original scale.

Offset: 5

3.

To edit the pattern’s line definition, click the Advanced button at the bottom of the dialog. A number of properties pop up that let you define the pattern.

Example 2 (multi-line pattern) No. of Lines: 2 Line Definition: 1.00 (both lines) Angle: 45° (line 1) and 135° (line 2) Offset: 20 (both lines)

User’s Guide

353

51

Chapter 51 Materials, Colors & Patterns Example 3 (pattern with a shift) No. of Lines: 1 Line Definition: 10,-5 Angle: 0° Offset: 5 Shift: 5

354

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Line Styles A line style defines the type and color of a line. Line styles are applied when you insert electrical wiring in your drawing. They are also part of a dimension style’s definition. You can customize the line styles and linetype libraries to suit your needs. If you want to change the line style of electrical wiring that you have already inserted, see

Changing the Line Style of Wiring on page 136. To change the dimension style of an inserted dimension, see Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 282.

355

Chapter 52 Line Styles

Things You Should Know About Editing Line Styles

Customizing the Line Styles Library

Line styles are used by electrical wiring and dimension styles. When you add or edit a line style through the Catalog Manager, the custom line style is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing dimension styles in the catalog. If you add or edit a line style when editing electrical wiring or the style of a dimension in your drawing, however, the customized line style is only available in the current project when editing the properties of inserted wiring or dimensions. The line styles library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the line styles library in the catalog is separate from the line styles library in the current project.

The line styles library contains a wide selection of line styles that you can apply to electrical wiring and dimension styles. You may find that you want to customize the library at some point in time.

The reason that there is a project-specific line styles library is so that any line styles used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized line styles. If you want line styles that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific line styles library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom line styles to the external line styles library file (linestyles.klb), then import the custom line styles from the library file into the other line styles library.

In the line styles library, line styles are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. The Wiring group contains an assortment of wiring styles. You can add, rename and delete groups as needed. You can add new line styles to the library, as well as edit and delete existing line styles. When you edit the line styles library in your catalog, the line styles are saved with your catalog. If you edit line styles while editing your drawing, the line styles are saved in the current drawing only. To access the line styles library in the Catalog Manager:

356

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Line Styles. The Line Styles dialog appears.

Customizing the Line Styles Library To access the line styles library through inserted electrical wiring: 1.

Select the wiring in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. The Line Styles dialog appears. This is your project-specific line styles library.

2.

Select Linestyle > Add Linestyle, or rightclick in the Material window and select Add Linestyle.

3.

In the Line Style Name edit box, type a name for the new line style.

4.

To select a linetype for the line style, click the Browse button next to the Linetype edit box. Select a linetype from the Linetypes dialog. If you want to add or edit a linetype, see Customizing the Linetypes Library on page 359.

5.

To select a color for the line, click the Color box in the Edit Line Styles dialog, then select the color you want from the Color dialog.

6.

Click OK. The line style is added to the library.

To access the line styles library by editing a dimension style: 1.

Select Settings > Dimension Styles. Or, select a dimension in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties.

2.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click Edit.

3.

In the Edit Dimension Styles dialog, select the Line Styles tab. This is your projectspecific line styles library.

To add a group to the line styles library: 1.

Select Linestyle > Add Group, or right-click in the Group window and select Add Group.

2.

Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.

To rename a group in the line styles library: 1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Linestyle > Rename Group, or rightclick and select Rename Group.

3.

Type the new name, then press ENTER.

To delete a group from the line styles library: 1.

Select the group in the Group window.

2.

Select Linestyle > Delete Group, or rightclick and select Delete Group.

To edit a line style in the line styles library: 1.

Select the line style in the Material window.

Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains line styles. To add a new line style to the line styles library: 1.

In the Group window, select or create the group you want to add the line style to.

User’s Guide

357

52

Chapter 52 Line Styles 2.

Select Linestyle > Edit Linestyle, or rightclick and select Edit Linestyle.

You can save line styles to the default line styles library, or create a new library to save them in. To save customized line styles to the line styles library file: 1.

In the Line Styles dialog, select File > Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the linestyles.klb file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box.

3.

In the Edit Line Styles dialog, select the desired linetype and color.

4.

Click OK.

To delete a line style from the line styles library: 1.

Select the line style in the Material window.

2.

Select Linestyle > Delete Linestyle, or rightclick and select Delete Linestyle.

3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the line style you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated.

4.

Click OK.

To save changes to the line styles library in the catalog: 1.

Once you’ve made your changes in the Line Styles dialog, click OK.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog.

Saving Line Styles to a Line Styles Library File If you have added or edited line styles in either the catalog line styles library or project-specific line styles library, you can save the custom line styles to the external line styles library file (linestyles.klb). You can then import the customized line styles from the library file into any line styles library, whether that be the catalog line styles library or project-specific line styles library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries.

358

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

If you want to import the custom line styles into your catalog line styles library or the projectspecific line styles library, see the next topic, Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File.

Importing Line Styles from a Line Styles Library File If you have saved customized line styles to the line styles library file, you can import the line styles into your catalog line styles library or any project-specific line styles library. To import line styles from a line styles library file: 1.

In the Line Styles dialog, select File > Transfer.

Customizing the Linetypes Library 2.

In the Open dialog, select the linestyles.klb file (or whatever file you want to import line styles from), then click Open.

Note: You can also access the linetypes library when editing a line style, by clicking one of the swatches, then clicking the Browse button in the Edit Line Styles dialog. If you do access the linetypes library this way, new or edited linetypes will be saved with the line style in the current drawing only. The line styles and linetypes libraries in the catalog will remain unchanged. To edit a linetype:

3.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom line style you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated.

4.

Click OK.

Customizing the Linetypes Library The linetypes library contains a list of pre-defined linetypes that you can apply to line styles. You may want to add or edit linetypes to suit your needs.

1.

Select the linetype in the list.

2.

In the Definition edit box, edit the linetype’s definition. Lines are defined by a series of distances separated by commas. Each number represents the length of either a line segment or space. Positive numbers create a line segment of the specified length. Negative numbers create a space of the specified length. For example, a dashed line may have a definition like 1/4”, -1/4”.

3.

Once you’ve edited the linetype, click OK.

To add a linetype to the list: 1.

Click the Add Item button below the linetypes list, or right-click in the left pane and select Add Item. A new entry is added to the list.

2.

Type a name for the linetype and press ENTER.

3.

In the Definition edit box, specify the linetype’s definition.

4.

Once you’ve defined the linetype, click OK.

To delete a linetype from the list:

To access the linetypes library: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Linetypes. The Linetypes dialog appears.

1.

Select the linetype in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the linetypes list.

Note: You cannot delete the existing, pre-defined linetypes because they are being used. To save changes to the linetypes library in the catalog: 1.

Once you’ve made your changes in the Linetypes dialog, click OK. User’s Guide

359

52

Chapter 52 Line Styles 2.

360

In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Text & Dimension Styles When you insert text or dimensions in your drawing, they are always based on a style that determines how they look. Text and dimension styles are stored in libraries. You can edit and create text and dimension styles to suit your needs. If you want to change the style of text that you have inserted in your drawing, see Changing the Style of Text on page 275. If you want to change the style of a dimension in your drawing, see Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 282.

361

Chapter 53 Text & Dimension Styles

Things You Should Know About Editing Text Styles

Customizing the Text Styles Library

When you add or edit a text style through the Catalog Manager, the custom text style is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing text styles in the catalog. If you add or edit a text style when editing text in your drawing (or an element that uses text), however, the customized text style is only available in the current project when editing text styles in your drawing. The text styles library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the text styles library in the catalog is separate from the text styles library in the current project.

The text styles library contains a number of predefined text styles that you can apply to text. You can edit the existing text styles, or create your own.

The reason that there is a project-specific text styles library is so that any text styles used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized text styles. If you want text styles that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your projectspecific text styles library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom text styles to the external text styles library file (Textstyles.tsl), then import the custom text styles from the library file into the other text styles library.

When you edit the text styles library in your catalog, the text styles are saved with your catalog. If you edit text styles while editing inserted text, or an element that uses text, the text styles are saved in the current drawing only.

Tip: You can save text styles in your template drawing by opening the template drawing, then selecting Settings > Text Styles and creating your custom text style in the Text Styles dialog. The custom text styles will then be available in the project-specific text styles libraries of future projects that you base on the template drawing.

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Text Styles. The Text Styles dialog appears.

To access the text styles library in the Catalog Manager:

To access the text styles library through inserted text: 1.

Select the text in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Text dialog, click the Text Style button. The Text Styles dialog appears. This is your project-specific text styles library.

To access the text styles library through the Settings menu: 1.

362

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Select Settings > Text Styles. This is your project-specific text styles library.

Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File To add a text style to the library: 1.

Right-click in the text style window and select Add Item. Or, click the Add Item button below the text style window. A new entry is added to the list.

2.

Type a name for the text style and press ENTER.

3.

In the Properties area, define the text style. Font. A set of text characters in a specific style and size. Font Style. The style of text. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Text Height. The size of text. Text Color. The color of text. Click the swatch to access the Color dialog and select a color.

4.

Click OK.

To edit a text style in the library: 1.

Select the text style in the list.

2.

Edit the properties in the Properties area.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog.

Saving Customized Text Styles to the Text Styles Library File If you have added or edited text styles in either the catalog text styles library or project-specific text styles library, you can save the custom text styles to the external text styles library file (Textstyles.tsl). You can then import the customized text styles from the library file into any text styles library, whether that be the catalog text styles library or project-specific text styles library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. You can save text styles to the default text styles library file, or create a new library to save them in. To save customized text styles to the text styles library file: 1.

In the Text Styles dialog, click the Transfer button.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Textstyles.tsl file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open.

Font. A set of text characters in a specific style and size.

Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box.

Font Style. The style of text. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Text Height. The size of text. Text Color. The color of text. Click the swatch to access the Color dialog and select a color. 3.

Click OK.

Note: Clicking Reset will return a text style to the following default values: Arial, Regular, 4", Black. To delete a text style from the library: 1.

Select the text style in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the text styles window.

3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the text style you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated.

4.

Click OK.

To save changes to the text styles library in the catalog: 1.

Once you’ve made your changes in the Text Styles dialog, click OK.

User’s Guide

363

53

Chapter 53 Text & Dimension Styles If you want to import the custom text styles into your catalog text styles library or the current drawing, see the next topic, Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File.

Importing Text Styles from a Text Styles Library File If you have saved customized text styles to the text styles library file, you can import the text styles into your catalog text styles library or any project-specific text styles library. To import text styles from a text styles library file: 1.

In the Text Styles dialog, click Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Textstyles.tsl file (or whatever file you want to import text styles from), then click Open.

in your drawing. The dimension styles library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the dimension styles library in the catalog is separate from the dimension styles library in the current project. The reason that there is a project-specific dimension styles library is so that any dimension styles used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized dimension styles. If you want dimension styles that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your project-specific dimension styles library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom dimension styles to the external dimension styles library file (Dimstyles.dlb), then import the custom dimension styles from the library file into the other dimension styles library. Tip: You can save dimension styles in your template drawing by opening the template drawing, then selecting Settings > Dimension Styles and creating your custom dimension style in the Dimension Styles dialog. The custom dimension styles will then be available in the project-specific dimension styles libraries of future projects that you base on the template drawing.

3.

4.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom text style you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated. Click OK.

Things You Should Know About Editing Dimension Styles When you add or edit a dimension style through the Catalog Manager, the custom dimension style is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing dimension styles in the catalog. If you add or edit a dimension style when editing dimensions in your drawing, however, the customized dimension style is only available in the current project when editing dimension styles

364

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Customizing the Dimension Styles Library The dimension styles library contains one predefined dimension style called Standard. This is the default dimension style used when you insert dimensions in your drawing. You can add and edit dimension styles to suit your needs.

Dimension Style Properties When you edit the dimension styles library in your catalog, the dimension styles are saved with your catalog. If you edit dimension styles while editing inserted dimensions, the dimension styles are saved in the current drawing only. To access the dimension styles library in the Catalog Manager: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Dimension Styles. The Dimension Styles dialog appears.

To access the dimension styles library through inserted dimensions: 1.

Select the dimension in your drawing.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties. The Dimension Styles dialog appears. This is your project-specific dimension styles library.

To access the dimension styles library through the Settings menu: 1.

Select Settings > Dimension Styles. This is your project-specific dimension styles library.

To add a new dimension style to the list: 1.

Right-click in the dimension style window and select Add Item. Or, click the Add Item button below the dimension style window. A new entry is added to the list.

2.

Type a name for the dimension style and press ENTER.

3.

Click the Edit button, then define the dimension style. See Dimension Style Properties on page 365.

4.

Click OK.

3.

Define the dimension in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog. See Dimension Style Properties on page 365.

4.

Click OK.

To delete a dimension style from the library: 1.

Select the dimension style in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the dimension styles window.

To save changes to the dimension styles library in the catalog: 1.

Once you’ve made your changes in the Dimension Styles dialog, click OK.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select File > Save Catalog.

Dimension Style Properties You can control a dimension’s line, arrow and text style properties.

Anatomy of a Dimension Dimension Line

Text Arrow, Tick or Dot

Extension Line

Lines and Arrows

To edit a dimension style: 1.

Select the dimension style in the list.

2.

Click Edit.

User’s Guide

365

53

Chapter 53 Text & Dimension Styles Arrow Type

Vertical Text Position

You can specify an arrow type for dimensions and leaders (leaders are used with the Text with Leader tool). Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your arrow type.

This is the vertical position of the dimension text relative to the dimension line.

The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Extension Offset, Dimension Offset, etc.) vary depending on the arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window.

Dimension Text

Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the dimension line. Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension line's angle. Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the dimension line. Distance: Distance between the text and the dimension line when placing text above the dimension line.

Horizontal Text Position This is the position of the dimension text relative to the ends of the dimension line. Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension line. Distance from first end: Places the text a specific distance from the first end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box.

Units The units (e.g. feet and inches) and precision used to display the dimension value. Override system units: Uses the unit of measure specified in the Edit Dimension Styles dialog instead of the unit of measure specified in the program settings. Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters or Inches. Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the choices are number of decimal places you can use.

Text Style Refers to the font, font style, text height and color of the dimension text. Click Text Style to select a style.

366

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Distance from the second end: Places the text a specific distance from the second end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the Distance edit box.

Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File

Line Styles

2.

You can select a different line style for the dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line style determines the linetype and color.

To assign a different line style to a dimension component, select the component in the left pane, then select the desired line style in the right pane.

Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box.

3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the dimension style you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated.

4.

Click OK.

For information about creating custom line styles, see the Line Styles chapter on page 355.

Saving Customized Dimension Styles to the Dimension Styles Library File If you have added or edited dimension styles in either the catalog dimension styles library or project-specific dimension styles library, you can save the custom dimension styles to the external dimension styles library file (Dimstyles.dlb). You can then import the customized dimension styles from the library file into any dimension styles library, whether that be the catalog dimension styles library or project-specific dimension styles library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries. You can save dimension styles to the default dimension styles library file, or create a new library to save them in. To save dimension styles to the dimension styles library file: 1.

In the Open dialog, select the Dimstyles.dlb file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open.

If you want to import the custom dimension styles into your catalog dimension styles library or the project-specific dimension styles library, see the next topic, Importing Dimension Styles from a Dimension Styles Library File.

Importing Dimension Styles from Dimension Styles Library File If you have saved customized dimension styles to the dimension styles library file, you can import the dimension styles into your catalog dimension styles library or any project-specific dimension styles library. To import dimension styles from a dimension styles library file: 1.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click Transfer.

In the Dimension Styles dialog, click the Transfer button.

User’s Guide

367

53

Chapter 53 Text & Dimension Styles 2.

In the Open dialog, select the Dimstyles.dlb file (or whatever file you want to import dimension styles from), then click Open.

3.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom dimension style you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated.

4.

Click OK.

368

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chapter

Light Sources Light sources are basically light bulbs. Light sources are contained in a light source library which is accessible through the Catalog Manager as well as the Lights property page of light fixtures. You can edit existing light sources as well as import your own light source files into the library. If you want to change a light fixture’s light source, see Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source on page 129.

369

Chapter 54 Light Sources

Things You Should Know About Editing Light Sources

Customizing the Light Source Library

Light sources are basically light bulbs. They are applied to light fixtures. When you add or edit a light source through the Catalog Manager, the custom light source is saved with the catalog, and is only available when editing light sources in the catalog. If you add or edit a light source when editing a light fixture that has been inserted in your drawing, however, the customized light source is only available in the current project when editing the properties of inserted light fixtures. The light source library in the catalog remains unchanged. This is because the light source library in the catalog is separate from the light source library in the current drawing.

The light source library contains an assortment of light sources, mainly fluorescent and incandescent light bulbs, that can be applied to lighting fixtures.

The reason that there is a project-specific light source library is so that any light sources used in your project are always saved with the project, making it possible to share your project with others and always maintain your customized light sources. If you want light sources that you have customized in your catalog to be available in your project-specific light source library, or vice versa, you can use the Transfer tool to save the custom light sources to the external light source library file (Lights.llb), then import the custom light source from the library file into the other light source library.

You can customize the light source library by adding and editing light sources. Most manufacturers of lighting equipment provide downloadable .IES photometric data files free of charge on their web sites for use in lighting calculations. Once you’ve added a light source to your library, you can edit its intensity and color if you want. Light sources are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can create, rename and delete groups. When you edit the light source library in your catalog, the light sources are saved with your catalog. If you edit the light source library while editing an element, the light sources are saved in the current drawing only. To access the light source library in the Catalog Manager:

370

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager, select Libraries > Light Sources. The Light Sources dialog appears.

Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File To access the light source library through an inserted light fixture: 1.

Select the light fixture.

2.

Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

3.

In the Lights dialog, select the Lights tab.

4.

Click Add or Edit to access the light source library.

7.

To apply a different IES file to a light source: 1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

Click the Load IES File button.

3.

Locate and select the *.ies file and click Open. The filename is displayed in the right pane of the Light Sources dialog.

To add a group to the light source library: 1.

2.

Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or click the Add Group button below the light source window. An entry is added to the list.

If you want to change the color of the light, click the Color edit box and make a selection from the Color dialog.

To edit the intensity of a light source: 1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

In the Scale edit box, specify how much you want to scale the intensity in terms of a percentage. For example, if the light source is a 60 Watt bulb, a value of 50% would make the bulb function like a 30 Watt bulb.

Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.

To delete a group from the line styles library: 1.

Select the group to delete.

To edit the color of a light source:

2.

Right-click and select Delete Group, or click the Delete button below the light source window.

1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

Click the Color edit box.

3.

In the Color dialog, select the color you want, then click OK.

Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains light sources. To add a light source to the list: 1.

Select the group you want to add the light source to.

2.

Click the Add Item button below the light source window, or right-click in the light source window and select Add Item. A new entry is added to the list.

3.

Type a name for the light source and press ENTER.

4.

Click the Load IES File button.

5.

Locate and select the *.ies file and click Open. The filename is displayed in the right pane of the Light Sources dialog.

6.

If you want to change the intensity of the light, specify the desired percentage in the Scale edit box. For example, if the light source is a 60 Watt bulb, a value of 50% would make the bulb function like a 30 Watt bulb.

To delete a light source from the library: 1.

Select the light source in the list.

2.

Right-click and select Delete, or click the Delete button below the light source window.

Saving Customized Light Sources to the Light Source Library File If you have added or edited light sources in either the catalog light source library or project-specific light source library, you can save the custom light sources to the external light source library file (Lights.llb). You can then import the customized light sources from the library file into any light

User’s Guide

371

54

Chapter 54 Light Sources source library, whether that be the catalog light source library or project-specific light source library. The library file basically acts like a shuttle between libraries.

To import light sources from a light source library file: 1.

In the Light Sources dialog, click Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Lights.llb file (or whatever file you want to import light sources from), then click Open.

3.

In the right pane of the Transfer dialog, select the custom light source you want to import, then click Import Item. Or, to import the entire list, just click Import All. The list in the left pane is updated.

4.

Click OK.

You can save light sources to the default light source library, or create a new library to save them in. To save light sources to the light source library file: 1.

In the Light Sources dialog, click Transfer.

2.

In the Open dialog, select the Lights.llb file (or whatever file you want to save to), then click Open. Tip: You can create a new library file if you want by entering a name in the File name edit box.

Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory 3.

In the left pane of the Transfer dialog, select the light source you want to save, then click Export Item. To export the entire list, just click Export All. The library file is updated.

4.

Click OK.

If you want to import the custom light sources into your catalog light source library or the project-specific light source library, see the next topic, Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File.

Importing Light Sources from a Light Source Library File If you have saved customized light sources to the light source library file, you can import the light sources into your catalog light source library or any project-specific light source library.

372

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

By default, light sources are located in the program’s Lights directory. If you move your Lights directory to another location on your system, you will need to specify the location of the Lights directory so that light sources can be accessed by the program. To specify the location of your Textures directory: 1.

Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.

2.

In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.

3.

In the File Paths area, click on the Lights Directory to select it.

4.

Click Modify.

Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory 5.

In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the folder containing your light sources, then click OK.

6.

Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

User’s Guide

373

54

Chapter

Wizard Configurations When you run the House Builder Wizard or Kitchen Builder Wizard, you are asked to select a style for your house or kitchen, such as “Country” or “Traditional”. The configuration you choose determines the appearance of elements used to build your house or kitchen. You can specify your own custom configurations that can be used when running the House Builder Wizard or Kitchen Builder Wizard in any project.

375

Chapter 55 Wizard Configurations

Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration A House Builder Wizard configuration determines what elements are used for exterior walls, roofs, floors, ceilings, foundation walls and footings. You are asked to select a configuration for your house when you run the House Builder Wizard.

2.

In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for.

3.

Click the Select button.

4.

In the catalog dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.

5.

Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.

You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the House Builder Wizard, or create your own. Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the House Builder Wizard in the current project, or any other project. To access the building configuration library: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click any element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select Libraries > Building Configuration.

To delete a configuration from the list:

To add a new configuration to the list: 1.

2.

Click the Add Item button below the left pane, or right-click in the left pane and select Add Item. An entry is added to the list. Type a name for the configuration, then press ENTER.

To edit a building configuration: 1.

376

Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

1.

Select the configuration in the list.

2.

Click the Delete button below the left pane, or right-click in the left pane and select Delete.

Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder Wizard Configuration A Kitchen Builder Wizard configuration determines what types of cabinets and appliances are used in your kitchen. You are asked to select a configuration for your kitchen when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard. You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Kitchen Builder Wizard, or create your own. Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available

Creating a Custom Kitchen Builder Wizard Configuration when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard in the current project, or any other project.

3.

Click the Select button.

4.

In the catalog dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.

5.

Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.

To access the kitchen configuration library: 1.

Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Manager, or right-click any element in the catalog panel and select Catalog Manager.

2.

In the Catalog Manager dialog, select Libraries > Kitchen Configuration.

To add a new configuration to the list: 1.

2.

Click the Add Item button below the left pane, or right-click in the left pane and select Add Item. An entry is added to the list. Type a name for the configuration, then press ENTER.

To delete a configuration from the list:

To edit a kitchen configuration:

1.

Select the configuration in the list.

1.

Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.

2.

Click the Delete button below the left pane, or right-click in the left pane and select Delete.

2.

In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for.

User’s Guide

377

55

Glossary This handy Glossary contains definitions of construction terms, abbreviations and technical terms used in the program and in this User’s Guide. Entries are listed in alphabetical order for your convenience.

379

Glossary

Glossary

Bay Window – A window made up of three sash units that project out from the wall. Usually includes a roof structure.

A Alkaline – Having a PH of more than 7.

Beam – In a deck frame, structural member supported by posts that acts to support the deck’s floor joists.

Alt Code – Alternate Code. An extra identification code that is used to link an element in the program's catalog to the databases of other applications.

Berm – A mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used for noise control.

Ambient – A general level of light that is everywhere in the scene.

Bi-Fold Doors – Narrow doors that are hinged to fold against each other and flat against the jamb.

Angle Snap – Makes elements move/rotate at specific increments (angles).

Bird's Mouth – The notch cut in the lower end of a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall.

Antialiasing – A method of improving image quality by smoothing out jagged edges. This is achieved by adjusting pixel positions or setting pixel intensities so that there is a more gradual transition between the color of a line and the background color.

BLD – BUILD file. The drawing file produced by the program. The extension given to the program's drawing files.

Array – A method of copying an element into a pattern of rows and/or columns.

Bow Window – A type of bay window made up of several window units set at slight angles to form a curve.

Artifacts – Fuzz or distortion in a graphic image or sequence of video images. Large digital pixels (“blocks”) and jerkiness in the video stream are examples of artifacts. Aspect Ratio – The ratio of width to height.

BMP – Bitmap. An image file whose bits are referenced to pixels.

C Casement Window – A window having a sash hinged on pins at the top and bottom corners of one side. It opens outward by means of a crank.

Automatic Save – Saves your drawing for you at specified intervals without prompting.

Catalog Directory –The directory containing the Master Catalog and other catalogs that you have created.

Awning Window – A window having a sash hinged on pins at the two top or bottom corners of the frame. It opens outward.

Catalog Panel – The window on the right side of the screen that displays the contents of the current catalog.

B Backsplash – A vertical surface designed to protect the wall behind a stove or countertop.

Ceiling Height – The height of the underside of a ceiling surface relative to the floor level.

Balustrade – A railing consisting of balusters (spindles) attached to a top rail. Used along stairs, landings, porches, decks, etc. Also called a banister. Baseboard – A board or moulding along the base of a wall. Also called skirting.

380

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Chair Rail – A decorative moulding applied horizontally to a wall inside a room at a height of about 3 feet. Used to prevent chairs from marring the wall. Collision Control – An intelligent drawing aid that prevents elements from being inserted where they won't fit.

Glossary Commander – An editing window that appears when certain functions are chosen. It provides precise control over such things as distance and direction. Complexity – The level of detail shown when elements are displayed. Cove Molding – A molding with a concave face used as trim. Crawlspace – The shallow area beneath a house enclosed by the foundation walls. Crown Molding – A decorative molding along the top of a wall. Cut Line – The symbol displayed on stairs in Plan view that illustrates the horizontal section cut at eye level. D Daylight Saving Time – Time usually one hour ahead of standard time. Delimiter – A character that marks the beginning or end of a unit of data. Diffuse – The amount of color that is reflected when an element is illuminated by a light. Division – A construction division identification. In North America, CSI divisions are used. DLB File – Dimension Style Library File. Contains Dimension Styles. Double Roof – A type of hip roof in which the slope to all four sides is broken into two slopes. Both slopes have a pitch. DPI – Dots per inch. The measurement of resolution for printers. Drag and Drop Mode – The default mode you are in when you select an element for editing. You can move and rotate elements with your mouse when you are in Drag and Drop Mode.

Duplicate – Copies a selected element on the same location. Dutch Gable – A combination of a hip and gable roof. On either end, the lower segment is a hip roof and the upper segment is a gable end. Also known as a Dutch Hip Roof or a Full Return Gable. DWG – Standard file format for saving vector graphics in applications like AutoCAD. DXF – Drawing Exchange Format. An ASCII or binary file format of a CAD drawing. E Editor – A software application capable of editing text. Element – A specific type of element, such as a door, having its own distinct properties (size, appearance, etc.). Elevation – 1. The front, back and side views of a building. 2. The height of an element above the floor or terrain. Estimate – A report containing a listing of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost. F Face Slider – Two or more doors that open by sliding to the side in front or behind each other. Also called bypass doors. Fascia – A flat wood or plywood strip nailed to the overhanging ends of rafters. Filter – To exclude an element or location from being displayed, quantified or selected. Fixed Window – A window whose sash is permanently fixed in the frame. Floor Level – The height of a floor (location) above the ground (0).

Drawing Aids – Tools that control the way your cursor works and the way elements are inserted.

Fold-Back Stairs – Stairs that have two flights separated by a landing and that make a complete 180-degree turn. Sometimes called Scissor Stairs.

Drywall — Gypsum, sometimes with additives, made into paper-covered sheets for use an interior wall or ceiling covering.

Fold-Up Door – A door made up of a number of narrow panels that opens overhead by folding up like an accordion. User’s Guide

381

Glossary Foundation – The supporting portion of a structure below the ground floor construction, or below grade, including the footings.

Hung Window – A window having two sashes, and whose lower sash slides up and over the fixed, upper sash on the inside.

G Gable Roof – A roof with two sloping sides (as opposed to a Hip Roof, with four sloping sides).

Hyperlinks – Jumps (links) to external document files or Web addresses.

Girt Wall – A wall built up of horizontal structural members that are suspended between vertical columns. Usually found in industrial buildings. Glass Slider – A door having a wood or aluminum frame fitted with one fixed glass panel and one sliding glass panel. Often called a patio door. Group – A container for a list of specific element types. For example, doors are organized in groups such as Bi-fold and Single Hinged. H Hatching – A pattern of lines used to fill a particular area of your drawing and to represent the material used for that area (e.g. concrete). Head Height –The height at which the tops of openings, doors and windows are located relative to the floor level. Header – The structural members placed horizontally over doors, windows and wall openings. Hidden Line – A view mode where hidden lines are removed from the view, leaving only surfaces displayed. Highlite – A pane of glass located at the top of a window or door.

I IES File – Name derived from Illuminating Engineering Society. A photometric data file (Lights file) containing Luminaire definition and information. Interface – Program components that you see on the screen and use to perform tasks. J Jamb – The wood or metal pieces that form the sides and top of a door or window enclosure. Joist – One of a parallel set of structural members used to support floor and ceiling loads. They, in turn, are supported by beams, girders, or bearing walls. K KLB File – Line Styles Library File. L Landing – A platform between flights of stairs or at the termination of a flight of stairs. L-Winder Stairs – Stairs that ascend in an Lshape and that use wedge-shaped treads called winders to change direction. Line Styles – Settings that determine the color and pattern of a line. Used in electrical wiring and dimension styles. Lite – A pane of glass in a window or door.

Hinged Door – Any type of door that swings open.

LLB File – Lights Library File.

Hip Roof – A roof with four sloping sides (as opposed to a Gable Roof, with two sloping sides).

Locations – Drawing layers containing definitions for wall height, floor level, head height and ceiling level.

HLB File – Pattern Library File. Contains hatching patterns. Hopper Window – A window in which the sash is hinged on pins at the two bottom corners, and which opens inward.

382

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Louvre Window – A small, slatted window placed high in a gable end. Used mostly for ventilation.

Glossary Lumen – A Lumen is equal to one foot-candle (the amount of light one candle generates one foot away) falling on one SQUARE foot of area. Luminaire – The international term for a piece of lighting equipment. The complete unit including lamp, fixture, and other parts. M Magnetic North – Magnetic North is the magnetic north pole. It is the focus of the planet's magnetic field and is the point magnetic compasses point toward. Mansard Roof – A type of hip roof in which the slope to all four sides is broken into two slopes. The upper slope is nearly or completely flat, while the lower slope has a sharp pitch. Also known as a French gable roof.

Orthogonal View – An alternate name for Parallel View in which all drawing lines are parallel and the effect of distance is eliminated. Contrasts with Perspective View. Overhang – The part of the roof that extends over the side wall. Also, the distance from the side wall to the fascia. P Pan – A control that allows you to move the onscreen view by dragging up, down, left, or right. Parallel View – A 3D view that eliminates the effect of distance from a view. In Parallel View, all drawing lines are parallel. Contrasts with Perspective View. Parallel View is sometimes called Orthogonal View.

MLB File – Materials Library File.

Parametric – Having a set of physical properties that determines the characteristics of an element.

Mono Footing – A pad of masonry, usually concrete, that is wider than the column it supports. Used to transfer the load of the column.

Percent (%) Below Horizon – The percentage that you want the background to appear below ground level (absolute zero).

Mullion – Thin horizontal and vertical members that divide the individual panes of glass in a window.

Perspective View – A 3D view in which the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer. Drawing lines converge to a vanishing point. Perspective View represents the way an element would appear to the human eye.

N Newel – The main post to which the end of a railing is attached. NLB File – Linetype Library File. Nosing – The portion of a stair tread that projects over the riser. Also, the projecting edge of a countertop. O Open GL – A 3D graphics Application Programming Interface (API) that includes routines for shading, texture mapping, texture filtering, anti-aliasing, lighting, geometry transformations, etc. Opening – A cutout in a wall. Ortho – A Drawing Aid that restricts drawing to straight up, down, left, or right.

Photometric Data File – A file that allows you to define complex light distributions based on physical lamp properties. When loading a photometric file, a photometric web is constructed that defines the intensity of light for any direction from a light source. Pixel – A word invented by combining the two words “picture” and “element”. The smallest unit of color on a computer display. Size varies by resolution. Pixel Search Distance – The Pixel Search Distance determines how close your cursor (which is attached to an element you are inserting) needs to be to an existing element before Object Snap occurs. Plan View – A flat, 2D view from above.

User’s Guide

383

Glossary Plate (Top Plate) – The top member of a framed wall upon which the rafters and ceiling joists rest. Plateau – A relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Pocket Door – A door that rolls on an overhead track into a frame or pocket hidden in the wall. Project Directory – The location of the default directory in which projects are stored. Project Estimate – A report containing a listing of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost.

S Saddle – A small, double-sloping roof built behind upper-story walls or the back side of a chimney to divert water around the wall or chimney. Sash – A frame that holds one or more panes of glass and that is set into the window frame. Seat Cut – The horizontal cut that is made when cutting a bird's mouth in a rafter. Shininess – The ability of a texture to reflect light.

Q Quantity Report – A list of the type and quantity of materials in your model. Also known as a Materials List or Bill of Materials.

Slab – Concrete pavement, i.e. driveways, garages, and basement floors.

R Rafter – Structural members that make up the framing for a roof and roof overhang, and that support the sheathing and roofing materials.

Snap Angle – The increment angle your cursor will snap at (if Angle Snap is enabled).

Rake – To incline from the perpendicular. Render – To display a 3D model with surfaces, textures, lighting and shading. Rendered Mode – A display mode where solid colors and textures are applied to surfaces, creating a realistic 3D effect. Rendered Outline Mode – A display mode where solid colors and textures are applied to elements, and surfaces are outlined with a black line for high definition. Retaining Wall – A wall constructed to contain a lateral force, such as a bank of dirt. Riser – The vertical board placed between the treads of a staircase. Roller Door – A door made of hinged, horizontal steel or wood panels that move on rollers in overhead and side tracks. Rough Opening – The opening created in a wall to receive a door or window frame.

Slope – Ground that forms an incline.

Soffit – The area below the eave and overhang. The underside where the roof overhangs the walls. Specular – A shininess factor that determines the amount of highlighting you see on an element from light sources. Split L-Shaped Stairs – Stairs that ascend in an L-shaped direction and whose landing is split on a diagonal to make the change in direction. Spreadsheet – A table of values arranged in rows and columns. Status Bar – The bar below the drawing area that contains the Help message for the current state or tool. Also contains drawing aid buttons. Stringer – The inclined side of a stair that supports the treads and risers. Strip Footings – A flat, masonry section, usually concrete, that is wider than the wall it supports. Used to transfer the vertical load of the wall. Studs – Members inserted vertically in a wall frame. Suspended Ceiling – A grid of T-shaped bars hung on wires from overhead support framing, into which removable panels are inserted to form

384

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Glossary a finished ceiling that allows easy access to the area above it. Typically found in office buildings and basements. T Template – A set of pre-defined properties that determines the setup and outcome of something (like a report). Temporary Directory – The default directory in which temporary files generated by the program are saved. Terrain – A piece of land. Tile Height – The height of one tile in a texture pattern. The program generates large images by “tiling” texture bitmaps horizontally and vertically. Tilt Door – A door consisting of a single leaf that opens overhead by tilting up (e.g. Tilt Garage Door). Toe Space – A recessed area between the bottom of a cabinet and the floor that allows you to stand close to the cabinet. Also called a toe kick. Transom – A member between a door or window and a sidelite or highlite frame. Transparency – The degree to which a texture can be penetrated by light. Tread – The horizontal part of a stair that is stepped on. True North – True North is the geographic North Pole. It is located at 90 degrees North latitude and all lines of longitude converge at the pole.

Vent Window – A window made up of two or more segments with one segment acting as a vent. VRML – Virtual Reality Modeling Language. The open standard for virtual reality on the Internet. W Winder – One of the wedge-shaped treads that make up a winding or spiral staircase. Windowing – A selection method where you click and drag a rectangle, from left to right, around elements you want to select. Wireframe View – The default 3D view where all lines making up elements are displayed. It allows you to see through elements. WRL File – WORLD file. Capable of being viewed in VRML viewers. X X Axis – One of the three drawing axes. An X coordinate specifies a horizontal distance. Y Y Axis – One of the three drawing axes. A Y coordinate specifies a vertical distance. Z Z Axis – One of the three drawing axes. The Z coordinate indicates either elevation or depth. Z Buffer – A block of memory used to store the Zaxis value of a pixel on the screen. Higher depth values improve detail of 3D display but may slow the system. Zenith - Culminating point.

Truss – A variety of members made up into a series of triangles. Used for constructing roofs.

Zoom Realtime – Magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse.

TSL File – Text Style Library File

Zoom to Fit – Zooms the drawing to the extents of the drawing area, creating a maximized view of your entire design.

U U-Winder Stairs – Stairs that ascend in a Ushaped direction.

Zoom Window – Magnifies an area of your drawing that you select by windowing.

V View Filter – A dialog used for displaying and hiding elements and/or locations, and controlling the selectability of elements. User’s Guide

385

Catalog Index When you want to know where to find something in the catalog, this is the place to look. The Catalog Index contains a list of elements — everything from air hockey tables to water heaters — and tells you what tool to select to access each one, and what group to select in the catalog. Items are listed in alphabetical order for your convenience.

387

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Air Hockey Table

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Air Returns

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Ventilation

Aquariums

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Aquariums

Arbors

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Arbors and Trellis

Area Rugs

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Area Rugs

Armchairs

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Armoire

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Arrows, north

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

North Arrows

Badminton Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Barbecues

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Outdoor Cooking and Heating

Bark

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Barstools

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Basinet

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Basketball Nets and Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Bathroom Vanities

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Bathroom Vanities

Bathtubs

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Tubs and Showers

Beds

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Beer Bottle

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Benches, exterior

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Benches and Storage

388

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Benches, interior

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Bidets

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Toilets and Bidets

Billiards Tables

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Bird Baths, Feeders & Houses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Blender

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Blinds

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Window Treatments

Books

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

Bookshelves

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture Office Furniture

Borders, garden

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Built-in Ovens

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Cabinets, base

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Single Door Base Cabinets Double Door Base Cabinets Base Drawer Units Base Corner Cabinets Base Island Cabinets Bathroom Vanities

Cabinets, upper

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Upper Corner Cabinets Upper Cabinets Upper Island Cabinets

Cable Outlets

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Outlets

Candle Sticks

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

Card Table

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Cars

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

CD Stands

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

User’s Guide

389

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Ceiling Fans

Insert > Interiors > Lighting

Ceiling Lights

Chairs, living room

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Chairs, patio

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Chairs

Chairs, recroom

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Change Screen

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Change Table

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Chests

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Chimney

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Ventilation

Clocks

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Clocks

Closet Rods/ Shelves

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Coffee Tables

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Columns, decorative

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Computer

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Computer Components

Concrete Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Rail Edging

Concrete fills

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Cooktops

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Corner Accents

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Cribs

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Cubicals

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Office Furniture

390

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Cups

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen Accessories

Curtains

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Window Treatments

Dart Board

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Deck Box

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Benches and Storage

Desks

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Office Furniture

Dining Sets

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen Furniture

Dishes

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen Accessories

Dishwasher

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Doghouses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Door mats

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

Down Spout

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Exterior Plumbing Fixtures

Drapes

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Window Treatments

Dressers

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Dry Bars

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Dryers

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Laundry Appliances

DVD Player

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Televisions

Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Plastic Edging Post Edging Rail Edging

End tables

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Entertainment Units

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

User’s Guide

391

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Faucets

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Faucets/Fixtures

Fax Machine

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Filing Cabinets

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Office Furniture

Fire Hydrant

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Irrigation

Fireplaces, indoor

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Heating

Fireplaces, outdoor

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Outdoor Cooking and Heating

Floor Registers

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Ventilation

Flower Pots, indoor

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

Foosball Table

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Fountains

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Furnace

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Heating

Futon

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Garages, detached

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Garbage Bin

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen Accessories Bathroom Accessories

Garden Boxes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Planters and Garden Boxes

Garden Hoses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Irrigation

Gazebos

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Golf Hole

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Gravel

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

392

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Greenhouse

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Hammocks

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Swings and Hammocks

Hoses, garden

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Irrigation

Hot Tubs

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Pools & Hot Tubs

House Templates

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

House Templates

Islands, kitchen

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Base Island Cabinets Upper Island Cabinets

Jungle Gyms

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Kitchen Tables

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen Furniture

Knife Sets

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen Accessories

Lamps

Insert > Interiors > Lighting

Lamps

Lawn Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Plastic Edging

Light Switches

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Switches

Lights

Insert > Interiors > Lighting

Ceiling Lights Lamps Wall Lights

Lights, outdoor

Insert > Landscape > Landscape Lighting

Exterior Fixtures Ground Lighting Light Posts

Lounge Chairs, outdoor

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Chairs

Loveseats

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Mail Boxes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Other Outdoor Items

Medicine Cabinet

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Merry-Go-Round

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

User’s Guide

393

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Microwaves

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Mirror, standing

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Mirrors, wall

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

Nightstands

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

North Arrows

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

North Arrows

Obelisks

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Arbors and Trellis

Office Tables

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Office Furniture

Ottoman

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Outlets

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Outlets

Ovens

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Pantry Cabinets

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Pantry Cabinets

Patio Furniture

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Tables Chairs Benches and Storage

Patio umbrellas

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Tables

Phone

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Phone Jacks

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Outlets

Photo Copier

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Pianos

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Picnic Tables

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Tables

Pictures

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

394

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Pillows

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

Ping Pong Table

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Planters

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Planters and Garden Boxes

Play Gyms & Play Houses

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Ponds

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Pool Tables

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Pools

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Pools & Hot Tubs Playground

Pot Racks

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen Furniture

Pots & Pans

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen Accessories

Printer

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Computer Components

Propane Heater

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Outdoor Cooking and Heating

Range Hoods

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Ranges

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Refrigerators

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Registers, floor

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Ventilation

Rugs, area

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Area Rugs

Sand

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Sandbox

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Sconces

Insert > Interiors > Lighting

Wall Lights

User’s Guide

395

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Screen, change

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Screened Rooms

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

See-Saw

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Sheds

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Storage & Enclosures

Shelves, closet

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Bedroom Furniture

Shelving Units

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture Office Furniture

Shower Curtain

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Showers

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Tubs and Showers

Shutters

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Dining Room/Kitchen Accessories

Sinks

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Sinks

Smoke Detector

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Sensors and Controls

Snooker Table

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Recroom Furniture

Sofas

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Soil

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Sprinklers

Insert > Landscape > Irrigation

Pop-up Sprinklers

Sundials

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Swing Sets

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Swings, bench

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Swings and Hammocks

Switches

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Switches

Tables, coffee

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

396

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Tables, end

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Tables, kitchen

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Dining Room/Kitchen Furniture

Tables, office

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Office Furniture

Tables, patio

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture

Tables

Telephone

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Communications

Television Stands

Insert > Interiors > Furniture

Living Room Furniture

Televisions

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Televisions

Tennis Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Thermostats

Insert > Interiors > Electrical

Sensors and Controls

Toaster

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Toilet Paper Dispenser

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Toilets

Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures

Toilets and Bidets

Towel Racks/Rings

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Bathroom Accessories

Track Lighting

Insert > Interiors > Lighting

Ceiling Lights

Trampoline

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Sports

Trash Compactor

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Kitchen Appliances

Trellis

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Arbors and Trellis

Umbrellas, patio

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Tables

Valance

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Window Treatments

Vanities, bathroom

Insert > Interiors > Cabinets

Bathroom Vanities

User’s Guide

397

Catalog Index

Catalog Index Items

Tool to Select

Catalog Groups

Vases

Insert > Interiors > Accessories

Decorative

VCR

Insert > Interiors > Electronics

Televisions

Volleyball Courts

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures

Playground

Washers

Insert > Interiors > Appliances

Laundry Appliances

Water

Insert > Landscape > Fills

Fills

Water Heater

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Heating

Water Well

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Irrigation

Weather Vanes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Windchimes

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Windmill

Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories

Decorative Accessories

Wood Edging

Insert > Landscape > Edging

Post Edging Rail Edging

Wood Stove

Insert > Interiors > HVAC

Heating

398

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Index

1-2-3 2D % Open, 63 2D Designer’s View, 28 2D Image export, 306 2D Percent Open, 168 2D Plan Preview, 339 2D Plan View, 28 2D plant representation, editing, 204 2D Viewing in catalog panel, 339 in drawing area, 28 3D % Open, 63 3D Home Architect Online, 7 3D Model export, 306 3D Model View 3D Overview, 29 3D Perspective, 29 about, 29 changing the camera height, 323 changing the display mode, 30 changing the target height, 323 changing the viewing field angle, 325 changing your viewpoint, 322 changing, 322 creating new, 322 flying around in, 326 moving the camera, 322 moving the target, 323 perspective view mode, 323 selecting a preset camera angle, 324 sliding in, 326 spinning the view, 326 walking around in, 326 3D Overview, 324 3D Percent Open, 168 3D Perspective, 323 3D Studio files exporting to, 306

importing, 336 selecting to apply to an element, 338 3D Viewing, 29 3DS files exporting to, 306 importing, 336 3DTrueView about, 290 adjusting image brightness, 293 changing refresh rate during lighting calculations, 293 creating fog effect, 294 creating smoke effect, 294 enabling ambient lighting, 294 rendering a view, 292 save location, 295 save name, 296 saving multiple renderings, 296 saving to file, 295 setting quality, 293 setting the viewpoint, 290 setting up the scene, 290 specifying image size, 296 turning daylight off, 294 using antialiasing, 294

A Above-ground pools, 224 Accessories applying different colors/finishes, 123 deleting, 124 editing properties, 123 inserting, 122, 232 lowering, 123 moving, 122 raising, 123 rotating, 122 Add City, 291

399

Index Add Group catalog, 334 light source library, 371 line styles library, 357 materials library, 348 Add Linestyle, 357 Add Location, 18 Add Material, 349 Add Text with Leader, 275 Add Text, 274 Adjust Height to Door, 64 Adjust Height to Window, 69 Adjust Segment (stairs), 83 Adjust Width highlite, 64, 68 landing, 84, 86 stairs, 83 Advanced Features, 5 Air returns, 144 Aligned Dimensions, 281 Alignment of text, 275 Alkaline, 380 Alt Code, 342 Ambient lighting, enabling, 294 Angle from Joists, 176 Angle Snap, 241 Angle, camera, 324 Angle, slope, 155 Angle, view, 322, 325 Angles, specifying, 250 Annotation Text with Leader, 275 Text, 274 Antialiasing 3DTrueView, 294 Appearance page, 341 Appearance properties, 341 Appearance, elements, 259, 341 Appliances applying different colors/finishes, 119 deleting, 119 editing properties, 118, 123 inserting, 118 lowering, 118 moving, 118 raising, 118 rotating, 118 Apply 183 Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions, 278 Aquariums, 122

400

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Arbors, 224 Area/Perimeter Calculator, 245 Array, 257 Artifacts, eliminating, 313 Auto Dimension Settings exterior, 278 interior, 280 Auto Exterior Dimensions creating, 278 specifying settings, 278 Auto Interior Dimensions adding, 279 specifying settings, 280 Auto Name, 336, 339 Auto-cut terrain around building, 150 Automatic ceilings, inserting, 22 Automatic name generation editing the formula, 339 using, 339 Automatic Save, 301 Automatically Insert Ceilings, 22 Avoid saddle situations in next story, 95

B Background color, drawing area, 312 Background, in 3D views, 327 Backsplash, 115 Badminton courts, 224 Balustrades, 87 Barstools, 122 Base Height, 248 Base Offset, column, 49 Baseboards, 59 Basement, drawing, 44 Basic property page, 340 Basic View Control Toolbar, 11 Basics, program, 5 Basketball courts, 224 Bathroom tutorial, 5 Bathtubs, 140 Beds, 122 Beds, garden, 196 Behavior Photo Board, 268 Behavior page, 344 Behavior, strip footings, 47 Benches, 220 Berms editing height, 152

Index editing peak shape, 152 Berms/Trenches creating, 151 deleting, 152 moving, 152 stretching, 152 Bill of Materials, 286 Billboard behavior, 268 Billboards, 268 Billiards table, 122 Bird baths, 232 Bird feeders, 232 Bird houses, 232 Birds Mouth, 101 Bitmaps exporting to, 306 importing for tracing, 264 using your own in materials, 351 Blank Project, 4 Blinds, 122 Block Import Options, 337 Bloom time, 209 BMP exporting to, 306 importing for tracing, 264 using your own in materials, 351 Board Offset, 166, 169 Board Spacing, 166, 169 Board Style, 166, 169 Bookshelves, 122 Borders, garden, 232 Borders, wallpaper, 59 Bottom Rail Depth, 90 Bottom Rail Height, 90 Bottom Rail Style, 90 Bottom Rail Width, 90 Bowls, 122 Box planters, 232 Boxes, garden, 224 Branded Content Providers, 7 Break at Mono Footings, 47 Break at Strip Footings, 47 Breaking edging, 201 fences, 165 footings, 48 preventing in strip footings, 47 retaining walls, 187 walls, 46, 58 Brick, 56, 187

Brightness, image, 293 Broderbund.com, 7 Building Configuration, 376 Building elements, filtering from view, 34 Building Locations adding, 18 current, 19 defining, 18 deleting, 18 dimming, 19 filtering from view, 35 making selectable/non-selectable, 38 Building lot, 158, 159 Building tab, 10 Building Wizard custom element configuration, 376 disabling, 16 running when a drawing is open, 16 using, 14

C Cabanas, 224 Cabinets applying different finishes, 116 deleting, 116 editing properties, 114 inserting sinks into, 116 inserting, 114 lowering, 114 moving, 114 raising, 114 rotating, 114 Camera Height, changing, 323 Cameras changing the height of, 323 looking through, 29 moving, 322 orbiting around targets, 326 placing new, 322 resetting, 327 turning on and off, 322 Carpet, 75 Cars, 232 Cartesian Coordinate System, 249 Cartesian coordinate system, 250 Cascade Open Views, 317 Casing, 59 Catalog Manager, about, 334 Catalog Panel

User’s Guide

401

Index about, 11 displaying/hiding, 311 resizing, 311 Catalog Properties, 346 Catalogs adding a group to, 334 changing preview display, 339 closing, 346 creating copies of, 345 creating new, 344 deleting elements from, 346 deleting groups from, 335 editing elements, 335 importing elements into, 345 opening, 346 previewing images in, 339 renaming groups in, 335 saving edited elements from your drawing, 336 saving under different name, 345 saving, 344, 345 viewing properties of, 346 Categories adding to catalogs, 334 deleting in catalogs, 335 renaming in catalogs, 335 Ceiling fans, 128 Ceiling Height, 18 Ceiling lights, 128 Ceiling Openings curving edges, 79 inserting in automatic ceilings, 78 inserting in manual ceilings, 78 removing, 79 resizing, 78 Ceilings about, 75 applying different materials to, 79 by Perimeter, 76 by Picking Points, 77 by Room, 76 curving openings in, 79 curving, 77 cutting openings in automatic ceilings, 78 cutting openings in manual ceilings, 78 deleting, 80 displaying framing, 32 inserting automatically, 22 inserting openings in, 78 lowering, 77

402

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

raising, 77 raising/lowering, 77 removing openings from, 79 resizing openings, 78 suspending, 77 Centered text, 275 Ceramic Tiles, 75 Chair Rails, 59 Chairs, 122 Chairs, patio, 220 Change Display Every _ Steps, 293 Changing 233 Chests, 122 Chimneys applying materials to, 145 editing height, 144 inserting, 144 City, 291 Click-and-drag insertion method, 22 Close Catalog, 346 Closed Riser, 181 Closing catalogs, 346 Closing projects, 303 Coffee tables, 122 Cold air returns, 144 Collision Control, 241 Color Background (drawing area), 312 changing an element’s, 259, 341 light sources, 371 text, 275, 363 toolbar areas, 310 toolbars, 310 Color Bleed, 295, 350 Colors applying to the terrain, 150 editing an element’s, 341 editing material color, 350 of plants throughout growing season, 209 viewing an element’s, 341 Columns attaching footings to, 49 decorative, 232 deleting, 49 editing elevation, 49 editing size, 49 editing type, 49 inserting, 48 moving, 49

Index Commander displaying, 248 selecting a reference point for actions, 249 specifying insertion heights, 248 using to rotate elements, 250 using when curving elements, 251 using, 248 Common plant names, 208 Complexity of care (plant), 208 Component Display, 338 Components, appearance of, 341 Computer desks, 122 Computers, 122 Concrete slabs applying different materials to, 183 creating, 181 deleting, 52, 183 editing thickness, 52, 183 inserting, 51 moving, 51, 182 reshaping, 51, 182 resizing, 51, 182 rotating, 52, 182 Concrete walls, drawing, 44 Connection, 91 Contents, package, 2 Context-sensitive menus, 24, 254 Contours, showing, 150 Convert File From, 337 Coordinate icon, displaying/hiding, 248 Coordinate system Cartesian, 250 Polar, 250 selecting, 249 Coordinates, entering, 250 Copies (print), 304 Copying elements, 257 walls to create a new story, 55 Copying elements, 257 Corner details, 232 Corrupted projects, repairing, 300 Country, 291 Cove Molding, 59 Crawlspace foundation, creating, 44 Create Elevation View, 329 Creating 51, 196 Cribs, 122 Cropped textures, 351 Cross-section, creating, 330

Crown Molding, 59 Current View Size, 296 Curtains, 122 Curving ceiling opening edges, 79 ceilings, 77 deck edges, 174 deck opening edges, 178 retaining walls, 186 using the Commander, 251 walls, 46, 58 Custom textures, 351 Customer Service, 6 Customizing catalogs, 333 dimension styles, 361 elements, 335 light sources, 369 line styles, 355 materials, 347 screen, 309 text styles, 361 view windows, 315 views, 321 Wizard configurations, 375 Cut 102 Cut an opening around next story, 95 Cut Line Spacing, 85 Cut Line, editing on stairs, 85 Cut Opening ceiling, 78 deck, 177 roof, 102 Cut-off textures, 351

D Damaged projects, repairing, 300 Date and time, 291 day 206 Daylight Savings, 291 Daylight, turning off, 294 Deck Builder Wizard, 172 Deck Openings curving edges, 178 inserting, 177 removing, 178 reshaping, 178 resizing, 178 Deck Stairs

User’s Guide

403

Index controlling railing display, 180 deleting, 181 editing properties, 179 editing size, 179 inserting, 178 moving, 179 parts, 179 Deck tool, 173 Decks building with Deck Builder Wizard, 172 building with Deck tool, 173 changing direction of deck boards, 174 changing the railing style, 176 controlling display of railings, 177 controlling railings on deck stairs, 180 creating openings in, 177 curving edges, 174 curving opening edges, 178 deleting, 178 displaying footings under posts, 175 displaying skirting, 177 editing frame construction, 175 editing height, 175 editing posts, 175 inserting a deck floor, 173 inserting stairs, 178 moving, 174 removing openings, 178 reshaping openings, 178 reshaping, 174 resizing openings, 178 stretching, 174 viewing tutorial, 5 Default save directory, 301 Define Floors, 74 Delete Element, 346 Delete Group light source library, 371 line styles library, 357 materials library, 349 Delete Linestyle, 358 Delete Material, 349 Deleting accessories, 124 appliances, 119 berms/trenches, 152 building locations, 18 cabinets, 116 ceiling openings, 79 ceilings, 80

404

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

columns, 49 deck openings, 178 deck stairs, 181 decks, 178 dimension styles from library, 365 dimensions, 282 doors, 66 dormers, 104 edging, 202 electrical elements, 135 electronics, 124 elements, 258, 346 elevations, 329 exterior accessories, 233 exterior furniture, 221 exterior structures, 225 fences, 167 filled areas, 197 floors, 75 footings, 48, 50 foundation, 45 furniture, 124 gates, 169 groups from catalogs, 335 groups from light source library, 371 groups from line styles library, 357 groups from materials library, 349 groups in View Manager, 316 hills, 151 HVAC elements, 145 irrigation, 236 light fixtures, 131 light source from library, 371 line styles from library, 358 linetypes from linetypes library, 359 materials from library, 349 mono footings, 50 openings from roofs, 102 outdoor light fixtures, 230 paths, 191 patio slabs, 183 photo boards, 270 plants, 206 plateaus, 153 plumbing fixtures, 141 railings, 91 ramps, 87 retaining walls, 187 roofs, 102 section views, 331

Index site boundary, 158 skylights, 105 slabs, 52 slopes, 155 sprinklers, 236 stairs, 87 strip footings, 48 text with leader, 277 text, 275 trace image, 265 valleys, 151 views in View Manager, 319 wall openings, 72 walls, 46, 55, 58 windows, 70 wiring, 137 Depth below ground level, 175 Deselecting elements, 24 Designer’s View, 28 Dim Line Spacing, 279 Dimension Offset, 279 Dimension Styles adding, 365 changing, 282 customizing dimension styles library, 364 customizing library, 364 deleting from library, 365 editing, 365 important considerations before editing, 364 importing dimension styles from library into catalog, 367 properties, 282, 365 saving to library file, 367 setting current, 277 Dimensions about, 277 aligned, 281 auto exterior settings, 278 auto exterior, 278 auto interior, 279 changing style, 282 deleting, 282 displaying/hiding, 36 editing an element’s, 258 filtering for selection, 40 linear, 280 moving dimension line, 281 scale, 304, 319 setting current style, 277 stretching, 281

Dimming Percentage, locations, 19 Direction, specifying, 250 Disabling Building Wizard, 16 templates, 302 Diseases page (Encyclopedia), 215, 216 Dishwasher, 118 Display All But Framing, 32 Display Filter, 34 Display Framing, 32 Display Highlite, 63, 68 Display Left Sidelite, 63, 68 Display Lowlite, 68 Display Mode, 30 Display of graphics, improving, 313 Display Right Sidelite, 63, 68 Display settings, adjusting, 4 Displaying 32, 248 building elements, 34 cameras, 322 catalog panel, 311 Coordinate Icon, 248 dimensions, 36 electrical wiring, 36 framing, 32 project trace images, 37 selected building elements, 34 selected parts on elements, 338 terrain, 155 text, 36 toolbars, 310 view tabs, 317 Distance above current location or terrain, 255, 342 Distance, measuring, 244 Distance, specifying, 250 Diving board, 224 Division, 342 Do not use Project Template, 302 Doghouses, 224 Door mats, 232 Door Trim, 59 Doors deleting, 66 editing leaf, 64 editing shape, 62 editing sidelites/highlites, 63 editing size, 62 editing type, 62 flipping the swing, 65 User’s Guide

405

Index flipping, 65 inserting, 62 lowering, 66 moving, 65 raising, 66 Dormer Roof, 103 Dormers about, 102 creating, 102, 103 deleting, 104 moving, 103 stretching, 104 Down to deck location, 180 Down to previous location, 180 Down to terrain, 180 DPI, 381 Dragging method of insertion, 22 Drawing from scratch, 4 Drawing Grid displaying, 240 setting up, 240 turning on and off, 240 Drawings, opening from older versions, 2 Dressers, 122 Driveways, 190 Dryer, 118 Drywall, 381 Duplicate to Locations, 55, 257 Duplicate, 257 DXF export, 306

E Edging breaking, 201 changing length, 201 changing material, 202 cleaning up corners, 200 deleting, 202 editing height, 202 editing width, 202 inserting, 200 moving, 201 rotating, 201 stretching, 201 Edit 174 Edit City, 291 Edit Linestyle, 357 Edit Material, 349 Edit menu, 24

406

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Editing about, 253 accessing edit commands, 254 accessing edit tools, 24 appliances, 118 berms, 152 building locations, 18 cabinets, 114 catalogs, 334 ceilings, 77 column elevation, 49 column size, 49 column type, 49 deck stairs, 179 decks, 174 dimension styles, 364 dimensions, 281 doors, 62 edging, 200 electrical elements, 135 element properties, 258 elements in catalogs, 335 exterior accessories, 232 exterior furniture, 220 exterior structures, 224 fences, 165 fills, 196 floors, 74, 75 furnishing elements, 122 gates, 168 hills, 151 HVAC elements, 145 leader with text, 276 light fixtures, 129, 228 light sources, 370 line styles, 356 linetypes, 359 materials, 348 mono footing size, 50 mono footing type, 50 openings, 71 path elements, 190 patio slabs, 182 patterns, 353 photo boards, 270 plants, 204 plumbing fixtures, 140 print scale, 319 railings, 89 ramps, 85

Index retaining walls, 186 roofs, 96, 99 screen settings, 309 sections, 331 site boundary, 158 slopes, 154 stairs, 82 strip footing type, 47 text styles, 362 text, 274 views, 321 wall elevation, 45, 57, 186 wall height, 45, 57, 186 wall openings, 71 wall width, 45, 57, 186 walls, 44, 54 windows, 67 Editing Mode, 23, 254 Electrical Elements applying different colors/materials, 135 deleting, 135 editing size, 135 lowering, 134 moving, 135 raising, 134 wiring, 136 Electrical Wiring changing line style, 136 deleting, 137 displaying/hiding, 36 inserting, 136 making selectable/non-selectable, 40 reshaping/stretching, 136 Electronics applying different colors/finishes, 123 deleting, 124 editing properties, 123 inserting, 122 lowering, 123 moving, 122 raising, 123 rotating, 122 Element Properties, 334 Elements changing display of in preview window, 339 changing elevation, 255 creating custom, 335 deleting from catalogs, 346 deleting, 258 editing in catalogs, 335

editing properties, 258 filtering from view, 34 importing 3D Studio files, 336 importing into catalogs, 345 inserting, 22 moving, 254 rotating, 255 saving edited elements to a catalog, 336 Elevate tool, 255 Elevation accessories, 123 appliances, 118 cabinets, 114 ceilings, 77 cut lines, 85 doors, 66 editing an element’s, 255 electrical elements, 134 electronics, 123 exterior accessories, 232 furniture, 123 HVAC elements, 145 light fixtures, 128 photo board, 270 plants, 204 plumbing fixtures, 140 retaining walls, 186 wall openings, 72 walls, 45, 57 windows, 70 Elevation Marks editing properties of, 329 moving, 328 turning on/off, 328 Elevation Properties, 329 Elevations changing the target of, 329 creating custom, 329 deleting, 329 displaying marks for, 328 moving left or right, 328 viewing, 328 viewing/editing properties, 329 Emissive, 295, 350 Enable Ambient Lighting, 294 Enable Collision Control, 241 Enable Daylight, 294 Enable Pre-Selection, 23 Encyclopedia about, 207 User’s Guide

407

Index accessing, 208 Diseases page, 215 Main page, 208 Notebook page, 213 Picture page, 214 Plant Care Calendar, 210 searching for a plant, 208 selecting a plant to add to a catalog, 217 selecting a plant to view, 208 World Map page, 212 Estimate changing report format, 286 filtering, 286 generating, 286 printing, 286 saving, 286 specifying name, 287 specifying save location, 287 turning grid lines off, 286 viewing saved estimate, 287 Excavated areas, 152 Explicit Height, 180 Export Model, 306 Export View, 306 Exporting current view, 306 custom light sources to library file, 371 custom line styles to library file, 358 dimension styles to library file, 367 materials to library file, 351 model, 306 text styles to library file, 363 to 3DS, 306 to BMP, 306 to DXF, 306 to JPG, 306 to TGA, 306 to WRL, 306 Extend Stair, 179 Extension Below Base, 45, 57, 186, 255 Extension Lines, 279 Exterior Accessories changing elevation, 232 deleting, 233 editing appearance, 233 editing size, 232 inserting, 232 moving, 232 rotating, 232 Exterior dimension settings, 278

408

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Exterior Furniture applying different colors/materials, 220 deleting, 221 editing size, 220 inserting, 220 moving, 220 rotating, 220 Exterior Structures applying different materials, 225 deleting, 225 editing size, 225 inserting house templates, 224 inserting, 224 moving, 224 rotating, 224 Exterior Wall Tops to Roof, 97 Exterior walls ground floor, 54 upper stories, 55

F Fabrics, 123 Fascia Depth, 101 Fascia Distance, 100 Fascia type, 101 Faucets, 140 Fences breaking, 165 deleting, 167 editing material, 167 editing properties, 165 inserting, 164 lengthening, 165 parts, 165 raked, 166 shortening, 165 stepped, 166 stretching, 165 Field of vision, 325 File Paths Projects Directory, 301 Templates directory, 302 Temporary Directory, 303 Filing cabinets, 122 Fills changing fill material, 197 creating, 196 deleting, 197 moving, 197

Index reshaping, 196 resizing, 196 rotating, 197 Filtering building elements for selection, 38, 39 building elements from view, 34 building locations for selection, 38 dimensions for selection, 40 dimensions from view, 36 display, 34 electrical wiring from view, 36 elements/locations for selection, 37 landscape elements for selection, 39 landscape elements from view, 35 plants by disease, 215 plants by selected criteria, 216 project estimate, 286 project trace images from view, 37 text for selection, 39 text from view, 36 Finishing commands, 22 Fireplaces, indoor, 144 Fireplaces, outdoor, 232 Fit To Page, 304 Flip Horizontal, 264 Flip Opening doors, 65 gates, 168 windows, 70 Flip Swing doors, 65 gates, 168 Flip Vertical, 264 Flipping doors swing, 65 gate swing, 168 gates, 168 Floor Level, 18 Floor Locations adding, 18 current, 19 defining, 18 deleting, 18 dimming, 19 filtering from view, 35 making selectable/non-selectable, 38 Floor openings, inserting, 75 Floor plan tracing, 264 Floor registers, 144 Floor to Ceiling Height, 14

Floors about, 74 applying different materials to, 46, 75 deck, 173 deleting, 75 displaying framing, 32 editing thickness, 75 foundation, 44 inserting openings in, 75 raising/lowering, 74 splitting, 74 Flowers, 204 Fly Around tool, 326 Focal point, moving, 323 Fog, 294 Font Style, 275, 363 Font, 275, 363 Footings breaking, 48 deleting mono footings, 50 deleting strip footings, 48 deleting, 48, 50 displaying under deck posts, 175 editing size, 47, 50 editing type, 47, 50 inserting beneath columns, 49 lengthening/shortening, 48 moving mono footings, 50 moving strip footings, 47 preventing breaking, 47 rotating mono footings, 50 stretching strip footings, 48 strip footings beneath walls, 47 For 291 Format, project estimate, 286 Foundation applying different material to floor, 46 deleting, 45 drawing walls, 44 inserting a slab on grade, 51 moving, 44 resizing, 44, 45 Fountains, 232 Framing changing, 32 displaying, 32 editing deck frames, 175 hiding, 32 roofs, 101 Freezer, 118 User’s Guide

409

Index Furnaces, 144 Furniture applying different materials, 123 deleting, 124 editing properties, 123 inserting, 122 lowering, 123 moving, 122 outdoor, 220 raising, 123 rotating, 122

G Gable End appearance, 96 Gable roofs changing appearance of surfaces under gable ends, 96 converting from hip roofs, 96 extending gable end walls to roof, 97 Gable type, 101 Gap, between trim and wall 59 Garages, 224 Garbage bins, 122 Garden beds, 196 Garden borders, 232 Garden boxes, raised, 224 Gardens, 204 Gates deleting, 169 editing properties, 168 flipping swing, 168 flipping, 168 hinge side, 168 inserting, 167 moving, 168 Gazebos, 224 Generate Project Estimate, 286 Generate Quantity Report, 286 Geometry, editing, 258 Global Settings, 291 Glossary of Terms, 6, 379, 387 Golf Holes, 224 Graphics display, improving, 313 Graphics print quality, 304 Greenhouse, 224 Grid drawing, 240 snap, 240 Grid Mesh Spacing, 150

410

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Grid Snap, 240 Ground Floor Height above Terrain, 14 Ground floor walls, drawing, 54 Groups adding to catalogs, 334 adding to light source library, 371 adding to line styles library, 357 adding to materials library, 348 deleting from catalogs, 335 deleting from light source library, 371 deleting from line styles library, 357 deleting from materials library, 349 renaming in line styles library, 357 renaming in materials library, 349 renaming, 335 Growing season (plant), 209 Growth, plant, 208 Guarantee, 7 Guardrails, 87

H Handicap ramp, 82 Handle Style, 116 Handrail Depth, 90 Handrail Height, 90 Handrail Style, 90 Handrail Width, 90 Handrails, 87 Hanging planters, 232 Hardware Acceleration, 312 Hardwood flooring, 75 Hatched view, 31 Head Height, 18 Heater, propane, 232 Heating elements, 144 Height 205 Camera, 323 ceiling, 18 deck, 175 edging, 202 floor, 18 head, 18 insertion, 342 retaining walls, 186 specifying insertion height in Commander, 248 staircase, 82 Target Height, 323 wall, 18

Index window, 18 Height (elevation) appliances, 118 cabinets, 114 ceilings, 77 doors, 66 editing an element’s, 255 electrical elements, 134 exterior accessories, 232 HVAC elements, 145 light fixtures, 128 photo boards, 270 plants, 204 plumbing fixtures, 140 roof, 101 wall openings, 72 walls, 45, 57 windows, 70 Help E-mail Support, 6 Glossary of Terms, 6 Online Self-Support, 6 online, 6 technical, 6 Telephone Support, 6 Troubleshooting Guide, 6 Hidden Line view, 31 Hiding building elements, 34 cameras, 322 catalog panel, 311 Coordinate Icon, 248 dimensions, 36 electrical wiring, 36 framing, 32 project trace images, 37 selected building elements, 34 terrain, 155 text, 36 toolbars, 310 Highlites door, 63 window, 68 Hills deleting, 151 editing height, 151 editing peak shape, 151 moving, 151 Hills, 150 Horiz. Distance, 100

Horizontal Separation, mullion, 65, 69 Hot tubs, 224 House Builder Wizard custom element configuration, 376 disabling, 16 running when a drawing is open, 16 using, 14 House Templates, 224 How to Complete a Project, 5 How to Use the Tools, 5 Hug Terrain, 51, 166, 182, 190 HVAC Elements deleting, 145 editing properties, 145 inserting, 144 lowering, 145 moving, 145 raising, 145 rotating, 145 Hyperlinks, 343

I Icon, coordinate, 248 IES files, importing, 371 If 248 Ignore next story, 95 Image Brightness, 293 Importing 3D Studio Files, 336 dimension styles into dimension styles library, 367 elements into catalogs, 345 IES files, 371 light source files, 371 line styles into line styles library, 358, 372 materials from library file, 352 photo boards, 268 text files, 274 text styles into text styles library, 364 Improving graphics display, 313 Include First Post, 90 Include Last Post, 90 Include Posts, 90 Include railing on selected edges, 177 Include Railings, 180 Include skirting on selected edges, 177 Include Walls, 103 Included Angle, 251 In-ground pools, 224

User’s Guide

411

Index Inserting about inserting elements, 22 accessories, 122 air returns, 144 appliances, 118 cabinets, 114 columns, 48 concrete slab, 51 decks, 172 doors, 62 driveways, 190 edging, 200 electrical elements, 134 electronics, 122 exterior accessories, 232 exterior furniture, 220 exterior structures, 224 exterior walls, 55 fences, 164 fills, 196 floor registers, 144 foundation walls, 44 furniture, 122 gates, 167 HVAC elements, 144 irrigation, 236 landscaping, 193 light fixtures, 128, 228 mono footings, 49 paths, 190 patios, 181 photo boards, 268, 269 plants, 204 plumbing fixtures, 140 property lines, 158 ramps, 82 retaining walls, 186 scanned home plan, 264 sidewalks, 190 site boundary, 158 sprinklers, 236 stairs, 82 strip footings, 47 text, 274 vents, 144 walls (exterior), 54 walls (foundation), 44 walls (interior), 57 windows, 66 Insertion 342

412

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Insertion Height, 248 Insertion height, 342 Insertion Method for line-drawn elements, 22 Insertion Point, editing an element’s, 342 Installing the software, 3 Interior dimension settings, 280 Interior dimensions, auto, 279 Interior Wall Tops to Roof, 97 Interior Walls dimension setting, 279 dimension string, 279 Interior walls, inserting, 57 Interiors tab, 10 Irrigation deleting, 236 editing height, 236 editing spray, 236 inserting, 236 moving, 236 rotating, 236

J Jacks, 134 JPG exporting to, 306 importing for tracing, 264 using your own in materials, 351 Jungle Gyms, 224 Justification, text, 275

K Kitchen Builder Wizard custom element configuration, 376 using, 110 Kitchen Configuration, 376 Kitchen tutorial, 5

L Lamps, 128 Landing Connection, 83 Landing Thickness, 85, 86 Landings adding to ramps, 86 adding to stairs, 84 Landscape Lighting editing size, 228 inserting, 228 moving, 228 Landscape tab, 10

Index Landscaping decks, 171, 172 edging, 200 fences, 163, 164 fills, 196 filtering elements for selection, 39 filtering landscape elements from view, 35 garden beds, 196 gates, 167 hills and valleys, 150 inserting furniture, 220 inserting house templates, 224 inserting structures, 224 irrigation, 236 paths, 190 patios, 171 plants, 204 plateaus, 152 ponds, 196 retaining walls, 186 sidewalks, 190 slopes, 153 terrain, 150 toolbar, 10 viewing tutorial, 5 Latin plant names, 208 Latitude, 291 Launch House Builder wizard when starting new drawing, 16 Lawn edging, 200 Leader arrow style, 276 Leader with text, 275 Leaf Depth, 64 Leaf, door, 64 Lean-to roof, 97 Learn menu, 5 Learn to Use, 5 Learning 5 Left Justify Text, 275 Length 86 Lengthening edging, 201 fences, 165 paths, 190 railings, 91 retaining walls, 186 strip footings, 48 walls, 45, 57 Levels, defining locations for, 18 Libraries

Building Configuration, 376 Dimension Styles, 364 dimension styles, 364 Kitchen Configuration, 376 Light Source, 370 Line Styles, 356 Linetypes, 359 Materials, 348 Patterns, 353 Text Styles, 362 Lifetime (plant), 208 Light bulbs, changing, 129 Light fixtures changing the look of, 130, 230 changing the snap on insertion, 128 deleting, 131, 230 editing light source, 129, 228 editing size, 129, 228 inserting outdoors, 228 inserting, 128 lowering, 128 moving, 128, 228 raising, 128 rotating, 129 turning on and off, 130, 229 turning on/off, 130, 230 Light posts, 228 Light Sources adding groups to library, 371 adding to library, 371 customizing library, 370 deleting from library, 371 deleting groups from library, 371 editing color, 371 editing in light fixtures, 129, 228 editing intensity, 371 important considerations before editing, 370 saving custom light sources to library file, 371 specifying directory, 372 Light switches, 134 Lighting preference (plant), 208 Lights customizing light source library, 370 interior, 128 outdoor, 228 path, 228 Lights Directory, 372 Line Styles accessing library, 356 adding groups to line styles library, 357 User’s Guide

413

Index adding to library, 357 changing for inserted wiring, 136 deleting from library, 358 deleting groups from library, 357 editing in library, 357 important considerations when editing, 356 importing line styles from library into catalog, 358, 372 renaming groups in library, 357 saving custom line styles to library file, 358 Linear Dimensions, 280 Linetypes adding to linetypes library, 359 customizing linetypes library, 359 deleting from library, 359 editing, 359 viewing an element’s, 341 Linoleum, 75 Load city template, 292 Load IES File, 371 Location Dimming, 19 Locations adding, 18 current, 19 defining, 18 deleting, 18 filtering from view, 35 making selectable/non-selectable, 38 lock, Maintain Aspect Ratio, 350 Longitude, 291 Look Around tool, 326 Look Through, 29 Lot lines, 158, 159 Lounges, 220 Lower Width, 83, 86 Lowering appliances, 118 cabinets, 114 ceilings, 77 decks, 175 doors, 66 electrical elements, 134 elements, 255 floors, 74 furnishing elements, 123 HVAC elements, 145 light fixtures, 128 outdoor accessories, 232 photo boards, 270 plants, 204

414

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

plumbing fixtures, 140 retaining walls, 186 wall openings, 72 walls, 45, 57 windows, 70 Lowlites, 68

M Mailboxes, 232 Maintain Aspect Ratio, 264, 270, 350 Make Continuous, 90 Manufacturer, 342 Mark Text, 329, 331 Marks elevation, 328 section, 331 Materials adding groups to materials library, 348 adding to library, 349 applying to terrain, 150 changing an element’s, 259, 341 customizing materials library, 348 deleting from library, 349 deleting groups from library, 349 editing an element’s, 341 editing in library, 349 editing surface properties, 295 important notes about editing, 348 importing from library file, 352 properties, 349 renaming groups in library, 349 rotating on elements, 260, 341 saving to library file, 351 scale of in rendered views, 350 Tile Height, 350 Tile Width, 350 using textures from outside sources, 350, 351 viewing an element’s, 341 Materials Paintbrush, 259 Mats, door, 232 Max Stringer Spacing, 85 Max. Post Spacing, 166 Max. Riser Height, 180 Maximizing a view window, 318 Measure tool, 244 Measuring area, 245 Medicine cabinets, 122 Member Spacing, 101 Menu Bar, 10

Index Menus for editing, 24, 254 Microwave, 118 Min number of vertices per component, 338 Mirrors, 122 Modify Elements, 24, 254 Mono footings deleting, 50 editing size, 50 editing type, 50 inserting under columns, 49 moving, 50 rotating, 50 Mono Footings Attached to Columns, 49 month 206 Month, 291 Move Target, 329 Move Whole Element deck, 174 fill, 197 plateau, 153 roof, 99 slab, 51, 182 Moving accessories, 122 appliances, 118 berms, 152 cabinets, 114 cameras for 3D views, 322 columns, 49 deck stairs, 179 decks, 174 dimension line, 281 doors, 65 edging, 201 electrical elements, 135 electronics, 122 elements vertically, 255 elements, 254 elevation target, 329 elevations marks, 328 exterior accessories, 232 exterior furniture, 220 exterior structures, 224 filled areas, 197 foundation, 44 furniture, 122 gates, 168 hills, 151 HVAC elements, 145

irrigation, 236 leader text, 277 light fixtures, 128 mono footings, 50 outdoor lighting, 228 paths, 191 photo boards, 269 plants, 204 plateaus, 153 plumbing fixtures, 140 ramps, 87 roofs, 99 section marks, 331 site boundary, 158 skylights, 104 slabs, 51, 182 slopes, 155 sprinklers, 236 stairs, 87 strip footings, 47 text leader, 276 text, 274 toolbars, 310 trenches, 152 valleys, 151 wall openings, 71 walls, 54 windows, 70 Mugs, 122 Mulched beds, 196 Mullion, 65, 69 Multiple text insert, 274

N Name generation about, 339 editing the formula, 339 using, 339 Name, building location, 18 Naming elements, 336 New Catalog, 344 New Project, 4 New View, 316 Newel Depth, 91 Newel Spacing, 90 Newel Style, 91 Newel Width, 91 Nightstands, 122 North arrows, 232

User’s Guide

415

Index Nosing Depth (stairs), 84 Nosing, 181 Nosing, cabinet, 115 Note 242, 344 Notebook page (Encyclopedia), 213, 216 Notes, in properties dialog, 343 Number of copies, 304 Number of Floors, 14 Number of Steps, 83 Number, location, 18

O Obelisks, 232 Object Snap, 240 OBJSNAP, 240 Office furniture, 122 Offset below roof surface, 97 Offset from wall, 60 Offset, trim, 59 Older versions opening drawings from, 2 uninstalling, 3 Online Help, 6 Online Software Help, 6 Open Catalog, 346 Open View, 316 Open, 300 Opening catalogs, 346 drawing from older versions, 2 sample projects, 300 saved estimate, 287 saved project, 300 saved projects, 300 views, 316 Openings creating in automatic ceilings, 78 creating in manual ceilings, 78 creating in roofs, 102 curving ceiling openings, 79 curving deck opening edges, 178 deleting from walls, 72 deleting, 72 dimension string, 278 dimension style, 279 editing wall opening shapes, 71 editing wall opening size, 71 inserting in ceilings, 78 inserting in decks, 177

416

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

inserting in floors, 75 inserting in walls, 70 lowering in walls, 72 moving, 71 raising in walls, 72 removing from decks, 178 reshaping in decks, 178 resizing in ceilings, 78 resizing in decks, 178 Orientation, element, 256, 340 Ortho, 241 Orthogonal view mode, 324 Outdoor accessories, 232 Outdoor fireplaces, 232 Outdoor furniture, 220 Outdoor structures, 224 Outlets, 134 Oven, 118 Overall dimension string, 278 Overall Height, 82 Overhang deck beams, 176 deck boards, 176 deck joists, 176 deck stairs, 181 roof, 100 Overhang Drop, 100 Override system units, 283, 366

P Package contents, 2 Pad footings editing size, 50 editing type, 50 inserting, 49 moving, 50 Pads applying different materials to, 183 inserting, 51, 181 Paint, 58 Paintbrush, materials, 259 Panelling, wood, 58 Panning, 30 Pans, 122 Parallel view mode, 324 Part No., 342 Path lights, 228 Paths applying different materials, 191

Index deleting, 191 drawing, 190 editing length, 190 editing thickness, 191 editing width, 191 moving, 191 rotating, 190 Patio furniture, 220 Patio umbrellas, 232 Patios applying different materials to, 183 creating, 181 deleting, 183 editing thickness, 183 moving, 182 reshaping, 182 resizing, 182 rotating, 182 Patterned properties, 351 Patterned view, 31 Patterns customizing library, 353 editing on elements, 259 editing, 353 important notes about editing, 353 viewing an element’s, 341 Patterns, element, 341 Perspective view mode, 323 Perspective, 3D, 29 Phone jacks, 134 Photo Boards changing elevation, 270 changing to rotating, 270 changing to stationary, 270 creating transparency in, 270 deleting, 270 editing size, 270 importing, 268 inserting, 269 moving, 269 rotating, 269 saving to the catalog, 269 Photo realistic images, 289 Pianos, 122 Pick and drag insertion method, selecting, 22 Pick Points insertion method, selecting, 22 Picnic tables, 220 Picture page (Encyclopedia), 214 Pictures, 122 Piers, inserting, 48

Pixel Search Distance, 241 Place New Camera, 322 Plan view displaying, 28 rendered, 28 Plans importing for tracing, 264 sample, 300 Plant Care Calendar 210 Plant Encyclopedia about, 207 accessing, 208 care requirements, 208 Diseases page, 215 growth information, 208 lighting preferences, 208 Main page, 208 Notebook page, 213 Picture page, 214 Plant Care Calendar, 210 searching for a plant, 208 selecting a plant to add to a catalog, 217 selecting a plant to view, 208 temperature preferences, 208 water requirements, 208 World Map page, 212 Plant Growth Over Time, 206 Plant Seasonal Change, 206 Planters, 232 Planting age, 205 Plants adding to catalog from Encyclopedia, 217 applying seasonal change, 206 care calendar, 210 changing age, 205 changing elevation, 204 deleting, 206 diseases, 215, 216 editing appearance in 2D plan view, 204 editing size, 205 Encyclopedia, 207 filtering by selected criteria, 216 forcing custom size, 205 inserting, 204 life expectancy, 208 moving, 204 seeing growth over time, 206 soil requirements, 208 usages, 208 zone information, 208 User’s Guide

417

Index Plateaus creating, 152 deleting, 153 editing height, 153 editing peak shape, 153 moving, 153 reshaping, 153 stretching, 153 Plates, 122 Playgrounds, 224 Playhouses, 224 Plumb fascia, 101 Plumb soffit, 101 Plumbing Fixtures applying different colors/finishes, 141 deleting, 141 editing size, 140 inserting, 140 lowering, 140 moving, 140 raising, 140 rotating, 140 Pointer tool, 23, 254 Polar Coordinate System, 249, 250 Ponds, 196 Pool slide, 224 Pool table, 122 Pools, 224 Porch roof, 97 Position Offset, 83, 86 Position, materials on elements, 260 Post Depth, 90 Post edging, 200 Post Extension, 166 Post Height, 90 Post Position, 90 Post Rotation, 90, 166 Post Spacing, 90 Post Style, 90 Post Width, 90, 166 Posts deck, 175 deleting, 49 editing elevation, 49 editing size, 49 editing type, 49 fence, 166 general, 48 inserting, 48 moving, 49

418

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

railings, 90 Pot lights, 128 Pots, 122 Precision for units of measure, 244 Precision, 344 Pre-Selection, enabling, 23 Preset Cameras, 324 Preventing 16 Preview, element, 339 Previous versions opening drawings from, 2 uninstalling, 3 Price, 342 Pricing, editing, 287 Print Scale, editing, 319 Print Setup, 304 Print to Scale, 304 Print, 303 Printing area/perimeter calculations, 245 drawings, 303 editing the print scale, 319 project estimate, 286 quality, 304 to scale, 304 Program Basics, 5 Program Help, 6 Project Estimate changing report format, 286 filtering, 286 generating, 286 printing, 286 saving, 286 specifying name, 287 specifying save location, 287 turning grid lines off, 286 viewing saved estimate, 287 Project Trace Image deleting, 265 displaying/hiding, 37 importing, 264 making selectable/non-selectable, 40 resizing, 264 Projections dimension string, 278 Projects opening, 300 repairing, 300 saving as templates, 301 saving, 301 Projects Directory, 301

Index Propane heater, 232 Properties accessories, 123 appearance, 341 appliances, 118, 123 berms, 152 cabinets, 114 columns, 49 deck posts, 175 deck railings, 176 deck stairs, 179 decks, 175 dimensions, 282 doors, 62, 63, 64 edging, 202 editing element properties in catalogs, 339 editing, 346 electrical elements, 135 electronics, 123 element composition, 258 element geometry, 258 element size, 258 element, 258, 346 elevation, 329 exterior accessories, 232 exterior furniture, 220 exterior structures, 225 fence, 165 floors, 75 furniture, 123 gate, 168 hills, 151 HVAC elements, 145 light fixtures, 129, 228 mono footings, 50 of catalogs, 346 openings, 71 path elements, 191 photo boards, 270 plants, 204 plateaus, 153 plumbing fixtures, 140 railings, 89 ramps, 85 retaining walls, 186 roofs, 100 Section Properties, 331 skylights, 105 slopes, 155 stairs, 83, 84

stairs/ramps, 82 strip footings, 47 viewing an element’s, 334 viewing, 346 wall openings, 71 windows, 67 Property lines, 158, 159

Q Quality, rendering, 293 Quantity page, 342 Quantity Reports generating, 286

R Radius, 251 Radius, nosing curve, 115 Rafters, 101, 384 Rail edging, 200 Railings by Picking Points, 89 by picking points, 89 changing a deck’s railings, 176 deleting, 91 editing properties, 89 horizontal, 89 inserting on a floor, 89 inserting on stairs automatically, 87 inserting, 87 on deck stairs, 180 on decks, 177 on stair center, 88 on stair left, 88 on stair right, 88 parts, 89 rotating, 91 stretching, 91 Rails (edging), 200 Raised garden boxes, 224 Raised Heel, 101 Raising appliances, 118 cabinets, 114 ceilings, 77 decks, 175 doors, 66 electrical elements, 134 elements, 255 floors, 74 User’s Guide

419

Index furnishing elements, 123 HVAC elements, 145 light fixtures, 128 outdoor accessories, 232 photo boards, 270 plants, 204 plumbing fixtures, 140 retaining walls, 186 wall openings, 72 walls, 45, 57 windows, 70 Raked fascia, 101 Raked fence, 166 Raked soffit, 101 Raking walls, 97 Ramp Thickness, 85 Ramps adding landings to, 86 adding segments to, 86 changing a segment type, 87 deleting segments from, 87 deleting, 87 editing layout, 86 editing properties, 85 editing size properties, 82 inserting, 82 moving, 87 rotating, 87 Range, 118 Recently used file list, 300 Redo, 254 Reference point icon, 248 Reference point, commander, 249 Refreshing the view during rendering, 293 Refrigerator, 118 Registering the program, 4 Registers, 144 Rename Group line styles library, 357 materials library, 349 Renaming groups in View Manager, 316 groups, 335 View Windows, 318 Render 3DTrueView, 292 Render to File, 295, 296 Rendered 2D plan view, 28 Rendered Outline view, 31 Rendered properties, 350 Rendered view, 31

420

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Rendering about, 290 adjusting image brightness, 293 changing refresh rate during lighting calculations, 293 changing refresh rate, 293 creating a 3DTrueView rendering, 292 creating fog effect, 294 creating smoke effect, 294 enabling ambient lighting, 294 saving multiple image files, 296 setting quality, 293 setting the viewpoint, 290 setting up scene, 290 specifying image size, 296 turning daylight off, 294 using antialiasing, 294 Repair Project, 300 Report filter, 286 Report format, estimate, 286 Report, material, 286 Requirements, system, 2 Reset Camera, 327 Reshaping deck openings, 178 decks, 174 filled areas, 196 paths, 190 plateaus, 153 slabs, 51, 182 wiring segments, 136 Resizing catalog panel, 311 ceiling openings, 78 deck openings, 178 exterior wall layout, 54, 56 fills, 196 foundation, 44, 45 Project Trace Image, 264 slabs, 51, 182 Resolution, setting, 4 Restoring previous view window arrangement, 318 Retaining Walls applying different finishes to, 187 breaking, 187 curving, 186 definition, 384 deleting, 187 drawing, 186

Index editing properties, 186 lengthening, 186 lengthening/shortening, 186 rotating, 186 shortening, 186 Right Justify Text, 275 Right-click menus accessing, 24, 254 Riser Angle, 84 Riser Height, 82, 180 Riser Maximum, 83 Roof Openings removing, 102 Roof tiles, 101 Roofs applying different materials to, 101 by Perimeter, 94 by Picking Points, 94 changing appearance of surfaces under gable ends, 96 changing the way a lower-story roof is created, 95 changing the way lower-story roofs are created, 95 converting hip to gable, 96 cutting openings in, 102 deleting, 102 displaying framing, 32 editing height, 101 editing shape, 100 editing size, 100 extending gable end walls to roof, 97 inserting automatically, 94 inserting dormers, 102 inserting skylights, 104 moving, 99 porch, 97 removing openings from, 102 rotating, 100 selecting for editing, 99 shed, 97 solution types, 95 specifying framing details, 101 stretching, 99 Rotating accessories, 122 appliances, 118 cabinets, 114 decks, 174 edging, 201

electronics, 122 elements, 255, 256, 340 exterior accessories, 232 exterior furniture, 220 exterior structures, 224 filled areas, 197 furniture, 122 HVAC elements, 145 irrigation, 236 light fixtures, 129 materials on elements, 260, 341 mono footings, 50 paths, 190 photo boards, 269 plumbing fixtures, 140 railings, 91 ramps, 87 retaining walls, 186 roofs, 100 skylights, 104 slabs, 52, 182 sprinklers, 236 stairs, 87 text, 274 using the Commander, 250 walls, 45, 57 Rugs, 122

S Samples, 300 Sandboxes, 224 Satisfaction Guaranteed, 7 Save All, 301 Save As, 301 Save Catalog As, 345 Save Catalog, 344, 345 Save city template, 292 Save directory, default, 301 Save Element to Catalog, 336 Save location, 3DTrueView image, 295 Save location, project estimate, 287 Save, 301 Saved Project, 300 Saving 3DTrueView renderings, 295 automatically, 301 catalogs, 345 cities, 292 custom materials to library file, 351

User’s Guide

421

Index dimension styles to library file, 367 multiple rendered images in same project, 296 photo boards to the catalog, 269 project estimate, 286 projects as templates, 301 projects, 301 text styles to the library file, 363 Scale drawing, 316 editing, 319 Fit to Page, 304 light source intensity, 371 of dimensions, 304, 319 of materials, 350 of text, 304, 319 of views, 304, 319 printing to, 304 printouts, 319 Scaling project trace images, 264 Scanned floor plans, importing, 264 Scene setup for rendering, 290 Sconces, 128 Screen area size, setting, 4 Screen layout, 9 Screen settings, 309 Screen tips, disabling, 23 Screened rooms, 224 Season Change, 206 Season Color Diagram, 209 Seat, 101 Second Floor, adding, 55 Secondary Post Position, 166 Section Marks On/Off, 331 Section Properties, 331 Section Views creating, 330 deleting, 331 editing properties, 331 editing, 331 turning section marks on/off, 331 viewing, 330 Select 36, 37 Select All, 23, 39 Select button (3D Studio file), 338 Select button (Encyclopedia), 217 Select elements on current location only while in plan view, 24 Select None, 39 Select Previous, 23

422

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

Select/Edit, 23, 254 Selectability of building elements, 38, 39 of building locations, 38 of dimensions, 40 of electrical wiring, 40 of elements in 2D plan view, 24 of project trace images, 40 of text, 39 specifying, 37 Selecting disabling pre-selection, 23 elements, 23 roofs, 99 Selection Filter about, 37 filtering building elements, 38, 39 filtering building locations, 38 filtering dimensions, 40 filtering electrical wiring, 40 filtering landscape elements, 39 filtering project trace images, 40 filtering text, 39 Selection mode, 23, 254 Set Current Time, 291 Set Decking Direction, 174 Settings, saving in a template, 301 Shape door, 63 Shed roof, 97 Sheds, 224 Shelves inserting, 122 showing in cabinets, 115 Shingles, 101 Shortcut menus, 24, 254 Shortening edging, 201 fences, 165 paths, 190 railings, 91 retaining walls, 186 strip footings, 48 walls, 45, 57 Show Backsplash, 115 Show contours, 150 Show Coordinate Icon, 248 Show Counter, 115 Show Cut Lines, 85 Show Grid (estimate), 286

Index Show Grid, 245 Show Handle, 116 Show Nosing, 115 Show Riser, 83 Show Shelves, 115 Show trunk in plan, 205 Shower curtains, 122 Showers, 140 Shrubs, 204 Shutters, 122 Side Offset, 91 Sidelites door, 63 window, 68 Sidewalks, 190 Siding, 56 Simplify, 338 Simplifying 338 Sinks, 116, 140 Site Boundary, 158, 159 Size editing an element’s, 258 printouts, 319 property page, 340 rendered image, 296 Skirting, deck, 177 Skylights deleting, 105 editing properties, 105 inserting, 104 moving, 104 rotating, 104 Slabs applying different materials to, 183 creating, 181 deleting, 52, 183 editing thickness, 52, 183 inserting on grade, 51 moving, 51, 182 reshaping, 51, 182 resizing, 51, 182 rotating, 52, 182 Slide tool, 326 Slope Type, 100 Slope Value, 100 Slope, ramp, 86 Slopes creating, 153 deleting, 155 editing angle, 155

editing height, 155 moving, 155 stretching, 154 Smoke detectors, 134 Smoke, 294 Snap Angle, 241 Snap Edge, 342 Snap Light To, 128 Snapping at defined angles, 241 orthogonal, 241 to drawing grid, 240 to objects, 240 Sofas, 122 Soffit type, 101 Soil beds, 196 Soil requirements (plant), 208 Solution Type (roofs) 95 Spacing deck boards, 176 posts along beam, 175 Specify Framing, 32, 101 Specular, 295, 350 Spinning in 3D view, 326 Splitting floors, 74 Spray properties, sprinkler, 236 Sprinklers deleting, 236 editing height, 236 editing spray properties, 236 inserting, 236 moving, 236 rotating, 236 Square footage, measuring, 245 Stairs adding flights to, 84 adding landings to, 84 adding to deck, 178 changing a segment type, 84 deleting segments from, 84 deleting, 87 editing cut line, 85 editing details, 84 editing layout, 83 editing size properties, 82 inserting railings on, 87 inserting, 82 moving, 87 parts, 82 rotating, 87 User’s Guide

423

Index Standard Report Form, 286 Start a New Project, 4 Starting from scratch, 4 Starting the program, 4 Startup dialog about, 4 disabling, 4 Stationary photo board, 268 Status Bar about, 12 displaying, 312 hiding, 312 Stepped fence, 166 Stone, 56, 187 Storage sheds, 224 Stories adding, 55 defining locations for, 18 Stretching berms, 152 decks, 174 dimensions, 281 dormers, 104 edging, 201 exterior wall layout, 54, 56 fences, 165 fills, 196 foundation wall layout, 44 paths, 190 plateaus, 153 railings, 91 retaining walls, 186 roofs, 99 section marks, 331 slopes, 154 strip footings, 48 text leader, 276 trenches, 152 walls, 44, 45, 54, 56, 57 wiring segments, 136 Stringer Side Offset, 84 Stringer Thickness, 85 Stringer Waste, 84 Strip footings breaking, 48 deleting, 48 editing size, 47 editing type, 47 lengthening/shortening, 48 moving/stretching, 47

424

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

preventing breaking, 47 stretching, 48 Strip Footings Attached to Walls, 47 Structures, exterior, 224 Sundials, 232 Supplier, 342 Support height above main roof, 103 Support Height, 101 Support, technical, 6 Surface Properties, materials, 295 Survey, site, 158, 159 Suspended Ceiling, 77, 384 Swing Type, 63 Swing, flipping, 65 Swings, 224 Switches, 134 System Requirements, 2

T Tables, 122 Tables, patio, 220 Tables, picnic, 220 Tabs changing color of, 310 disabling tabbed toolbars, 310 displaying toolbars in 310 hiding, 310 showing, 310 toolbar, 10 view tabs, 317 Target changing the height of, 323 moving an elevation’s, 329 moving, 323 orbiting around the camera, 326 Target Height, changing, 323 Technical Support, 6 Telephones, 122 Television outlets, 134 Televisions, 122 Temperature preferences (plant), 208 Template path to Templates directory, 302 saving a project as, 301 setting default, 302 starting drawings without, 302 Templates, house, 224 Temporary Directory, 303 Tennis courts, 224

Index Terrain applying a texture and color, 150 base level, 150 hugging, 51, 182, 190 settings, 150 toolbar, 11 turning on/off, 155 Terrain Base Level, 150 Terrain tab, 10 Text adding to drawing, 274 changing justification, 275 changing the style of inserted text, 275 deleting, 275 displaying/hiding, 36 editing content, 274 editing leader text, 277 filtering for selection, 39 importing text files, 274 moving, 274 rotating, 274 scale, 304, 319 with leader, 275 Text Color, 275, 363 Text Height, 275, 363 Text Styles changing the style of existing text, 275 customizing text styles library, 362 editing in elevation marks, 329 editing in section marks, 331 elevation marks, 329 important considerations when editing, 362 importing text styles from library into catalog, 364 saving to library file, 363 Text with Leader adding, 275 changing leader arrow, 276 deleting, 277 editing text, 277 moving the text, 277 moving/stretching, 276 Textures applied to elements, 341 applying different textures to elements, 259 applying to the terrain, 150 appropriate sizing for, 351 cropped, 351 cut-off, 351 specifying location of directory, 352

using different, 350 using from outside sources, 351 viewing an element’s, 341 Textures Directory, 352 TGA exporting to, 306 importing for tracing, 264 using your own in materials, 351 Thermostats, 134 Thickness foundation slab, 52 patio slab, 183 roof, 100 Tile Height, 350 Tile Horizontally, 350 Tile Open Views, 317 Tile Vertically, 350 Tile Width, 350 Tiles, 75 Time of day, 291 Time Zone, 291 Title 10 Title bar, 10 Toaster, 118 Toe Depth, 115 Toe Height, 116 Toilet paper dispenser, 122 Toilets, 140 Toolbars Basic View Control, 11 Building, 10 changing color of toolbar areas, 310 changing the background color of, 310 displaying in non-tabbed format, 310 displaying in tabs 310 hiding, 310 Interiors, 10 Landscape, 10 moving, 310 showing, 310 tabbed, 10 terrain, 11 Zoom and Navigate, 11 Tooltips on elements, 23 Topography, recreating, 149 Total Steps, 82 Towel accessories, 122 Tracing imported floor plans, 264 Trampolines, 224 Transfer User’s Guide

425

Index dimension styles, 367 line styles, 358 materials, 351, 352 text styles, 363 Transom door lites, 65 window lites, 69 Transparency, 295, 350 Transparency, in photo boards, 270 Trash Compactor, 118 Tread Run, 83 Tread Thickness, 84 Trees, 204 Trellises, 232 Trenches creating, 151 deleting, 152 moving, 152 stretching, 152 Trim basepoint, 60 Trim, adding to walls, 59 Troubleshooting Guide, 6 Trunk Diameter, 205 Trusses, 101, 385 Tubs, 140 Tutorials Advanced Roofs, 5 Becoming a Power User, 5 Catalogs, 5 Customizing Elements, 5 Importing Your Own Images, 5 Multiple Floors/Split Levels, 5 Visualizing in 3D, 5 Tutorials, 5

U Umbrella, patio, 232 Undo, 254 Uninstalling previous version, 3 Units of Measure, 244, 344 Upper Offset, 83, 86 Upper Width, 83, 86 Usage (plant), 208 Use Solid Color, 350 Use Texture, 350 Using 14

V Valleys

426

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6

deleting, 151 inserting, 150 moving, 151 Vegetable garden boxes, 224 Vents, 144 Vert. Distance, 100 Vertical Separation, mullion, 65, 69 View Filter about, 33 filtering building elements from view, 34 filtering dimensions from view, 36 filtering landscape elements, 35 filtering locations from view, 35 filtering text from view, 36 View Manager accessing, 316 adding groups to, 316 adding new views to, 316 deleting groups in, 316 deleting views in, 319 renaming groups, 316 View Mode Parallel, 324 Perspective, 323 View Project Estimate, 287 View Sample Plans, 300 View Tabs turning on/off, 317 View Windows cascading, 317 creating new, 316 creating, 316 deleting, 319 managing, 316 maximizing, 318 renaming, 318 restoring the previous arrangement, 318 switching between, 317 Viewing 2D Designer’s View, 28 2D Plan View, 28 cameras, 322 elevations, 328 framing, 32 in 3D, 29 managing views, 316 section views, 330 switching between view windows, 317 Viewing Angle increasing/decreasing, 325

Index selecting a preset camera angle, 324 Viewing Field, 325 Viewpoint in 3DTrueView renderings, 290 Viewpoint, 3D view, 322 Views exporting, 306 opening, 316 Volleyball courts, 224 VRML export, 306

W Wainscoting, 59 Walk Around tool, 326 Wall air returns, 144 Wall Height, 18, 45, 57, 186 Wall lights, 128 Wall Openings deleting, 72 editing shape, 71 editing size, 71 inserting, 70 lowering, 72 moving, 71 raising, 72 Wallpaper borders, 59 Wallpaper, 58 Walls adding trim to, 59 applying different finishes to, 56 attaching strip footings to, 47 breaking, 46, 58 concrete, 44 curving, 46, 58 deleting openings, 72 deleting, 46, 55, 58 displayed framing, 32 editing elevation, 45, 57, 186 editing height, 45, 57, 186 editing opening shapes, 71 editing properties, 45, 57 editing width, 45, 57, 186 extending to gable ends, 97 exterior, 54 foundation, 44 ground floor exterior, 54 inserting openings in, 70 interior, 57 lengthening, 57 lengthening/shortening, 45, 57

moving openings, 71 moving, 54 painting, 58 retaining, 186 rotating, 45, 57 second floor exterior, 55 shortening, 57 stretching the layout, 54, 56 stretching, 44, 45, 54, 56 wallpapering, 58 Washer, 118 Water heaters, 144 Water requirements (plant), 208 Weather vanes, 232 Width, wall, 45, 57, 186 Windchimes, 232 Windmills, 232 Window Height, 67 Window treatments, 122 Window Trim, 59 Window Width, 67 Windows deleting, 70 editing details, 69 editing lites, 68 editing size, 67 editing type, 67 flipping, 70 inserting, 66 lowering, 70 moving, 70 raising, 70 skylights, 104 Wireframe view, 31 Wiring changing line style, 136 deleting, 137 displaying/hiding, 36 inserting, 136 making selectable/non-selectable, 40 reshaping, 136 stretching, 136 Wizards Deck Builder, 172 House Builder, 14, 16 Kitchen Builder 110 Wood flooring, 75 Wood panelling, 58 Wood stoves, 144 World Map page, 212, 216 User’s Guide

427

Index WRL export, 306

X X, Y, Z coordinates, 250

Z Z 250 Zone (plant), 208 Zoom and Navigate toolbar, 11 Zoom Realtime, 30 Zoom to Fit, 30 Zoom Window, 30 Zooming 30 Zooming in and out, 30

428

3D Home Architect® Design Suite Deluxe 6